Tcl Source Code

compat/zlib/contrib/dotzlib/DotZLib/UnitTests.cs
compat/zlib/contrib/vstudio/readme.txt
compat/zlib/contrib/vstudio/*/zlib.rc
compat/zlib/win32/*.txt
compat/zlib/win64/*.txt
libtommath/*.dsp
libtommath/*.sln
libtommath/*.vcproj
tools/tcl.hpj.in
tools/tcl.wse.in
win/buildall.vc.bat
win/coffbase.txt
win/makefile.vc
win/rules.vc
win/rules-ext.vc
win/targets.vc
win/tcl.dsp
win/tcl.dsw
win/tcl.hpj.in

Important Note
==========
Please do not file issues with Tcl on Github. They are unlikely to be noticed in a timely fashion. Tcl issues are hosted in the [tcl fossil repository on core.tcl.tk](https://core.tcl.tk/tcl/tktnew); please post them there.

Important Note
==========
Please do not file pull requests with Tcl on Github. They are unlikely to be noticed in a timely fashion. Tcl issues (including patches) are hosted in the [tcl fossil repository on core.tcl.tk](https://core.tcl.tk/tcl/tktnew); please post them there.

	an expr syntax error (masked by a [catch]).

	* generic/tclCompCmds.c (TclCompileReturnCmd):	Added crash protection
	to handle callers other than TclCompileScript() failing to meet the
	initialization assumptions of the TIP 280 code in CompileWord().

	* generic/tclCompExpr.c:	Suppress the attempt to convert to
	numeric when pre-compiling a constant expresion indicates an error.

2007-08-22  Miguel Sofer  <[email protected]>

	* generic/tclExecute.c (TEBC): disable the new shortcut to frequent
	INSTs for debug builds. REVERTED (collision with alternative fix)

2007-08-21  Don Porter	<[email protected]>

	an expr syntax error (masked by a [catch]).

	* generic/tclCompCmds.c (TclCompileReturnCmd):	Added crash protection
	to handle callers other than TclCompileScript() failing to meet the
	initialization assumptions of the TIP 280 code in CompileWord().

	* generic/tclCompExpr.c:	Suppress the attempt to convert to
	numeric when pre-compiling a constant expression indicates an error.

2007-08-22  Miguel Sofer  <[email protected]>

	* generic/tclExecute.c (TEBC): disable the new shortcut to frequent
	INSTs for debug builds. REVERTED (collision with alternative fix)

2007-08-21  Don Porter	<[email protected]>

         Modifications of Unzip for Zip64
         Copyright (C) 2007-2008 Even Rouault

         Modifications for Zip64 support on both zip and unzip
         Copyright (C) 2009-2010 Mathias Svensson ( http://result42.com )
*/


#if (!defined(_WIN32)) && (!defined(WIN32)) && (!defined(__APPLE__))
        #ifndef __USE_FILE_OFFSET64
                #define __USE_FILE_OFFSET64
        #endif
        #ifndef __USE_LARGEFILE64
                #define __USE_LARGEFILE64
        #endif
................................................................................
                #define _LARGEFILE64_SOURCE
        #endif
        #ifndef _FILE_OFFSET_BIT
                #define _FILE_OFFSET_BIT 64
        #endif
#endif

#ifdef __APPLE__
// In darwin and perhaps other BSD variants off_t is a 64 bit value, hence no need for specific 64 bit functions
#define FOPEN_FUNC(filename, mode) fopen(filename, mode)
#define FTELLO_FUNC(stream) ftello(stream)
#define FSEEKO_FUNC(stream, offset, origin) fseeko(stream, offset, origin)
#else
#define FOPEN_FUNC(filename, mode) fopen64(filename, mode)
#define FTELLO_FUNC(stream) ftello64(stream)
#define FSEEKO_FUNC(stream, offset, origin) fseeko64(stream, offset, origin)
#endif



#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <time.h>
#include <errno.h>
#include <fcntl.h>

................................................................................
    printf("MiniZip 1.1, demo of zLib + MiniZip64 package, written by Gilles Vollant\n");
    printf("more info on MiniZip at http://www.winimage.com/zLibDll/minizip.html\n\n");
}

void do_help()
{
    printf("Usage : minizip [-o] [-a] [-0 to -9] [-p password] [-j] file.zip [files_to_add]\n\n" \

           "  -o  Overwrite existing file.zip\n" \
           "  -a  Append to existing file.zip\n" \
           "  -0  Store only\n" \
           "  -1  Compress faster\n" \
           "  -9  Compress better\n\n" \
           "  -j  exclude path. store only the file name.\n\n");
}
................................................................................
     largeFile = 1;

                fclose(pFile);
  }

 return largeFile;
}













































































































































int main(argc,argv)
    int argc;
    char *argv[];
{
    int i;

    int opt_overwrite=0;
    int opt_compress_level=Z_DEFAULT_COMPRESSION;
    int opt_exclude_path=0;
    int zipfilenamearg = 0;
    char filename_try[MAXFILENAME+16];
    int zipok;
    int err=0;
    int size_buf=0;
................................................................................
                        opt_overwrite = 1;
                    if ((c=='a') || (c=='A'))
                        opt_overwrite = 2;
                    if ((c>='0') && (c<='9'))
                        opt_compress_level = c-'0';
                    if ((c=='j') || (c=='J'))
                        opt_exclude_path = 1;


                    if (((c=='p') || (c=='P')) && (i+1<argc))
                    {
                        password=argv[i+1];
                        i++;
                    }
                }
            }
................................................................................

        for (i=zipfilenamearg+1;(i<argc) && (err==ZIP_OK);i++)
        {
            if (!((((*(argv[i]))=='-') || ((*(argv[i]))=='/')) &&
                  ((argv[i][1]=='o') || (argv[i][1]=='O') ||
                   (argv[i][1]=='a') || (argv[i][1]=='A') ||
                   (argv[i][1]=='p') || (argv[i][1]=='P') ||

                   ((argv[i][1]>='0') || (argv[i][1]<='9'))) &&
                  (strlen(argv[i]) == 2)))
            {
                FILE * fin;
                int size_read;
                const char* filenameinzip = argv[i];
                const char *savefilenameinzip;
                zip_fileinfo zi;
                unsigned long crcFile=0;
                int zip64 = 0;

                zi.tmz_date.tm_sec = zi.tmz_date.tm_min = zi.tmz_date.tm_hour =
                zi.tmz_date.tm_mday = zi.tmz_date.tm_mon = zi.tmz_date.tm_year = 0;
                zi.dosDate = 0;
                zi.internal_fa = 0;
                zi.external_fa = 0;
                filetime(filenameinzip,&zi.tmz_date,&zi.dosDate);

/*
                err = zipOpenNewFileInZip(zf,filenameinzip,&zi,
                                 NULL,0,NULL,0,NULL / * comment * /,
                                 (opt_compress_level != 0) ? Z_DEFLATED : 0,
                                 opt_compress_level);
*/
                if ((password != NULL) && (err==ZIP_OK))
                    err = getFileCrc(filenameinzip,buf,size_buf,&crcFile);

                zip64 = isLargeFile(filenameinzip);

                                                         /* The path name saved, should not include a leading slash. */
               /*if it did, windows/xp and dynazip couldn't read the zip file. */
                 savefilenameinzip = filenameinzip;
                 while( savefilenameinzip[0] == '\\' || savefilenameinzip[0] == '/' )
                 {
                     savefilenameinzip++;
                 }

                 /*should the zip file contain any path at all?*/
                 if( opt_exclude_path )
                 {
                     const char *tmpptr;
                     const char *lastslash = 0;
                     for( tmpptr = savefilenameinzip; *tmpptr; tmpptr++)
                     {
                         if( *tmpptr == '\\' || *tmpptr == '/')
                         {
                             lastslash = tmpptr;
                         }
                     }
                     if( lastslash != NULL )
                     {
                         savefilenameinzip = lastslash+1; // base filename follows last slash.
                     }
                 }

                 /**/
                err = zipOpenNewFileInZip3_64(zf,savefilenameinzip,&zi,
                                 NULL,0,NULL,0,NULL /* comment*/,
                                 (opt_compress_level != 0) ? Z_DEFLATED : 0,
                                 opt_compress_level,0,
                                 /* -MAX_WBITS, DEF_MEM_LEVEL, Z_DEFAULT_STRATEGY, */
                                 -MAX_WBITS, DEF_MEM_LEVEL, Z_DEFAULT_STRATEGY,
                                 password,crcFile, zip64);

                if (err != ZIP_OK)
                    printf("error in opening %s in zipfile\n",filenameinzip);
                else
                {
                    fin = FOPEN_FUNC(filenameinzip,"rb");
                    if (fin==NULL)
                    {
                        err=ZIP_ERRNO;
                        printf("error in opening %s for reading\n",filenameinzip);
                    }
                }

                if (err == ZIP_OK)
                    do
                    {
                        err = ZIP_OK;
                        size_read = (int)fread(buf,1,size_buf,fin);
                        if (size_read < size_buf)
                            if (feof(fin)==0)
                        {
                            printf("error in reading %s\n",filenameinzip);
                            err = ZIP_ERRNO;
                        }

                        if (size_read>0)
                        {
                            err = zipWriteInFileInZip (zf,buf,size_read);
                            if (err<0)
                            {
                                printf("error in writing %s in the zipfile\n",
                                                 filenameinzip);
                            }

                        }
                    } while ((err == ZIP_OK) && (size_read>0));

                if (fin)
                    fclose(fin);

                if (err<0)
                    err=ZIP_ERRNO;
                else
                {
                    err = zipCloseFileInZip(zf);
                    if (err!=ZIP_OK)
                        printf("error in closing %s in the zipfile\n",
                                    filenameinzip);

                }
            }
        }
        errclose = zipClose(zf,NULL);
        if (errclose != ZIP_OK)
            printf("error in closing %s\n",filename_try);
    }

         Modifications of Unzip for Zip64
         Copyright (C) 2007-2008 Even Rouault

         Modifications for Zip64 support on both zip and unzip
         Copyright (C) 2009-2010 Mathias Svensson ( http://result42.com )
*/


#if (!defined(_WIN32)) && (!defined(WIN32)) && (!defined(__APPLE__))
        #ifndef __USE_FILE_OFFSET64
                #define __USE_FILE_OFFSET64
        #endif
        #ifndef __USE_LARGEFILE64
                #define __USE_LARGEFILE64
        #endif
................................................................................
                #define _LARGEFILE64_SOURCE
        #endif
        #ifndef _FILE_OFFSET_BIT
                #define _FILE_OFFSET_BIT 64
        #endif
#endif

#if defined(__APPLE__) || defined(IOAPI_NO_64)
// In darwin and perhaps other BSD variants off_t is a 64 bit value, hence no need for specific 64 bit functions
#define FOPEN_FUNC(filename, mode) fopen(filename, mode)
#define FTELLO_FUNC(stream) ftello(stream)
#define FSEEKO_FUNC(stream, offset, origin) fseeko(stream, offset, origin)
#else
#define FOPEN_FUNC(filename, mode) fopen64(filename, mode)
#define FTELLO_FUNC(stream) ftello64(stream)
#define FSEEKO_FUNC(stream, offset, origin) fseeko64(stream, offset, origin)
#endif

#include "tinydir.h"

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <time.h>
#include <errno.h>
#include <fcntl.h>

................................................................................
    printf("MiniZip 1.1, demo of zLib + MiniZip64 package, written by Gilles Vollant\n");
    printf("more info on MiniZip at http://www.winimage.com/zLibDll/minizip.html\n\n");
}

void do_help()
{
    printf("Usage : minizip [-o] [-a] [-0 to -9] [-p password] [-j] file.zip [files_to_add]\n\n" \
           "  -r  Scan directories recursively\n" \
           "  -o  Overwrite existing file.zip\n" \
           "  -a  Append to existing file.zip\n" \
           "  -0  Store only\n" \
           "  -1  Compress faster\n" \
           "  -9  Compress better\n\n" \
           "  -j  exclude path. store only the file name.\n\n");
}
................................................................................
     largeFile = 1;

                fclose(pFile);
  }

 return largeFile;
}

void addFileToZip(zipFile zf, const char *filenameinzip, const char *password, int opt_exclude_path,int opt_compress_level) {
    FILE * fin;
    int size_read;
    const char *savefilenameinzip;
    zip_fileinfo zi;
    unsigned long crcFile=0;
    int zip64 = 0;
    int err=0;
    int size_buf=WRITEBUFFERSIZE;
    unsigned char buf[WRITEBUFFERSIZE];
    zi.tmz_date.tm_sec = zi.tmz_date.tm_min = zi.tmz_date.tm_hour =
    zi.tmz_date.tm_mday = zi.tmz_date.tm_mon = zi.tmz_date.tm_year = 0;
    zi.dosDate = 0;
    zi.internal_fa = 0;
    zi.external_fa = 0;
    filetime(filenameinzip,&zi.tmz_date,&zi.dosDate);

/*
    err = zipOpenNewFileInZip(zf,filenameinzip,&zi,
                     NULL,0,NULL,0,NULL / * comment * /,
                     (opt_compress_level != 0) ? Z_DEFLATED : 0,
                     opt_compress_level);
*/
    if ((password != NULL) && (err==ZIP_OK))
        err = getFileCrc(filenameinzip,buf,size_buf,&crcFile);

    zip64 = isLargeFile(filenameinzip);

   /* The path name saved, should not include a leading slash. */
   /*if it did, windows/xp and dynazip couldn't read the zip file. */
     savefilenameinzip = filenameinzip;
     while( savefilenameinzip[0] == '\\' || savefilenameinzip[0] == '/' )
     {
         savefilenameinzip++;
     }

     /*should the zip file contain any path at all?*/
     if( opt_exclude_path )
     {
         const char *tmpptr;
         const char *lastslash = 0;
         for( tmpptr = savefilenameinzip; *tmpptr; tmpptr++)
         {
             if( *tmpptr == '\\' || *tmpptr == '/')
             {
                 lastslash = tmpptr;
             }
         }
         if( lastslash != NULL )
         {
             savefilenameinzip = lastslash+1; // base filename follows last slash.
         }
     }

     /**/
    err = zipOpenNewFileInZip3_64(zf,savefilenameinzip,&zi,
                     NULL,0,NULL,0,NULL /* comment*/,
                     (opt_compress_level != 0) ? Z_DEFLATED : 0,
                     opt_compress_level,0,
                     /* -MAX_WBITS, DEF_MEM_LEVEL, Z_DEFAULT_STRATEGY, */
                     -MAX_WBITS, DEF_MEM_LEVEL, Z_DEFAULT_STRATEGY,
                     password,crcFile, zip64);

    if (err != ZIP_OK)
        printf("error in opening %s in zipfile\n",filenameinzip);
    else
    {
        fin = FOPEN_FUNC(filenameinzip,"rb");
        if (fin==NULL)
        {
            err=ZIP_ERRNO;
            printf("error in opening %s for reading\n",filenameinzip);
        }
    }

    if (err == ZIP_OK)
        do
        {
            err = ZIP_OK;
            size_read = (int)fread(buf,1,size_buf,fin);
            if (size_read < size_buf)
                if (feof(fin)==0)
            {
                printf("error in reading %s\n",filenameinzip);
                err = ZIP_ERRNO;
            }

            if (size_read>0)
            {
                err = zipWriteInFileInZip (zf,buf,size_read);
                if (err<0)
                {
                    printf("error in writing %s in the zipfile\n",
                                     filenameinzip);
                }

            }
        } while ((err == ZIP_OK) && (size_read>0));

    if (fin)
        fclose(fin);

    if (err<0)
        err=ZIP_ERRNO;
    else
    {
        err = zipCloseFileInZip(zf);
        if (err!=ZIP_OK)
            printf("error in closing %s in the zipfile\n",
                        filenameinzip);
    }
}


void addPathToZip(zipFile zf, const char *filenameinzip, const char *password, int opt_exclude_path,int opt_compress_level) {
    tinydir_dir dir;
    int i;
    char newname[512];

    tinydir_open_sorted(&dir, filenameinzip);

    for (i = 0; i < dir.n_files; i++)
    {
        tinydir_file file;
        tinydir_readfile_n(&dir, &file, i);
        if(strcmp(file.name,".")==0) continue;
        if(strcmp(file.name,"..")==0) continue;
        sprintf(newname,"%s/%s",dir.path,file.name);
        if (file.is_dir)
        {
            addPathToZip(zf,newname,password,opt_exclude_path,opt_compress_level);
        } else {
            addFileToZip(zf,newname,password,opt_exclude_path,opt_compress_level);
        }
    }

    tinydir_close(&dir);
}


int main(argc,argv)
    int argc;
    char *argv[];
{
    int i;
    int opt_recursive=0;
    int opt_overwrite=1;
    int opt_compress_level=Z_DEFAULT_COMPRESSION;
    int opt_exclude_path=0;
    int zipfilenamearg = 0;
    char filename_try[MAXFILENAME+16];
    int zipok;
    int err=0;
    int size_buf=0;
................................................................................
                        opt_overwrite = 1;
                    if ((c=='a') || (c=='A'))
                        opt_overwrite = 2;
                    if ((c>='0') && (c<='9'))
                        opt_compress_level = c-'0';
                    if ((c=='j') || (c=='J'))
                        opt_exclude_path = 1;
                    if ((c=='r') || (c=='R'))
                        opt_recursive = 1;
                    if (((c=='p') || (c=='P')) && (i+1<argc))
                    {
                        password=argv[i+1];
                        i++;
                    }
                }
            }
................................................................................

        for (i=zipfilenamearg+1;(i<argc) && (err==ZIP_OK);i++)
        {
            if (!((((*(argv[i]))=='-') || ((*(argv[i]))=='/')) &&
                  ((argv[i][1]=='o') || (argv[i][1]=='O') ||
                   (argv[i][1]=='a') || (argv[i][1]=='A') ||
                   (argv[i][1]=='p') || (argv[i][1]=='P') ||
                   (argv[i][1]=='r') || (argv[i][1]=='R') ||
                   ((argv[i][1]>='0') || (argv[i][1]<='9'))) &&
                  (strlen(argv[i]) == 2)))
            {

                if(opt_recursive) {

















                    addPathToZip(zf,argv[i],password,opt_exclude_path,opt_compress_level);











































                } else {












































                    addFileToZip(zf,argv[i],password,opt_exclude_path,opt_compress_level);
                }
            }
        }
        errclose = zipClose(zf,NULL);
        if (errclose != ZIP_OK)
            printf("error in closing %s\n",filename_try);
    }

/*
Copyright (c) 2013-2017, tinydir authors:
- Cong Xu
- Lautis Sun
- Baudouin Feildel
- Andargor <[email protected]>
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this
   list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
   this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
   and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*/
#ifndef TINYDIR_H
#define TINYDIR_H

#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" {
#endif

#if ((defined _UNICODE) && !(defined UNICODE))
#define UNICODE
#endif

#if ((defined UNICODE) && !(defined _UNICODE))
#define _UNICODE
#endif

#include <errno.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#ifdef _MSC_VER
# define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
# include <windows.h>
# include <tchar.h>
# pragma warning(push)
# pragma warning (disable : 4996)
#else
# include <dirent.h>
# include <libgen.h>
# include <sys/stat.h>
# include <stddef.h>
#endif
#ifdef __MINGW32__
# include <tchar.h>
#endif


/* types */

/* Windows UNICODE wide character support */
#if defined _MSC_VER || defined __MINGW32__
# define _tinydir_char_t TCHAR
# define TINYDIR_STRING(s) _TEXT(s)
# define _tinydir_strlen _tcslen
# define _tinydir_strcpy _tcscpy
# define _tinydir_strcat _tcscat
# define _tinydir_strcmp _tcscmp
# define _tinydir_strrchr _tcsrchr
# define _tinydir_strncmp _tcsncmp
#else
# define _tinydir_char_t char
# define TINYDIR_STRING(s) s
# define _tinydir_strlen strlen
# define _tinydir_strcpy strcpy
# define _tinydir_strcat strcat
# define _tinydir_strcmp strcmp
# define _tinydir_strrchr strrchr
# define _tinydir_strncmp strncmp
#endif

#if (defined _MSC_VER || defined __MINGW32__)
# include <windows.h>
# define _TINYDIR_PATH_MAX MAX_PATH
#elif defined  __linux__
# include <limits.h>
# define _TINYDIR_PATH_MAX PATH_MAX
#elif defined(__unix__) || (defined(__APPLE__) && defined(__MACH__))
# include <sys/param.h>
# if defined(BSD)
#  include <limits.h>
#  define _TINYDIR_PATH_MAX PATH_MAX
# endif
#endif

#ifndef _TINYDIR_PATH_MAX
#define _TINYDIR_PATH_MAX 4096
#endif

#ifdef _MSC_VER
/* extra chars for the "\\*" mask */
# define _TINYDIR_PATH_EXTRA 2
#else
# define _TINYDIR_PATH_EXTRA 0
#endif

#define _TINYDIR_FILENAME_MAX 256

#if (defined _MSC_VER || defined __MINGW32__)
#define _TINYDIR_DRIVE_MAX 3
#endif

#ifdef _MSC_VER
# define _TINYDIR_FUNC static __inline
#elif !defined __STDC_VERSION__ || __STDC_VERSION__ < 199901L
# define _TINYDIR_FUNC static __inline__
#else
# define _TINYDIR_FUNC static inline
#endif

/* readdir_r usage; define TINYDIR_USE_READDIR_R to use it (if supported) */
#ifdef TINYDIR_USE_READDIR_R

/* readdir_r is a POSIX-only function, and may not be available under various
 * environments/settings, e.g. MinGW. Use readdir fallback */
#if _POSIX_C_SOURCE >= 1 || _XOPEN_SOURCE || _BSD_SOURCE || _SVID_SOURCE ||\
	_POSIX_SOURCE
# define _TINYDIR_HAS_READDIR_R
#endif
#if _POSIX_C_SOURCE >= 200112L
# define _TINYDIR_HAS_FPATHCONF
# include <unistd.h>
#endif
#if _BSD_SOURCE || _SVID_SOURCE || \
	(_POSIX_C_SOURCE >= 200809L || _XOPEN_SOURCE >= 700)
# define _TINYDIR_HAS_DIRFD
# include <sys/types.h>
#endif
#if defined _TINYDIR_HAS_FPATHCONF && defined _TINYDIR_HAS_DIRFD &&\
	defined _PC_NAME_MAX
# define _TINYDIR_USE_FPATHCONF
#endif
#if defined __MINGW32__ || !defined _TINYDIR_HAS_READDIR_R ||\
	!(defined _TINYDIR_USE_FPATHCONF || defined NAME_MAX)
# define _TINYDIR_USE_READDIR
#endif

/* Use readdir by default */
#else
# define _TINYDIR_USE_READDIR
#endif

/* MINGW32 has two versions of dirent, ASCII and UNICODE*/
#ifndef _MSC_VER
#if (defined __MINGW32__) && (defined _UNICODE)
#define _TINYDIR_DIR _WDIR
#define _tinydir_dirent _wdirent
#define _tinydir_opendir _wopendir
#define _tinydir_readdir _wreaddir
#define _tinydir_closedir _wclosedir
#else
#define _TINYDIR_DIR DIR
#define _tinydir_dirent dirent
#define _tinydir_opendir opendir
#define _tinydir_readdir readdir
#define _tinydir_closedir closedir
#endif
#endif

/* Allow user to use a custom allocator by defining _TINYDIR_MALLOC and _TINYDIR_FREE. */
#if    defined(_TINYDIR_MALLOC) &&  defined(_TINYDIR_FREE)
#elif !defined(_TINYDIR_MALLOC) && !defined(_TINYDIR_FREE)
#else
#error "Either define both alloc and free or none of them!"
#endif

#if !defined(_TINYDIR_MALLOC)
	#define _TINYDIR_MALLOC(_size) malloc(_size)
	#define _TINYDIR_FREE(_ptr)    free(_ptr)
#endif /* !defined(_TINYDIR_MALLOC) */

typedef struct tinydir_file
{
	_tinydir_char_t path[_TINYDIR_PATH_MAX];
	_tinydir_char_t name[_TINYDIR_FILENAME_MAX];
	_tinydir_char_t *extension;
	int is_dir;
	int is_reg;

#ifndef _MSC_VER
#ifdef __MINGW32__
	struct _stat _s;
#else
	struct stat _s;
#endif
#endif
} tinydir_file;

typedef struct tinydir_dir
{
	_tinydir_char_t path[_TINYDIR_PATH_MAX];
	int has_next;
	size_t n_files;

	tinydir_file *_files;
#ifdef _MSC_VER
	HANDLE _h;
	WIN32_FIND_DATA _f;
#else
	_TINYDIR_DIR *_d;
	struct _tinydir_dirent *_e;
#ifndef _TINYDIR_USE_READDIR
	struct _tinydir_dirent *_ep;
#endif
#endif
} tinydir_dir;


/* declarations */

_TINYDIR_FUNC
int tinydir_open(tinydir_dir *dir, const _tinydir_char_t *path);
_TINYDIR_FUNC
int tinydir_open_sorted(tinydir_dir *dir, const _tinydir_char_t *path);
_TINYDIR_FUNC
void tinydir_close(tinydir_dir *dir);

_TINYDIR_FUNC
int tinydir_next(tinydir_dir *dir);
_TINYDIR_FUNC
int tinydir_readfile(const tinydir_dir *dir, tinydir_file *file);
_TINYDIR_FUNC
int tinydir_readfile_n(const tinydir_dir *dir, tinydir_file *file, size_t i);
_TINYDIR_FUNC
int tinydir_open_subdir_n(tinydir_dir *dir, size_t i);

_TINYDIR_FUNC
int tinydir_file_open(tinydir_file *file, const _tinydir_char_t *path);
_TINYDIR_FUNC
void _tinydir_get_ext(tinydir_file *file);
_TINYDIR_FUNC
int _tinydir_file_cmp(const void *a, const void *b);
#ifndef _MSC_VER
#ifndef _TINYDIR_USE_READDIR
_TINYDIR_FUNC
size_t _tinydir_dirent_buf_size(_TINYDIR_DIR *dirp);
#endif
#endif


/* definitions*/

_TINYDIR_FUNC
int tinydir_open(tinydir_dir *dir, const _tinydir_char_t *path)
{
#ifndef _MSC_VER
#ifndef _TINYDIR_USE_READDIR
	int error;
	int size;	/* using int size */
#endif
#else
	_tinydir_char_t path_buf[_TINYDIR_PATH_MAX];
#endif
	_tinydir_char_t *pathp;

	if (dir == NULL || path == NULL || _tinydir_strlen(path) == 0)
	{
		errno = EINVAL;
		return -1;
	}
	if (_tinydir_strlen(path) + _TINYDIR_PATH_EXTRA >= _TINYDIR_PATH_MAX)
	{
		errno = ENAMETOOLONG;
		return -1;
	}

	/* initialise dir */
	dir->_files = NULL;
#ifdef _MSC_VER
	dir->_h = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE;
#else
	dir->_d = NULL;
#ifndef _TINYDIR_USE_READDIR
	dir->_ep = NULL;
#endif
#endif
	tinydir_close(dir);

	_tinydir_strcpy(dir->path, path);
	/* Remove trailing slashes */
	pathp = &dir->path[_tinydir_strlen(dir->path) - 1];
	while (pathp != dir->path && (*pathp == TINYDIR_STRING('\\') || *pathp == TINYDIR_STRING('/')))
	{
		*pathp = TINYDIR_STRING('\0');
		pathp++;
	}
#ifdef _MSC_VER
	_tinydir_strcpy(path_buf, dir->path);
	_tinydir_strcat(path_buf, TINYDIR_STRING("\\*"));
#if (defined WINAPI_FAMILY) && (WINAPI_FAMILY != WINAPI_FAMILY_DESKTOP_APP)
	dir->_h = FindFirstFileEx(path_buf, FindExInfoStandard, &dir->_f, FindExSearchNameMatch, NULL, 0);
#else
	dir->_h = FindFirstFile(path_buf, &dir->_f);
#endif
	if (dir->_h == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE)
	{
		errno = ENOENT;
#else
	dir->_d = _tinydir_opendir(path);
	if (dir->_d == NULL)
	{
#endif
		goto bail;
	}

	/* read first file */
	dir->has_next = 1;
#ifndef _MSC_VER
#ifdef _TINYDIR_USE_READDIR
	dir->_e = _tinydir_readdir(dir->_d);
#else
	/* allocate dirent buffer for readdir_r */
	size = _tinydir_dirent_buf_size(dir->_d); /* conversion to int */
	if (size == -1) return -1;
	dir->_ep = (struct _tinydir_dirent*)_TINYDIR_MALLOC(size);
	if (dir->_ep == NULL) return -1;

	error = readdir_r(dir->_d, dir->_ep, &dir->_e);
	if (error != 0) return -1;
#endif
	if (dir->_e == NULL)
	{
		dir->has_next = 0;
	}
#endif

	return 0;

bail:
	tinydir_close(dir);
	return -1;
}

_TINYDIR_FUNC
int tinydir_open_sorted(tinydir_dir *dir, const _tinydir_char_t *path)
{
	/* Count the number of files first, to pre-allocate the files array */
	size_t n_files = 0;
	if (tinydir_open(dir, path) == -1)
	{
		return -1;
	}
	while (dir->has_next)
	{
		n_files++;
		if (tinydir_next(dir) == -1)
		{
			goto bail;
		}
	}
	tinydir_close(dir);

	if (tinydir_open(dir, path) == -1)
	{
		return -1;
	}

	dir->n_files = 0;
	dir->_files = (tinydir_file *)_TINYDIR_MALLOC(sizeof *dir->_files * n_files);
	if (dir->_files == NULL)
	{
		goto bail;
	}
	while (dir->has_next)
	{
		tinydir_file *p_file;
		dir->n_files++;

		p_file = &dir->_files[dir->n_files - 1];
		if (tinydir_readfile(dir, p_file) == -1)
		{
			goto bail;
		}

		if (tinydir_next(dir) == -1)
		{
			goto bail;
		}

		/* Just in case the number of files has changed between the first and
		second reads, terminate without writing into unallocated memory */
		if (dir->n_files == n_files)
		{
			break;
		}
	}

	qsort(dir->_files, dir->n_files, sizeof(tinydir_file), _tinydir_file_cmp);

	return 0;

bail:
	tinydir_close(dir);
	return -1;
}

_TINYDIR_FUNC
void tinydir_close(tinydir_dir *dir)
{
	if (dir == NULL)
	{
		return;
	}

	memset(dir->path, 0, sizeof(dir->path));
	dir->has_next = 0;
	dir->n_files = 0;
	_TINYDIR_FREE(dir->_files);
	dir->_files = NULL;
#ifdef _MSC_VER
	if (dir->_h != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE)
	{
		FindClose(dir->_h);
	}
	dir->_h = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE;
#else
	if (dir->_d)
	{
		_tinydir_closedir(dir->_d);
	}
	dir->_d = NULL;
	dir->_e = NULL;
#ifndef _TINYDIR_USE_READDIR
	_TINYDIR_FREE(dir->_ep);
	dir->_ep = NULL;
#endif
#endif
}

_TINYDIR_FUNC
int tinydir_next(tinydir_dir *dir)
{
	if (dir == NULL)
	{
		errno = EINVAL;
		return -1;
	}
	if (!dir->has_next)
	{
		errno = ENOENT;
		return -1;
	}

#ifdef _MSC_VER
	if (FindNextFile(dir->_h, &dir->_f) == 0)
#else
#ifdef _TINYDIR_USE_READDIR
	dir->_e = _tinydir_readdir(dir->_d);
#else
	if (dir->_ep == NULL)
	{
		return -1;
	}
	if (readdir_r(dir->_d, dir->_ep, &dir->_e) != 0)
	{
		return -1;
	}
#endif
	if (dir->_e == NULL)
#endif
	{
		dir->has_next = 0;
#ifdef _MSC_VER
		if (GetLastError() != ERROR_SUCCESS &&
			GetLastError() != ERROR_NO_MORE_FILES)
		{
			tinydir_close(dir);
			errno = EIO;
			return -1;
		}
#endif
	}

	return 0;
}

_TINYDIR_FUNC
int tinydir_readfile(const tinydir_dir *dir, tinydir_file *file)
{
	if (dir == NULL || file == NULL)
	{
		errno = EINVAL;
		return -1;
	}
#ifdef _MSC_VER
	if (dir->_h == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE)
#else
	if (dir->_e == NULL)
#endif
	{
		errno = ENOENT;
		return -1;
	}
	if (_tinydir_strlen(dir->path) +
		_tinydir_strlen(
#ifdef _MSC_VER
			dir->_f.cFileName
#else
			dir->_e->d_name
#endif
		) + 1 + _TINYDIR_PATH_EXTRA >=
		_TINYDIR_PATH_MAX)
	{
		/* the path for the file will be too long */
		errno = ENAMETOOLONG;
		return -1;
	}
	if (_tinydir_strlen(
#ifdef _MSC_VER
			dir->_f.cFileName
#else
			dir->_e->d_name
#endif
		) >= _TINYDIR_FILENAME_MAX)
	{
		errno = ENAMETOOLONG;
		return -1;
	}

	_tinydir_strcpy(file->path, dir->path);
	_tinydir_strcat(file->path, TINYDIR_STRING("/"));
	_tinydir_strcpy(file->name,
#ifdef _MSC_VER
		dir->_f.cFileName
#else
		dir->_e->d_name
#endif
	);
	_tinydir_strcat(file->path, file->name);
#ifndef _MSC_VER
#ifdef __MINGW32__
	if (_tstat(
#else
	if (stat(
#endif
		file->path, &file->_s) == -1)
	{
		return -1;
	}
#endif
	_tinydir_get_ext(file);

	file->is_dir =
#ifdef _MSC_VER
		!!(dir->_f.dwFileAttributes & FILE_ATTRIBUTE_DIRECTORY);
#else
		S_ISDIR(file->_s.st_mode);
#endif
	file->is_reg =
#ifdef _MSC_VER
		!!(dir->_f.dwFileAttributes & FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL) ||
		(
			!(dir->_f.dwFileAttributes & FILE_ATTRIBUTE_DEVICE) &&
			!(dir->_f.dwFileAttributes & FILE_ATTRIBUTE_DIRECTORY) &&
			!(dir->_f.dwFileAttributes & FILE_ATTRIBUTE_ENCRYPTED) &&
#ifdef FILE_ATTRIBUTE_INTEGRITY_STREAM
			!(dir->_f.dwFileAttributes & FILE_ATTRIBUTE_INTEGRITY_STREAM) &&
#endif
#ifdef FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NO_SCRUB_DATA
			!(dir->_f.dwFileAttributes & FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NO_SCRUB_DATA) &&
#endif
			!(dir->_f.dwFileAttributes & FILE_ATTRIBUTE_OFFLINE) &&
			!(dir->_f.dwFileAttributes & FILE_ATTRIBUTE_TEMPORARY));
#else
		S_ISREG(file->_s.st_mode);
#endif

	return 0;
}

_TINYDIR_FUNC
int tinydir_readfile_n(const tinydir_dir *dir, tinydir_file *file, size_t i)
{
	if (dir == NULL || file == NULL)
	{
		errno = EINVAL;
		return -1;
	}
	if (i >= dir->n_files)
	{
		errno = ENOENT;
		return -1;
	}

	memcpy(file, &dir->_files[i], sizeof(tinydir_file));
	_tinydir_get_ext(file);

	return 0;
}

_TINYDIR_FUNC
int tinydir_open_subdir_n(tinydir_dir *dir, size_t i)
{
	_tinydir_char_t path[_TINYDIR_PATH_MAX];
	if (dir == NULL)
	{
		errno = EINVAL;
		return -1;
	}
	if (i >= dir->n_files || !dir->_files[i].is_dir)
	{
		errno = ENOENT;
		return -1;
	}

	_tinydir_strcpy(path, dir->_files[i].path);
	tinydir_close(dir);
	if (tinydir_open_sorted(dir, path) == -1)
	{
		return -1;
	}

	return 0;
}

/* Open a single file given its path */
_TINYDIR_FUNC
int tinydir_file_open(tinydir_file *file, const _tinydir_char_t *path)
{
	tinydir_dir dir;
	int result = 0;
	int found = 0;
	_tinydir_char_t dir_name_buf[_TINYDIR_PATH_MAX];
	_tinydir_char_t file_name_buf[_TINYDIR_FILENAME_MAX];
	_tinydir_char_t *dir_name;
	_tinydir_char_t *base_name;
#if (defined _MSC_VER || defined __MINGW32__)
	_tinydir_char_t drive_buf[_TINYDIR_PATH_MAX];
	_tinydir_char_t ext_buf[_TINYDIR_FILENAME_MAX];
#endif

	if (file == NULL || path == NULL || _tinydir_strlen(path) == 0)
	{
		errno = EINVAL;
		return -1;
	}
	if (_tinydir_strlen(path) + _TINYDIR_PATH_EXTRA >= _TINYDIR_PATH_MAX)
	{
		errno = ENAMETOOLONG;
		return -1;
	}

	/* Get the parent path */
#if (defined _MSC_VER || defined __MINGW32__)
#if ((defined _MSC_VER) && (_MSC_VER >= 1400))
		_tsplitpath_s(
			path,
			drive_buf, _TINYDIR_DRIVE_MAX,
			dir_name_buf, _TINYDIR_FILENAME_MAX,
			file_name_buf, _TINYDIR_FILENAME_MAX,
			ext_buf, _TINYDIR_FILENAME_MAX);
#else
		_tsplitpath(
			path,
			drive_buf,
			dir_name_buf,
			file_name_buf,
			ext_buf);
#endif

/* _splitpath_s not work fine with only filename and widechar support */
#ifdef _UNICODE
		if (drive_buf[0] == L'\xFEFE')
			drive_buf[0] = '\0';
		if (dir_name_buf[0] == L'\xFEFE')
			dir_name_buf[0] = '\0';
#endif

	if (errno)
	{
		errno = EINVAL;
		return -1;
	}
	/* Emulate the behavior of dirname by returning "." for dir name if it's
	empty */
	if (drive_buf[0] == '\0' && dir_name_buf[0] == '\0')
	{
		_tinydir_strcpy(dir_name_buf, TINYDIR_STRING("."));
	}
	/* Concatenate the drive letter and dir name to form full dir name */
	_tinydir_strcat(drive_buf, dir_name_buf);
	dir_name = drive_buf;
	/* Concatenate the file name and extension to form base name */
	_tinydir_strcat(file_name_buf, ext_buf);
	base_name = file_name_buf;
#else
	_tinydir_strcpy(dir_name_buf, path);
	dir_name = dirname(dir_name_buf);
	_tinydir_strcpy(file_name_buf, path);
	base_name =basename(file_name_buf);
#endif

	/* Open the parent directory */
	if (tinydir_open(&dir, dir_name) == -1)
	{
		return -1;
	}

	/* Read through the parent directory and look for the file */
	while (dir.has_next)
	{
		if (tinydir_readfile(&dir, file) == -1)
		{
			result = -1;
			goto bail;
		}
		if (_tinydir_strcmp(file->name, base_name) == 0)
		{
			/* File found */
			found = 1;
			break;
		}
		tinydir_next(&dir);
	}
	if (!found)
	{
		result = -1;
		errno = ENOENT;
	}

bail:
	tinydir_close(&dir);
	return result;
}

_TINYDIR_FUNC
void _tinydir_get_ext(tinydir_file *file)
{
	_tinydir_char_t *period = _tinydir_strrchr(file->name, TINYDIR_STRING('.'));
	if (period == NULL)
	{
		file->extension = &(file->name[_tinydir_strlen(file->name)]);
	}
	else
	{
		file->extension = period + 1;
	}
}

_TINYDIR_FUNC
int _tinydir_file_cmp(const void *a, const void *b)
{
	const tinydir_file *fa = (const tinydir_file *)a;
	const tinydir_file *fb = (const tinydir_file *)b;
	if (fa->is_dir != fb->is_dir)
	{
		return -(fa->is_dir - fb->is_dir);
	}
	return _tinydir_strncmp(fa->name, fb->name, _TINYDIR_FILENAME_MAX);
}

#ifndef _MSC_VER
#ifndef _TINYDIR_USE_READDIR
/*
The following authored by Ben Hutchings <[email protected]>
from https://womble.decadent.org.uk/readdir_r-advisory.html
*/
/* Calculate the required buffer size (in bytes) for directory      *
* entries read from the given directory handle.  Return -1 if this  *
* this cannot be done.                                              *
*                                                                   *
* This code does not trust values of NAME_MAX that are less than    *
* 255, since some systems (including at least HP-UX) incorrectly    *
* define it to be a smaller value.                                  */
_TINYDIR_FUNC
size_t _tinydir_dirent_buf_size(_TINYDIR_DIR *dirp)
{
	long name_max;
	size_t name_end;
	/* parameter may be unused */
	(void)dirp;

#if defined _TINYDIR_USE_FPATHCONF
	name_max = fpathconf(dirfd(dirp), _PC_NAME_MAX);
	if (name_max == -1)
#if defined(NAME_MAX)
		name_max = (NAME_MAX > 255) ? NAME_MAX : 255;
#else
		return (size_t)(-1);
#endif
#elif defined(NAME_MAX)
 	name_max = (NAME_MAX > 255) ? NAME_MAX : 255;
#else
#error "buffer size for readdir_r cannot be determined"
#endif
	name_end = (size_t)offsetof(struct _tinydir_dirent, d_name) + name_max + 1;
	return (name_end > sizeof(struct _tinydir_dirent) ?
		name_end : sizeof(struct _tinydir_dirent));
}
#endif
#endif

#ifdef __cplusplus
}
#endif

# if defined (_MSC_VER)
# pragma warning(pop)
# endif

#endif

'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH Tcl_CreateObjCommand 3 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tcl_CreateObjCommand, Tcl_DeleteCommand, Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken, Tcl_GetCommandInfo, Tcl_GetCommandInfoFromToken, Tcl_SetCommandInfo, Tcl_SetCommandInfoFromToken, Tcl_GetCommandName, Tcl_GetCommandFullName, Tcl_GetCommandFromObj \- implement new commands in C
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
.sp
Tcl_Command
\fBTcl_CreateObjCommand\fR(\fIinterp, cmdName, proc, clientData, deleteProc\fR)
.sp
................................................................................
\fBTcl_GetCommandName\fR(\fIinterp, token\fR)
.sp
void
\fBTcl_GetCommandFullName\fR(\fIinterp, token, objPtr\fR)
.sp
Tcl_Command
\fBTcl_GetCommandFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr\fR)








.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *deleteProc in/out
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter in which to create a new command or that contains a command.
.AP char *cmdName in
Name of command.
.AP Tcl_ObjCmdProc *proc in
................................................................................
Token for command, returned by previous call to \fBTcl_CreateObjCommand\fR.
The command must not have been deleted.
.AP Tcl_CmdInfo *infoPtr in/out
Pointer to structure containing various information about a
Tcl command.
.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in
Value containing the name of a Tcl command.



.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBTcl_CreateObjCommand\fR defines a new command in \fIinterp\fR
and associates it with procedure \fIproc\fR
such that whenever \fIname\fR is
invoked as a Tcl command (e.g., via a call to \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR)
................................................................................
The name, including all namespace prefixes,
is appended to the value specified by \fIobjPtr\fR.
.PP
\fBTcl_GetCommandFromObj\fR returns a token for the command
specified by the name in a \fBTcl_Obj\fR.
The command name is resolved relative to the current namespace.
Returns NULL if the command is not found.
















.SH "SEE ALSO"
Tcl_CreateCommand(3), Tcl_ResetResult(3), Tcl_SetObjResult(3)
.SH KEYWORDS
bind, command, create, delete, namespace, value

'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH Tcl_CreateObjCommand 3 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tcl_CreateObjCommand, Tcl_DeleteCommand, Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken, Tcl_GetCommandInfo, Tcl_GetCommandInfoFromToken, Tcl_SetCommandInfo, Tcl_SetCommandInfoFromToken, Tcl_GetCommandName, Tcl_GetCommandFullName, Tcl_GetCommandFromObj, Tcl_RegisterCommandTypeName, Tcl_GetCommandTypeName \- implement new commands in C
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
.sp
Tcl_Command
\fBTcl_CreateObjCommand\fR(\fIinterp, cmdName, proc, clientData, deleteProc\fR)
.sp
................................................................................
\fBTcl_GetCommandName\fR(\fIinterp, token\fR)
.sp
void
\fBTcl_GetCommandFullName\fR(\fIinterp, token, objPtr\fR)
.sp
Tcl_Command
\fBTcl_GetCommandFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr\fR)
.sp
.VS "info cmdtype feature"
void
\fBTcl_RegisterCommandTypeName\fR(\fIproc, typeName\fR)
.sp
const char *
\fBTcl_GetCommandTypeName\fR(\fItoken\fR)
.VE "info cmdtype feature"
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *deleteProc in/out
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter in which to create a new command or that contains a command.
.AP char *cmdName in
Name of command.
.AP Tcl_ObjCmdProc *proc in
................................................................................
Token for command, returned by previous call to \fBTcl_CreateObjCommand\fR.
The command must not have been deleted.
.AP Tcl_CmdInfo *infoPtr in/out
Pointer to structure containing various information about a
Tcl command.
.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in
Value containing the name of a Tcl command.
.AP "const char" *typeName in
Indicates the name of the type of command implementation associated
with a particular \fIproc\fR, or NULL to break the association.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBTcl_CreateObjCommand\fR defines a new command in \fIinterp\fR
and associates it with procedure \fIproc\fR
such that whenever \fIname\fR is
invoked as a Tcl command (e.g., via a call to \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR)
................................................................................
The name, including all namespace prefixes,
is appended to the value specified by \fIobjPtr\fR.
.PP
\fBTcl_GetCommandFromObj\fR returns a token for the command
specified by the name in a \fBTcl_Obj\fR.
The command name is resolved relative to the current namespace.
Returns NULL if the command is not found.
.PP
.VS "info cmdtype feature"
\fBTcl_RegisterCommandTypeName\fR is used to associate a name (the
\fItypeName\fR argument) with a particular implementation function so that it
can then be looked up with \fBTcl_GetCommandTypeName\fR, which in turn is
called with a command token that information is wanted for and which returns
the name of the type that was registered for the implementation function used
for that command. (The lookup functionality is surfaced virtually directly in Tcl via
\fBinfo cmdtype\fR.) If there is no function registered for a particular
function, the result will be the string literal
.QW \fBnative\fR .
The registration of a name can be undone by registering a mapping to NULL
instead. The result from \fBTcl_GetCommandTypeName\fR will be exactly that
string which was registered, and not a copy; use of a compile-time constant
string is \fIstrongly recommended\fR.
.VE "info cmdtype feature"
.SH "SEE ALSO"
Tcl_CreateCommand(3), Tcl_ResetResult(3), Tcl_SetObjResult(3)
.SH KEYWORDS
bind, command, create, delete, namespace, value

.\"
.\" Copyright (c) 2008 by Kevin B. Kenny.
.\" Copyright (c) 2018 by Nathan Coulter. 
.\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH NRE 3 8.6 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS

.\"
.\" Copyright (c) 2008 by Kevin B. Kenny.
.\" Copyright (c) 2018 by Nathan Coulter.
.\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH NRE 3 8.6 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS

'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\" Contributions from Don Porter, NIST, 2004. (not subject to US copyright)

'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH Tcl_SaveResult 3 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tcl_SaveInterpState, Tcl_RestoreInterpState, Tcl_DiscardInterpState, Tcl_SaveResult, Tcl_RestoreResult, Tcl_DiscardResult \- save and restore an interpreter's state


.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
.sp
Tcl_InterpState
\fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR(\fIinterp, status\fR)
.sp
................................................................................
.sp
\fBTcl_RestoreResult\fR(\fIinterp, savedPtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTcl_DiscardResult\fR(\fIsavedPtr\fR)
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_InterpState savedPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter for which state should be saved.
.AP int status in
Return code value to save as part of interpreter state.
.AP Tcl_InterpState state in
Saved state token to be restored or discarded.
.AP Tcl_SavedResult *savedPtr in
Pointer to location where interpreter result should be saved or restored.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
These routines allows a C procedure to take a snapshot of the current
state of an interpreter so that it can be restored after a call
to \fBTcl_Eval\fR or some other routine that modifies the interpreter
state.  There are two triplets of routines meant to work together.
.PP
The first triplet stores the snapshot of interpreter state in
an opaque token returned by \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR.  That token
value may then be passed back to one of \fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR
or \fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR, depending on whether the interp
state is to be restored.  So long as one of the latter two routines
is called, Tcl will take care of memory management.
.PP
The second triplet stores the snapshot of only the interpreter
result (not its complete state) in memory allocated by the caller.
These routines are passed a pointer to \fBTcl_SavedResult\fR
that is used to store enough information to restore the interpreter result.
\fBTcl_SavedResult\fR can be allocated on the stack of the calling
procedure.  These routines do not save the state of any error
information in the interpreter (e.g. the \fB\-errorcode\fR or
\fB\-errorinfo\fR return options, when an error is in progress).
.PP
Because the routines \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR,
\fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR, and \fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR perform
a superset of the functions provided by the other routines,
any new code should only make use of the more powerful routines.
The older, weaker routines \fBTcl_SaveResult\fR, \fBTcl_RestoreResult\fR,
and \fBTcl_DiscardResult\fR continue to exist only for the sake
of existing programs that may already be using them.
.PP
\fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR takes a snapshot of those portions of
interpreter state that make up the full result of script evaluation.
This include the interpreter result, the return code (passed in
as the \fIstatus\fR argument, and any return options, including

\fB\-errorinfo\fR and \fB\-errorcode\fR when an error is in progress.
This snapshot is returned as an opaque token of type \fBTcl_InterpState\fR.
The call to \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR does not itself change the
state of the interpreter.  Unlike \fBTcl_SaveResult\fR, it does
not reset the interpreter.


.PP
\fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR accepts a \fBTcl_InterpState\fR token
previously returned by \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR and restores the
state of the interp to the state held in that snapshot.  The return
value of \fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR is the status value originally

passed to \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR when the snapshot token was
created.
.PP
\fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR is called to release a \fBTcl_InterpState\fR
token previously returned by \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR when that
snapshot is not to be restored to an interp.


.PP

The \fBTcl_InterpState\fR token returned by \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR
must eventually be passed to either \fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR
or \fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR to avoid a memory leak.  Once
the \fBTcl_InterpState\fR token is passed to one of them, the
token is no longer valid and should not be used anymore.

.PP
\fBTcl_SaveResult\fR moves the string and value results
of \fIinterp\fR into the location specified by \fIstatePtr\fR.
\fBTcl_SaveResult\fR clears the result for \fIinterp\fR and
leaves the result in its normal empty initialized state.



.PP
\fBTcl_RestoreResult\fR moves the string and value results from
\fIstatePtr\fR back into \fIinterp\fR.  Any result or error that was
already in the interpreter will be cleared.  The \fIstatePtr\fR is left
in an uninitialized state and cannot be used until another call to



\fBTcl_SaveResult\fR.
.PP
\fBTcl_DiscardResult\fR releases the saved interpreter state
stored at \fBstatePtr\fR.  The state structure is left in an
uninitialized state and cannot be used until another call to

\fBTcl_SaveResult\fR.
.PP
Once \fBTcl_SaveResult\fR is called to save the interpreter
result, either \fBTcl_RestoreResult\fR or
\fBTcl_DiscardResult\fR must be called to properly clean up the
memory associated with the saved state.

.SH KEYWORDS
result, state, interp

'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\" Contributions from Don Porter, NIST, 2004. (not subject to US copyright)
'\" Copyright (c) 2018 Nathan Coulter.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH Tcl_SaveResult 3 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
Tcl_SaveInterpState, Tcl_RestoreInterpState, Tcl_DiscardInterpState,
Tcl_SaveResult, Tcl_RestoreResult, Tcl_DiscardResult \- Save and restore the
state of an an interpreter.
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
.sp
Tcl_InterpState
\fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR(\fIinterp, status\fR)
.sp
................................................................................
.sp
\fBTcl_RestoreResult\fR(\fIinterp, savedPtr\fR)
.sp
\fBTcl_DiscardResult\fR(\fIsavedPtr\fR)
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_InterpState savedPtr
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
The interpreter for the operation.
.AP int status in
The return code for the state.
.AP Tcl_InterpState state in
A token for saved state.
.AP Tcl_SavedResult *savedPtr in
A pointer to storage for saved state.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
These routines save the state of an interpreter before a call to a routine such
as \fBTcl_Eval\fR, and restore the state afterwards.


.PP
















\fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR saves the parts of \fIinterp\fR that comprise the











result of a script, including the resulting value, the return code passed as
\fIstatus\fR, and any options such as \fB\-errorinfo\fR and \fB\-errorcode\fR.




It returns a token for the saved state.  The interpreter result is not reset
and no interpreter state is changed.
.PP
\fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR restores the state indicated by \fIstate\fR and



returns the \fIstatus\fR originally passed in the corresponding call to
\fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR.

.PP
If a saved state is not restored, \fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR must be called


to release it.  A token used to discard or restore state must not be used
again.
.PP
\fBTcl_SaveResult\fR, \fBTcl_RestoreResult\fR, and \fBTcl_DiscardResult\fR are
deprecated.  Instead use \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR,
\fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR, and \fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR, which are more



capable.
.PP
\fBTcl_SaveResult\fR moves the result of \fIinterp\fR to the location



\fIstatePtr\fR points to and returns the interpreter result to its initial
state.  It does not save options such as \fB\-errorcode\fR or
\fB\-errorinfo\fR.
.PP




\fBTcl_RestoreResult\fR clears any existing result or error in \fIinterp\fR and
moves the result from \fIstatePtr\fR back to \fIinterp\fR.  \fIstatePtr\fR is
then in an undefined state and must not be used until passed again to
\fBTcl_SaveResult\fR.
.PP
\fBTcl_DiscardResult\fR releases the state stored at \fBstatePtr\fR, which is


then in an undefined state and must not be used until passed again to
\fBTcl_SaveResult\fR.
.PP


If a saved result is not restored, \fBTcl_DiscardResult\fR must be called to

release it.
.SH KEYWORDS
result, state, interp

int
\fBTcl_JoinThread\fR(\fIid, result\fR)
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_CreateThreadProc proc out
.AP Tcl_Condition *condPtr in
A condition variable, which must be associated with a mutex lock.
.AP Tcl_Mutex *mutexPtr in

A mutex lock.

.AP "const Tcl_Time" *timePtr in
A time limit on the condition wait.  NULL to wait forever.
Note that a polling value of 0 seconds does not make much sense.
.AP Tcl_ThreadDataKey *keyPtr in
This identifies a block of thread local storage.  The key should be
static and process-wide, yet each thread will end up associating
a different block of storage with this key.
................................................................................
the \fBNotifier\fR manual page for more information on these procedures.
.PP
A mutex is a lock that is used to serialize all threads through a piece
of code by calling \fBTcl_MutexLock\fR and \fBTcl_MutexUnlock\fR.
If one thread holds a mutex, any other thread calling \fBTcl_MutexLock\fR will
block until \fBTcl_MutexUnlock\fR is called.
A mutex can be destroyed after its use by calling \fBTcl_MutexFinalize\fR.
The result of locking a mutex twice from the same thread is undefined.
On some platforms it will result in a deadlock.




The \fBTcl_MutexLock\fR, \fBTcl_MutexUnlock\fR and \fBTcl_MutexFinalize\fR
procedures are defined as empty macros if not compiling with threads enabled.
For declaration of mutexes the \fBTCL_DECLARE_MUTEX\fR macro should be used.
This macro assures correct mutex handling even when the core is compiled
without threads enabled.
.PP
A condition variable is used as a signaling mechanism:

int
\fBTcl_JoinThread\fR(\fIid, result\fR)
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_CreateThreadProc proc out
.AP Tcl_Condition *condPtr in
A condition variable, which must be associated with a mutex lock.
.AP Tcl_Mutex *mutexPtr in
.VS TIP509
A recursive mutex lock.
.VE TIP509
.AP "const Tcl_Time" *timePtr in
A time limit on the condition wait.  NULL to wait forever.
Note that a polling value of 0 seconds does not make much sense.
.AP Tcl_ThreadDataKey *keyPtr in
This identifies a block of thread local storage.  The key should be
static and process-wide, yet each thread will end up associating
a different block of storage with this key.
................................................................................
the \fBNotifier\fR manual page for more information on these procedures.
.PP
A mutex is a lock that is used to serialize all threads through a piece
of code by calling \fBTcl_MutexLock\fR and \fBTcl_MutexUnlock\fR.
If one thread holds a mutex, any other thread calling \fBTcl_MutexLock\fR will
block until \fBTcl_MutexUnlock\fR is called.
A mutex can be destroyed after its use by calling \fBTcl_MutexFinalize\fR.
.VS TIP509
Mutexes are reentrant: they can be locked several times from the same
thread. However there must be exactly one call to
\fBTcl_MutexUnlock\fR for each call to \fBTcl_MutexLock\fR in order
for a thread to release a mutex completely.
.VE TIP509
The \fBTcl_MutexLock\fR, \fBTcl_MutexUnlock\fR and \fBTcl_MutexFinalize\fR
procedures are defined as empty macros if not compiling with threads enabled.
For declaration of mutexes the \fBTCL_DECLARE_MUTEX\fR macro should be used.
This macro assures correct mutex handling even when the core is compiled
without threads enabled.
.PP
A condition variable is used as a signaling mechanism:

.AP int nocase in
Specifies whether the match should be done case-sensitive (0) or
case-insensitive (1).
.BE

.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
These routines convert between UTF-8 strings and Tcl_UniChars.  A
Tcl_UniChar is a Unicode character represented as an unsigned, fixed-size
quantity.  A UTF-8 character is a Unicode character represented as
a varying-length sequence of up to \fBTCL_UTF_MAX\fR bytes.  A multibyte UTF-8
sequence consists of a lead byte followed by some number of trail bytes.
.PP
\fBTCL_UTF_MAX\fR is the maximum number of bytes that it takes to
represent one Unicode character in the UTF-8 representation.
.PP
\fBTcl_UniCharToUtf\fR stores the Tcl_UniChar \fIch\fR as a UTF-8 string
in starting at \fIbuf\fR.  The return value is the number of bytes stored
in \fIbuf\fR.



.PP
\fBTcl_UtfToUniChar\fR reads one UTF-8 character starting at \fIsrc\fR
and stores it as a Tcl_UniChar in \fI*chPtr\fR.  The return value is the
number of bytes read from \fIsrc\fR.  The caller must ensure that the
source buffer is long enough such that this routine does not run off the
end and dereference non-existent or random memory; if the source buffer
is known to be null-terminated, this will not happen.  If the input is
................................................................................
characters.
.PP
\fBTcl_UtfCharComplete\fR returns 1 if the source UTF-8 string \fIsrc\fR
of \fIlength\fR bytes is long enough to be decoded by
\fBTcl_UtfToUniChar\fR, or 0 otherwise.  This function does not guarantee
that the UTF-8 string is properly formed.  This routine is used by
procedures that are operating on a byte at a time and need to know if a
full Tcl_UniChar has been seen.
.PP
\fBTcl_NumUtfChars\fR corresponds to \fBstrlen\fR for UTF-8 strings.  It
returns the number of Tcl_UniChars that are represented by the UTF-8 string
\fIsrc\fR.  The length of the source string is \fIlength\fR bytes.  If the
length is negative, all bytes up to the first null byte are used.
.PP
\fBTcl_UtfFindFirst\fR corresponds to \fBstrchr\fR for UTF-8 strings.  It
returns a pointer to the first occurrence of the Tcl_UniChar \fIch\fR
in the null-terminated UTF-8 string \fIsrc\fR.  The null terminator is
considered part of the UTF-8 string.
.PP
\fBTcl_UtfFindLast\fR corresponds to \fBstrrchr\fR for UTF-8 strings.  It
returns a pointer to the last occurrence of the Tcl_UniChar \fIch\fR
in the null-terminated UTF-8 string \fIsrc\fR.  The null terminator is
considered part of the UTF-8 string.
.PP
Given \fIsrc\fR, a pointer to some location in a UTF-8 string,
\fBTcl_UtfNext\fR returns a pointer to the next UTF-8 character in the
string.  The caller must not ask for the next character after the last
character in the string if the string is not terminated by a null

.AP int nocase in
Specifies whether the match should be done case-sensitive (0) or
case-insensitive (1).
.BE

.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
These routines convert between UTF-8 strings and Unicode characters.  An
Unicode character represented as an unsigned, fixed-size
quantity.  A UTF-8 character is a Unicode character represented as
a varying-length sequence of up to \fBTCL_UTF_MAX\fR bytes.  A multibyte UTF-8
sequence consists of a lead byte followed by some number of trail bytes.
.PP
\fBTCL_UTF_MAX\fR is the maximum number of bytes that it takes to
represent one Unicode character in the UTF-8 representation.
.PP
\fBTcl_UniCharToUtf\fR stores the character \fIch\fR as a UTF-8 string
in starting at \fIbuf\fR.  The return value is the number of bytes stored
in \fIbuf\fR. If ch is an upper surrogate (range U+D800 - U+DBFF), then
the return value will be 0 and nothing will be stored. If you still
want to produce UTF-8 output for it (even though knowing it's an illegal
code-point on its own), just call \fBTcl_UniCharToUtf\fR again using ch = -1.
.PP
\fBTcl_UtfToUniChar\fR reads one UTF-8 character starting at \fIsrc\fR
and stores it as a Tcl_UniChar in \fI*chPtr\fR.  The return value is the
number of bytes read from \fIsrc\fR.  The caller must ensure that the
source buffer is long enough such that this routine does not run off the
end and dereference non-existent or random memory; if the source buffer
is known to be null-terminated, this will not happen.  If the input is
................................................................................
characters.
.PP
\fBTcl_UtfCharComplete\fR returns 1 if the source UTF-8 string \fIsrc\fR
of \fIlength\fR bytes is long enough to be decoded by
\fBTcl_UtfToUniChar\fR, or 0 otherwise.  This function does not guarantee
that the UTF-8 string is properly formed.  This routine is used by
procedures that are operating on a byte at a time and need to know if a
full Unicode character has been seen.
.PP
\fBTcl_NumUtfChars\fR corresponds to \fBstrlen\fR for UTF-8 strings.  It
returns the number of Tcl_UniChars that are represented by the UTF-8 string
\fIsrc\fR.  The length of the source string is \fIlength\fR bytes.  If the
length is negative, all bytes up to the first null byte are used.
.PP
\fBTcl_UtfFindFirst\fR corresponds to \fBstrchr\fR for UTF-8 strings.  It
returns a pointer to the first occurrence of the Unicode character \fIch\fR
in the null-terminated UTF-8 string \fIsrc\fR.  The null terminator is
considered part of the UTF-8 string.
.PP
\fBTcl_UtfFindLast\fR corresponds to \fBstrrchr\fR for UTF-8 strings.  It
returns a pointer to the last occurrence of the Unicode character \fIch\fR
in the null-terminated UTF-8 string \fIsrc\fR.  The null terminator is
considered part of the UTF-8 string.
.PP
Given \fIsrc\fR, a pointer to some location in a UTF-8 string,
\fBTcl_UtfNext\fR returns a pointer to the next UTF-8 character in the
string.  The caller must not ask for the next character after the last
character in the string if the string is not terminated by a null

'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2018 Donal K. Fellows
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH abstract n 0.3 TclOO "TclOO Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
oo::abstract \- a class that does not allow direct instances of itself
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
package require TclOO

\fBoo::abstract\fI method \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.fi
.SH "CLASS HIERARCHY"
.nf
\fBoo::object\fR
   \(-> \fBoo::class\fR
       \(-> \fBoo::abstract\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
Abstract classes are classes that can contain definitions, but which cannot be
directly manufactured; they are intended to only ever be inherited from and
instantiated indirectly. The characteristic methods of \fBoo::class\fR
(\fBcreate\fR and \fBnew\fR) are not exported by an instance of
\fBoo::abstract\fR.
.PP
Note that \fBoo::abstract\fR is not itself an instance of \fBoo::abstract\fR.
.SS CONSTRUCTOR
The \fBoo::abstract\fR class does not define an explicit constructor; this
means that it is effectively the same as the constructor of the
\fBoo::class\fR class.
.SS DESTRUCTOR
The \fBoo::abstract\fR class does not define an explicit destructor;
destroying an instance of it is just like destroying an ordinary class (and
will destroy all its subclasses).
.SS "EXPORTED METHODS"
The \fBoo::abstract\fR class defines no new exported methods.
.SS "NON-EXPORTED METHODS"
The \fBoo::abstract\fR class explicitly states that \fBcreate\fR,
\fBcreateWithNamespace\fR, and \fBnew\fR are unexported.
.SH EXAMPLES
.PP
This example defines a simple class hierarchy and creates a new instance of
it. It then invokes a method of the object before destroying the hierarchy and
showing that the destruction is transitive.
.PP
.CS
\fBoo::abstract\fR create fruit {
    method eat {} {
        puts "yummy!"
    }
}
oo::class create banana {
    superclass fruit
    method peel {} {
        puts "skin now off"
    }
}
set b [banana \fBnew\fR]
$b peel              \fI\(-> prints 'skin now off'\fR
$b eat               \fI\(-> prints 'yummy!'\fR
set f [fruit new]    \fI\(-> error 'unknown method "new"...'\fR
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
oo::define(n), oo::object(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
abstract class, class, metaclass, object
.\" Local variables:
.\" mode: nroff
.\" fill-column: 78
.\" End:

.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
Append all of the \fIvalue\fR arguments to the current value
of variable \fIvarName\fR.  If \fIvarName\fR does not exist,
it is given a value equal to the concatenation of all the
\fIvalue\fR arguments.





The result of this command is the new value stored in variable
\fIvarName\fR.
This command provides an efficient way to build up long
variables incrementally.
For example,
.QW "\fBappend a $b\fR"
is much more efficient than
................................................................................
puts $var
# Prints 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
concat(n), lappend(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
append, variable
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff

'\" End:

.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
Append all of the \fIvalue\fR arguments to the current value
of variable \fIvarName\fR.  If \fIvarName\fR does not exist,
it is given a value equal to the concatenation of all the
\fIvalue\fR arguments.
.VS TIP508
If \fIvarName\fR indicate an element that does not exist of an array that has
a default value set, the concatenation of the default value and all the
\fIvalue\fR arguments will be stored in the array element.
.VE TIP508
The result of this command is the new value stored in variable
\fIvarName\fR.
This command provides an efficient way to build up long
variables incrementally.
For example,
.QW "\fBappend a $b\fR"
is much more efficient than
................................................................................
puts $var
# Prints 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
concat(n), lappend(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
append, variable
.\" Local variables:
.\" mode: nroff
.\" fill-column: 78
.\" End:

'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1993-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH array n 8.3 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
array \- Manipulate array variables
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBarray \fIoption arrayName\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
................................................................................
\fISearchId\fR indicates which search on \fIarrayName\fR to
check, and must have been the return value from a previous
invocation of \fBarray startsearch\fR.
This option is particularly useful if an array has an element
with an empty name, since the return value from
\fBarray nextelement\fR will not indicate whether the search
has been completed.















































.TP
\fBarray donesearch \fIarrayName searchId\fR
This command terminates an array search and destroys all the
state associated with that search.  \fISearchId\fR indicates
which search on \fIarrayName\fR to destroy, and must have
been the return value from a previous invocation of
\fBarray startsearch\fR.  Returns an empty string.
................................................................................
    number of buckets with 10 or more entries: 0
    average search distance for entry: 1.2
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
list(n), string(n), variable(n), trace(n), foreach(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
array, element names, search

'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 1993-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH array n 8.7 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
array \- Manipulate array variables
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBarray \fIoption arrayName\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
................................................................................
\fISearchId\fR indicates which search on \fIarrayName\fR to
check, and must have been the return value from a previous
invocation of \fBarray startsearch\fR.
This option is particularly useful if an array has an element
with an empty name, since the return value from
\fBarray nextelement\fR will not indicate whether the search
has been completed.
.TP
\fBarray default \fIsubcommand arrayName args...\fR
.VS TIP508
Manages the default value of the array. Arrays initially have no default
value, but this command allows you to set one; the default value will be
returned when reading from an element of the array \farrayName\fR if the read
would otherwise result in an error. Note that this may cause the \fBappend\fR,
\fBdict\fR, \fBincr\fR and \fBlappend\fR commands to change their behavior in
relation to non-existing array elements.
.RS
.PP
The \fIsubcommand\fR argument controls what exact operation will be performed
on the default value of \fIarrayName\fR. Supported \fIsubcommand\fRs are:
.VE TIP508
.TP
\fBarray default exists \fIarrayName\fR
.VS TIP508
This returns a boolean value indicating whether a default value has been set
for the array \fIarrayName\fR. Returns a false value if \fIarrayName\fR does
not exist. Raises an error if \fIarrayName\fR is an existing variable that is
not an array.
.VE TIP508
.TP
\fBarray default get \fIarrayName\fR
.VS TIP508
This returns the current default value for the array \fIarrayName\fR.  Raises
an error if \fIarrayName\fR is an existing variable that is not an array, or
if \fIarrayName\fR is an array without a default value.
.VE TIP508
.TP
\fBarray default set \fIarrayName value\fR
.VS TIP508
This sets the default value for the array \fIarrayName\fR to \fIvalue\fR.
Returns the empty string. Raises an error if \fIarrayName\fR is an existing
variable that is not an array, or if \fIarrayName\fR is an illegal name for an
array. If \fIarrayName\fR does not currently exist, it is created as an empty
array as well as having its default value set.
.VE TIP508
.TP
\fBarray default unset \fIarrayName\fR
.VS TIP508
This removes the default value for the array \fIarrayName\fR and returns the
empty string. Does nothing if \fIarrayName\fR does not have a default
value. Raises an error if \fIarrayName\fR is an existing variable that is not
an array.
.VE TIP508
.RE
.TP
\fBarray donesearch \fIarrayName searchId\fR
This command terminates an array search and destroys all the
state associated with that search.  \fISearchId\fR indicates
which search on \fIarrayName\fR to destroy, and must have
been the return value from a previous invocation of
\fBarray startsearch\fR.  Returns an empty string.
................................................................................
    number of buckets with 10 or more entries: 0
    average search distance for entry: 1.2
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
list(n), string(n), variable(n), trace(n), foreach(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
array, element names, search
.\" Local variables:
.\" mode: nroff
.\" fill-column: 78
.\" End:

'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2018 Donal K. Fellows
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH callback n 0.3 TclOO "TclOO Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
callback, mymethod \- generate callbacks to methods
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
package require TclOO

\fBcallback\fR \fImethodName\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
\fBmymethod\fR \fImethodName\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
The \fBcallback\fR command,
'\" Based on notes in the tcllib docs, we know the provenance of mymethod
also called \fBmymethod\fR for compatibility with the ooutil and snit packages
of Tcllib,
and which should only be used from within the context of a call to a method
(i.e. inside a method, constructor or destructor body) is used to generate a
script fragment that will invoke the method, \fImethodName\fR, on the current
object (as reported by \fBself\fR) when executed. Any additional arguments
provided will be provided as leading arguments to the callback. The resulting
script fragment shall be a proper list.
.PP
Note that it is up to the caller to ensure that the current object is able to
handle the call of \fImethodName\fR; this command does not check that.
\fImethodName\fR may refer to any exported or unexported method, but may not
refer to a private method as those can only be invoked directly from within
methods. If there is no such method present at the point when the callback is
invoked, the standard \fBunknown\fR method handler will be called.
.SH EXAMPLE
This is a simple echo server class. The \fBcallback\fR command is used in two
places, to arrange for the incoming socket connections to be handled by the
\fIAccept\fR method, and to arrange for the incoming bytes on those
connections to be handled by the \fIReceive\fR method.
.PP
.CS
oo::class create EchoServer {
    variable server clients
    constructor {port} {
        set server [socket -server [\fBcallback\fR Accept] $port]
        set clients {}
    }
    destructor {
        chan close $server
        foreach client [dict keys $clients] {
            chan close $client
        }
    }

    method Accept {channel clientAddress clientPort} {
        dict set clients $channel [dict create \e
                address $clientAddress port $clientPort]
        chan event $channel readable [\fBcallback\fR Receive $channel]
    }
    method Receive {channel} {
        if {[chan gets $channel line] >= 0} {
            my echo $channel $line
        } else {
            chan close $channel
            dict unset clients $channel
        }
    }

    method echo {channel line} {
        dict with clients $channel {
            chan puts $channel \e
                    [format {[%s:%d] %s} $address $port $line]
        }
    }
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
chan(n), fileevent(n), my(n), self(n), socket(n), trace(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
callback, object
.\" Local Variables:
.\" mode: nroff
.\" fill-column: 78
.\" End:

.CS
\fBcd\fR ../lib
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
filename(n), glob(n), pwd(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
working directory

.CS
\fBcd\fR ../lib
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
filename(n), glob(n), pwd(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
working directory
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2011-2015 Andreas Kupries
'\" Copyright (c) 2018 Donal K. Fellows
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH classvariable n 0.3 TclOO "TclOO Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
classvariable \- create link from local variable to variable in class
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
package require TclOO

\fBclassvariable\fR \fIvariableName\fR ?\fI...\fR?
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
The \fBclassvariable\fR command is available within methods. It takes a series
of one or more variable names and makes them available in the method's scope;
those variable names must not be qualified and must not refer to array
elements. The originating scope for the variables is the namespace of the
class that the method was defined by. In other words, the referenced variables
are shared between all instances of that class.
.PP
Note: This command is equivalent to the command \fBtypevariable\fR provided by
the snit package in tcllib for approximately the same purpose. If used in a
method defined directly on a class instance (e.g., through the
\fBoo::objdefine\fR \fBmethod\fR definition) this is very much like just
using:
.PP
.CS
namespace upvar [namespace current] $var $var
.CE
.PP
for each variable listed to \fBclassvariable\fR.
.SH EXAMPLE
This class counts how many instances of it have been made.
.PP
.CS
oo::class create Counted {
    initialise {
        variable count 0
    }

    variable number
    constructor {} {
        \fBclassvariable\fR count
        set number [incr count]
    }

    method report {} {
        \fBclassvariable\fR count
        puts "This is instance $number of $count"
    }
}

set a [Counted new]
set b [Counted new]
$a report
        \fI\(-> This is instance 1 of 2\fR
set c [Counted new]
$b report
        \fI\(-> This is instance 2 of 3\fR
$c report
        \fI\(-> This is instance 3 of 3\fR
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
global(n), namespace(n), oo::class(n), oo::define(n), upvar(n), variable(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
class, class variable, variable
.\" Local Variables:
.\" mode: nroff
.\" fill-column: 78
.\" End:

If a format string lacks a \fB%z\fR or \fB%Z\fR format group,
it is possible for the time to be ambiguous because it appears twice
in the same day, once without and once with Daylight Saving Time.
If this situation occurs, the first occurrence of the time is chosen.
(For this reason, it is wise to have the input string contain the
time zone when converting local times.  This caveat does not apply to
UTC times.)













.SH "FORMAT GROUPS"
.PP
The following format groups are recognized by the \fBclock scan\fR and
\fBclock format\fR commands.
.TP
\fB%a\fR
On output, receives an abbreviation (\fIe.g.,\fR \fBMon\fR) for the day
................................................................................
time.  This is useful for determining the time on a specific day or
doing other date-relative conversions.
.PP
The \fIinputString\fR argument consists of zero or more specifications of the
following form:
.TP
\fItime\fR

A time of day, which is of the form: \fBhh?:mm?:ss?? ?meridian? ?zone?\fR
or \fBhhmm ?meridian? ?zone?\fR



If no meridian is specified, \fBhh\fR is interpreted on
a 24-hour clock.
.TP
\fIdate\fR
A specific month and day with optional year.  The
acceptable formats are
.QW "\fBmm/dd\fR?\fB/yy\fR?" ,
.QW "\fBmonthname dd\fR?\fB, yy\fR?" ,
.QW "\fBday, dd monthname \fR?\fByy\fR?" ,
.QW "\fBdd monthname yy\fR" ,
.QW "?\fBCC\fR?\fByymmdd\fR" ,
and
.QW "\fBdd-monthname-\fR?\fBCC\fR?\fByy\fR" .

The default year is the current year.  If the year is less
than 100, we treat the years 00-68 as 2000-2068 and the years 69-99
as 1969-1999.  Not all platforms can represent the years 38-70, so
an error may result if these years are used.
.TP
\fIISO 8601 point-in-time\fR

An ISO 8601 point-in-time specification, such as
.QW \fICCyymmdd\fBT\fIhhmmss\fR,
where \fBT\fR is the literal
.QW T ,
.QW "\fICCyymmdd hhmmss\fR" ,
or
.QW \fICCyymmdd\fBT\fIhh:mm:ss\fR .
Note that only these three formats are accepted.
The command does \fInot\fR accept the full range of point-in-time
specifications specified in ISO8601.  Other formats can be recognized by
giving an explicit \fB\-format\fR option to the \fBclock scan\fR command.
.TP
\fIrelative time\fR

A specification relative to the current time.  The format is \fBnumber
unit\fR. Acceptable units are \fByear\fR, \fBfortnight\fR,
\fBmonth\fR, \fBweek\fR, \fBday\fR,
\fBhour\fR, \fBminute\fR (or \fBmin\fR), and \fBsecond\fR (or \fBsec\fR).  The
unit can be specified as a singular or plural, as in \fB3 weeks\fR.
These modifiers may also be specified:
\fBtomorrow\fR, \fByesterday\fR, \fBtoday\fR, \fBnow\fR,

If a format string lacks a \fB%z\fR or \fB%Z\fR format group,
it is possible for the time to be ambiguous because it appears twice
in the same day, once without and once with Daylight Saving Time.
If this situation occurs, the first occurrence of the time is chosen.
(For this reason, it is wise to have the input string contain the
time zone when converting local times.  This caveat does not apply to
UTC times.)
.PP
If the interpretation of the groups yields an impossible time because
a field is out of range, enough of that field's unit will be added to
or subtracted from the time to bring it in range. Thus, if attempting to
scan or format day 0 of the month, one day will be subtracted from day
1 of the month, yielding the last day of the previous month.
.PP
If the interpretation of the groups yields an impossible time because
a Daylight Saving Time change skips over that time, or an ambiguous
time because a Daylight Saving Time change skips back so that the clock
observes the given time twice, and no time zone specifier (\fB%z\fR
or \fB%Z\fR) is present in the format, the time is interpreted as
if the clock had not changed.
.SH "FORMAT GROUPS"
.PP
The following format groups are recognized by the \fBclock scan\fR and
\fBclock format\fR commands.
.TP
\fB%a\fR
On output, receives an abbreviation (\fIe.g.,\fR \fBMon\fR) for the day
................................................................................
time.  This is useful for determining the time on a specific day or
doing other date-relative conversions.
.PP
The \fIinputString\fR argument consists of zero or more specifications of the
following form:
.TP
\fItime\fR
.
A time of day, which is of the form:

.QW "\fIhh\fR?\fB:\fImm\fR?\fB:\fIss\fR?? ?\fImeridian\fR? ?\fIzone\fR?"
or
.QW "\fBhhmm \fR?\fBmeridian\fR? ?\fBzone\fR?" .
If no \fImeridian\fR is specified, \fIhh\fR is interpreted on
a 24-hour clock.
.TP
\fIdate\fR
.
A specific month and day with optional year.  The
acceptable formats are
.QW "\fImm\fB/\fIdd\fR?\fB/\fIyy\fR?" ,
.QW "\fImonthname dd\fR?\fB, \fIyy\fR?" ,
.QW "\fIday\fB, \fIdd monthname \fR?\fIyy\fR?" ,
.QW "\fIdd monthname yy\fR" ,
.QW "?\fICC\fR?\fIyymmdd\fR" ,
and
.QW "\fIdd\fB-\fImonthname\fB-\fR?\fICC\fR?\fIyy\fR" .
The default year is the current year.  If the year is less
than 100, we treat the years 00-68 as 2000-2068 and the years 69-99
as 1969-1999.  Not all platforms can represent the years 38-70, so
an error may result if these years are used.
.TP
\fIISO 8601 point-in-time\fR
.
An ISO 8601 point-in-time specification, such as
.QW \fICCyymmdd\fBT\fIhhmmss\fR,
where \fBT\fR is the literal
.QW T ,
.QW "\fICCyymmdd hhmmss\fR" ,
or
.QW \fICCyymmdd\fBT\fIhh\fB:\fImm\fB:\fIss\fR .
Note that only these three formats are accepted.
The command does \fInot\fR accept the full range of point-in-time
specifications specified in ISO8601.  Other formats can be recognized by
giving an explicit \fB\-format\fR option to the \fBclock scan\fR command.
.TP
\fIrelative time\fR
.
A specification relative to the current time.  The format is \fBnumber
unit\fR. Acceptable units are \fByear\fR, \fBfortnight\fR,
\fBmonth\fR, \fBweek\fR, \fBday\fR,
\fBhour\fR, \fBminute\fR (or \fBmin\fR), and \fBsecond\fR (or \fBsec\fR).  The
unit can be specified as a singular or plural, as in \fB3 weeks\fR.
These modifiers may also be specified:
\fBtomorrow\fR, \fByesterday\fR, \fBtoday\fR, \fBnow\fR,

'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2007 Donal K. Fellows
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH define n 0.3 TclOO "TclOO Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
................................................................................
\fIarg\fR arguments; when the second is present, it is exactly as if all the
arguments from \fIsubcommand\fR onwards are made into a list and that list is
used as the \fIdefScript\fR argument.
.SS "CONFIGURING CLASSES"
.PP
The following commands are supported in the \fIdefScript\fR for
\fBoo::define\fR, each of which may also be used in the \fIsubcommand\fR form:





















.TP
\fBconstructor\fI argList bodyScript\fR
.
This creates or updates the constructor for a class. The formal arguments to
the constructor (defined using the same format as for the Tcl \fBproc\fR
command) will be \fIargList\fR, and the body of the constructor will be
\fIbodyScript\fR. When the body of the constructor is evaluated, the current
................................................................................
.RS
.PP
.VS TIP500
If in a private definition context (see the \fBprivate\fR definition command,
below), this command creates private forwarded methods.
.VE TIP500
.RE









.TP
\fBmethod\fI name argList bodyScript\fR
.
This creates or updates a method that is implemented as a procedure-like
script. The name of the method is \fIname\fR, the formal arguments to the
method (defined using the same format as for the Tcl \fBproc\fR command) will
be \fIargList\fR, and the body of the method will be \fIbodyScript\fR. When
................................................................................
\fBself call\fR).
.VE TIP500
.SH "SLOTTED DEFINITIONS"
Some of the configurable definitions of a class or object are \fIslotted
definitions\fR. This means that the configuration is implemented by a slot
object, that is an instance of the class \fBoo::Slot\fR, which manages a list
of values (class names, variable names, etc.) that comprises the contents of
the slot. The class defines three operations (as methods) that may be done on
the slot:
.TP
\fIslot\fR \fB\-append\fR ?\fImember ...\fR?
.
This appends the given \fImember\fR elements to the slot definition.
.TP
\fIslot\fR \fB\-clear\fR
.
This sets the slot definition to the empty list.










.TP
\fIslot\fR \fB\-set\fR ?\fImember ...\fR?
.
This replaces the slot definition with the given \fImember\fR elements.
.PP
A consequence of this is that any use of a slot's default operation where the
first member argument begins with a hyphen will be an error. One of the above
................................................................................
.QW \fBvariable\fR
slot, this is forwarded to
.QW "\fBmy \-append\fR" ),
and these methods which provide the implementation interface:
.TP
\fIslot\fR \fBGet\fR
.
Returns a list that is the current contents of the slot. This method must
always be called from a stack frame created by a call to \fBoo::define\fR or
\fBoo::objdefine\fR.









.TP


















\fIslot\fR \fBSet \fIelementList\fR
.
Sets the contents of the slot to the list \fIelementList\fR and returns the
empty string. This method must always be called from a stack frame created by
a call to \fBoo::define\fR or \fBoo::objdefine\fR.










.PP
The implementation of these methods is slot-dependent (and responsible for
accessing the correct part of the class or object definition). Slots also have
an unknown method handler to tie all these pieces together, and they hide
their \fBdestroy\fR method so that it is not invoked inadvertently. It is
\fIrecommended\fR that any user changes to the slot mechanism be restricted to
defining new operations whose names start with a hyphen.








.SH EXAMPLES
This example demonstrates how to use both forms of the \fBoo::define\fR and
\fBoo::objdefine\fR commands (they work in the same way), as well as
illustrating four of the subcommands of them.
.PP
.CS
oo::class create c
................................................................................
}
\fBoo::objdefine\fR inst {
    \fBmixin -append\fR B
}
inst m1              \fI\(-> prints "red brick"\fR
inst m2              \fI\(-> prints "blue brick"\fR
.CE














































































.SH "SEE ALSO"
next(n), oo::class(n), oo::object(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
class, definition, method, object, slot
.\" Local variables:
.\" mode: nroff
.\" fill-column: 78
.\" End:

'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2007-2018 Donal K. Fellows
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH define n 0.3 TclOO "TclOO Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
................................................................................
\fIarg\fR arguments; when the second is present, it is exactly as if all the
arguments from \fIsubcommand\fR onwards are made into a list and that list is
used as the \fIdefScript\fR argument.
.SS "CONFIGURING CLASSES"
.PP
The following commands are supported in the \fIdefScript\fR for
\fBoo::define\fR, each of which may also be used in the \fIsubcommand\fR form:
.TP
\fBclassmethod\fI name\fR ?\fIargList bodyScrip\fR?
.VS TIP478
This creates a class method, or (if \fIargList\fR and \fIbodyScript\fR are
omitted) promotes an existing method on the class object to be a class
method. The \fIname\fR, \fIargList\fR and \fIbodyScript\fR arguments are as in
the \fBmethod\fR definition, below.
.RS
.PP
Class methods can be called on either the class itself or on the instances of
that class. When they are called, the current object (see the \fBself\R and
\fBmy\fR commands) is the class on which they are called or the class of the
instance on which they are called, depending on whether they are called on the
class or an instance of the class, respectively. If called on a subclass or
instance of the subclass, the current object is the subclass.
.PP
In a private definition context, the methods as invoked on classes are
\fInot\fR private, but the methods as invoked on instances of classes are
private.
.RE
.VE TIP478
.TP
\fBconstructor\fI argList bodyScript\fR
.
This creates or updates the constructor for a class. The formal arguments to
the constructor (defined using the same format as for the Tcl \fBproc\fR
command) will be \fIargList\fR, and the body of the constructor will be
\fIbodyScript\fR. When the body of the constructor is evaluated, the current
................................................................................
.RS
.PP
.VS TIP500
If in a private definition context (see the \fBprivate\fR definition command,
below), this command creates private forwarded methods.
.VE TIP500
.RE
.TP
\fBinitialise\fI script\fR
.TP
\fBinitialize\fI script\fR
.VS TIP478
This evaluates \fIscript\fR in a context which supports local variables and
where the current namespace is the instance namespace of the class object
itself. This is useful for setting up, e.g., class-scoped variables.
.VE TIP478
.TP
\fBmethod\fI name argList bodyScript\fR
.
This creates or updates a method that is implemented as a procedure-like
script. The name of the method is \fIname\fR, the formal arguments to the
method (defined using the same format as for the Tcl \fBproc\fR command) will
be \fIargList\fR, and the body of the method will be \fIbodyScript\fR. When
................................................................................
\fBself call\fR).
.VE TIP500
.SH "SLOTTED DEFINITIONS"
Some of the configurable definitions of a class or object are \fIslotted
definitions\fR. This means that the configuration is implemented by a slot
object, that is an instance of the class \fBoo::Slot\fR, which manages a list
of values (class names, variable names, etc.) that comprises the contents of
the slot. The class defines five operations (as methods) that may be done on
the slot:
.TP
\fIslot\fR \fB\-append\fR ?\fImember ...\fR?
.
This appends the given \fImember\fR elements to the slot definition.
.TP
\fIslot\fR \fB\-clear\fR
.
This sets the slot definition to the empty list.
.TP
\fIslot\fR \fB\-prepend\fR ?\fImember ...\fR?
.VS TIP516
This prepends the given \fImember\fR elements to the slot definition.
.VE TIP516
.TP
\fIslot\fR \fB\-remove\fR ?\fImember ...\fR?
.VS TIP516
This removes the given \fImember\fR elements from the slot definition.
.VE TIP516
.TP
\fIslot\fR \fB\-set\fR ?\fImember ...\fR?
.
This replaces the slot definition with the given \fImember\fR elements.
.PP
A consequence of this is that any use of a slot's default operation where the
first member argument begins with a hyphen will be an error. One of the above
................................................................................
.QW \fBvariable\fR
slot, this is forwarded to
.QW "\fBmy \-append\fR" ),
and these methods which provide the implementation interface:
.TP
\fIslot\fR \fBGet\fR
.
Returns a list that is the current contents of the slot, but does not modify
the slot. This method must always be called from a stack frame created by a
call to \fBoo::define\fR or \fBoo::objdefine\fR. This method \fIshould not\fR
return an error unless it is called from outside a definition context or with
the wrong number of arguments.
.RS
.PP
.VS TIP516
The elements of the list should be fully resolved, if that is a meaningful
concept to the slot.
.VE TIP516
.RE
.TP
\fIslot\fR \fBResolve\fR \fIslotElement\fR
.VS TIP516
Returns \fIslotElement\fR with a resolution operation applied to it, but does
not modify the slot. For slots of simple strings, this is an operation that
does nothing, whereas for slots of classes, this maps a class name to its
fully-qualified class name.  This method must always be called from a stack
frame created by a call to \fBoo::define\fR or \fBoo::objdefine\fR.  This
method \fIshould not\fR return an error unless it is called from outside a
definition context or with the wrong number of arguments; unresolvable
arguments should be returned as is (as not all slot operations strictly
require that values are resolvable to work).
.RS
.PP
Implementations \fIshould not\fR enforce uniqueness and ordering constraints
in this method; that is the responsibility of the \fBSet\fR method.
.RE
.VE TIP516
.TP
\fIslot\fR \fBSet \fIelementList\fR
.
Sets the contents of the slot to the list \fIelementList\fR and returns the
empty string. This method must always be called from a stack frame created by
a call to \fBoo::define\fR or \fBoo::objdefine\fR. This method may return an
error if it rejects the change to the slot contents (e.g., because of invalid
values) as well as if it is called from outside a definition context or with
the wrong number of arguments.
.RS
.PP
This method \fImay\fR reorder and filter the elements if this is necessary in
order to satisfy the underlying constraints of the slot. (For example, slots
of classes enforce a uniqueness constraint that places each element in the
earliest location in the slot that it can.)
.RE
.PP
The implementation of these methods is slot-dependent (and responsible for
accessing the correct part of the class or object definition). Slots also have
an unknown method handler to tie all these pieces together, and they hide
their \fBdestroy\fR method so that it is not invoked inadvertently. It is
\fIrecommended\fR that any user changes to the slot mechanism be restricted to
defining new operations whose names start with a hyphen.
.PP
.VS TIP516
Most slot operations will initially \fBResolve\fR their argument list, combine
it with the results of the \fBGet\fR method, and then \fBSet\fR the result.
Some operations omit one or both of the first two steps; omitting the third
would result in an idempotent read-only operation (but the standard mechanism
for reading from slots is via \fBinfo class\fR and \fBinfo object\fR).
.VE TIP516
.SH EXAMPLES
This example demonstrates how to use both forms of the \fBoo::define\fR and
\fBoo::objdefine\fR commands (they work in the same way), as well as
illustrating four of the subcommands of them.
.PP
.CS
oo::class create c
................................................................................
}
\fBoo::objdefine\fR inst {
    \fBmixin -append\fR B
}
inst m1              \fI\(-> prints "red brick"\fR
inst m2              \fI\(-> prints "blue brick"\fR
.CE
.PP
.VS TIP478
This example shows how to create and use class variables. It is a class that
counts how many instances of itself have been made.
.PP
.CS
oo::class create Counted
\fBoo::define\fR Counted {
    \fBinitialise\fR {
        variable count 0
    }

    \fBvariable\fR number
    \fBconstructor\fR {} {
        classvariable count
        set number [incr count]
    }

    \fBmethod\fR report {} {
        classvariable count
        puts "This is instance $number of $count"
    }
}

set a [Counted new]
set b [Counted new]
$a report
        \fI\(-> This is instance 1 of 2\fR
set c [Counted new]
$b report
        \fI\(-> This is instance 2 of 3\fR
$c report
        \fI\(-> This is instance 3 of 3\fR
.CE
.PP
This example demonstrates how to use class methods. (Note that the constructor
for \fBoo::class\fR calls \fBoo::define\fR on the class.)
.PP
.CS
oo::class create DBTable {
    \fBclassmethod\fR find {description} {
        puts "DB: locate row from [self] matching $description"
        return [my new]
    }
    \fBclassmethod\fR insert {description} {
        puts "DB: create row in [self] matching $description"
        return [my new]
    }
    \fBmethod\fR update {description} {
        puts "DB: update row [self] with $description"
    }
    \fBmethod\fR delete {} {
        puts "DB: delete row [self]"
        my destroy; # Just delete the object, not the DB row
    }
}

oo::class create Users {
    \fBsuperclass\fR DBTable
}
oo::class create Groups {
    \fBsuperclass\fR DBTable
}

set u1 [Users insert "username=abc"]
        \fI\(-> DB: create row from ::Users matching username=abc\fR
set u2 [Users insert "username=def"]
        \fI\(-> DB: create row from ::Users matching username=def\fR
$u2 update "group=NULL"
        \fI\(-> DB: update row ::oo::Obj124 with group=NULL\fR
$u1 delete
        \fI\(-> DB: delete row ::oo::Obj123\fR
set g [Group find "groupname=webadmins"]
        \fI\(-> DB: locate row ::Group with groupname=webadmins\fR
$g update "emailaddress=admins"
        \fI\(-> DB: update row ::oo::Obj125 with emailaddress=admins\fR
.CE
.VE TIP478
.SH "SEE ALSO"
next(n), oo::class(n), oo::object(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
class, definition, method, object, slot
.\" Local variables:
.\" mode: nroff
.\" fill-column: 78
.\" End:

\fBdict append \fIdictionaryVariable key \fR?\fIstring ...\fR?
.
This appends the given string (or strings) to the value that the given
key maps to in the dictionary value contained in the given variable,
writing the resulting dictionary value back to that variable.
Non-existent keys are treated as if they map to an empty string. The
updated dictionary value is returned.





.TP
\fBdict create \fR?\fIkey value ...\fR?
.
Return a new dictionary that contains each of the key/value mappings
listed as arguments (keys and values alternating, with each key being
followed by its associated value.)
.TP
................................................................................
This adds the given increment value (an integer that defaults to 1 if
not specified) to the value that the given key maps to in the
dictionary value contained in the given variable, writing the
resulting dictionary value back to that variable. Non-existent keys
are treated as if they map to 0. It is an error to increment a value
for an existing key if that value is not an integer. The updated
dictionary value is returned.





.TP
\fBdict info \fIdictionaryValue\fR
.
This returns information (intended for display to people) about the
given dictionary though the format of this data is dependent on the
implementation of the dictionary. For dictionaries that are
implemented by hash tables, it is expected that this will return the
................................................................................
This appends the given items to the list value that the given key maps
to in the dictionary value contained in the given variable, writing
the resulting dictionary value back to that variable. Non-existent
keys are treated as if they map to an empty list, and it is legal for
there to be no items to append to the list. It is an error for the
value that the key maps to to not be representable as a list. The
updated dictionary value is returned.





.TP
\fBdict map \fR{\fIkeyVariable valueVariable\fR} \fIdictionaryValue body\fR
.
This command applies a transformation to each element of a dictionary,
returning a new dictionary. It takes three arguments: the first is a
two-element list of variable names (for the key and value respectively of each
mapping in the dictionary), the second the dictionary value to iterate across,
................................................................................
\fBdict set \fIdictionaryVariable key \fR?\fIkey ...\fR? \fIvalue\fR
.
This operation takes the name of a variable containing a dictionary
value and places an updated dictionary value in that variable
containing a mapping from the given key to the given value. When
multiple keys are present, this operation creates or updates a chain
of nested dictionaries. The updated dictionary value is returned.





.TP
\fBdict size \fIdictionaryValue\fR
.
Return the number of key/value mappings in the given dictionary value.
.TP
\fBdict unset \fIdictionaryVariable key \fR?\fIkey ...\fR?
.
................................................................................
variable containing a dictionary value and places an updated
dictionary value in that variable that does not contain a mapping for
the given key. Where multiple keys are present, this describes a path
through nested dictionaries to the mapping to remove. At least one key
must be specified, but the last key on the key-path need not exist.
All other components on the path must exist. The updated dictionary
value is returned.





.TP
\fBdict update \fIdictionaryVariable key varName \fR?\fIkey varName ...\fR? \fIbody\fR
.
Execute the Tcl script in \fIbody\fR with the value for each \fIkey\fR
(as found by reading the dictionary value in \fIdictionaryVariable\fR)
mapped to the variable \fIvarName\fR. There may be multiple
\fIkey\fR/\fIvarName\fR pairs. If a \fIkey\fR does not have a mapping,
................................................................................
terminates, any changes made to the \fIvarName\fRs is reflected back
to the dictionary within \fIdictionaryVariable\fR (unless
\fIdictionaryVariable\fR itself becomes unreadable, when all updates
are silently discarded), even if the result of \fIbody\fR is an error
or some other kind of exceptional exit. The result of \fBdict
update\fR is (unless some kind of error occurs) the result of the
evaluation of \fIbody\fR.





.RS
.PP
Each \fIvarName\fR is mapped in the scope enclosing the \fBdict update\fR;
it is recommended that this command only be used in a local scope
(\fBproc\fRedure, lambda term for \fBapply\fR, or method). Because of
this, the variables set by \fBdict update\fR will continue to
exist after the command finishes (unless explicitly \fBunset\fR).
................................................................................
for the execution of \fIbody\fR. As with \fBdict update\fR, making
\fIdictionaryVariable\fR unreadable will make the updates to the
dictionary be discarded, and this also happens if the contents of
\fIdictionaryVariable\fR are adjusted so that the chain of
dictionaries no longer exists. The result of \fBdict with\fR is
(unless some kind of error occurs) the result of the evaluation of
\fIbody\fR.





.RS
.PP
The variables are mapped in the scope enclosing the \fBdict with\fR;
it is recommended that this command only be used in a local scope
(\fBproc\fRedure, lambda term for \fBapply\fR, or method). Because of
this, the variables set by \fBdict with\fR will continue to
exist after the command finishes (unless explicitly \fBunset\fR).

\fBdict append \fIdictionaryVariable key \fR?\fIstring ...\fR?
.
This appends the given string (or strings) to the value that the given
key maps to in the dictionary value contained in the given variable,
writing the resulting dictionary value back to that variable.
Non-existent keys are treated as if they map to an empty string. The
updated dictionary value is returned.
.VS TIP508
If \fIdictionaryVarable\fR indicates an element that does not exist of an
array that has a default value set, the default value and will be used as the
value of the dictionary prior to the appending operation.
.VE TIP508
.TP
\fBdict create \fR?\fIkey value ...\fR?
.
Return a new dictionary that contains each of the key/value mappings
listed as arguments (keys and values alternating, with each key being
followed by its associated value.)
.TP
................................................................................
This adds the given increment value (an integer that defaults to 1 if
not specified) to the value that the given key maps to in the
dictionary value contained in the given variable, writing the
resulting dictionary value back to that variable. Non-existent keys
are treated as if they map to 0. It is an error to increment a value
for an existing key if that value is not an integer. The updated
dictionary value is returned.
.VS TIP508
If \fIdictionaryVarable\fR indicates an element that does not exist of an
array that has a default value set, the default value and will be used as the
value of the dictionary prior to the incrementing operation.
.VE TIP508
.TP
\fBdict info \fIdictionaryValue\fR
.
This returns information (intended for display to people) about the
given dictionary though the format of this data is dependent on the
implementation of the dictionary. For dictionaries that are
implemented by hash tables, it is expected that this will return the
................................................................................
This appends the given items to the list value that the given key maps
to in the dictionary value contained in the given variable, writing
the resulting dictionary value back to that variable. Non-existent
keys are treated as if they map to an empty list, and it is legal for
there to be no items to append to the list. It is an error for the
value that the key maps to to not be representable as a list. The
updated dictionary value is returned.
.VS TIP508
If \fIdictionaryVarable\fR indicates an element that does not exist of an
array that has a default value set, the default value and will be used as the
value of the dictionary prior to the list-appending operation.
.VE TIP508
.TP
\fBdict map \fR{\fIkeyVariable valueVariable\fR} \fIdictionaryValue body\fR
.
This command applies a transformation to each element of a dictionary,
returning a new dictionary. It takes three arguments: the first is a
two-element list of variable names (for the key and value respectively of each
mapping in the dictionary), the second the dictionary value to iterate across,
................................................................................
\fBdict set \fIdictionaryVariable key \fR?\fIkey ...\fR? \fIvalue\fR
.
This operation takes the name of a variable containing a dictionary
value and places an updated dictionary value in that variable
containing a mapping from the given key to the given value. When
multiple keys are present, this operation creates or updates a chain
of nested dictionaries. The updated dictionary value is returned.
.VS TIP508
If \fIdictionaryVarable\fR indicates an element that does not exist of an
array that has a default value set, the default value and will be used as the
value of the dictionary prior to the value insert/update operation.
.VE TIP508
.TP
\fBdict size \fIdictionaryValue\fR
.
Return the number of key/value mappings in the given dictionary value.
.TP
\fBdict unset \fIdictionaryVariable key \fR?\fIkey ...\fR?
.
................................................................................
variable containing a dictionary value and places an updated
dictionary value in that variable that does not contain a mapping for
the given key. Where multiple keys are present, this describes a path
through nested dictionaries to the mapping to remove. At least one key
must be specified, but the last key on the key-path need not exist.
All other components on the path must exist. The updated dictionary
value is returned.
.VS TIP508
If \fIdictionaryVarable\fR indicates an element that does not exist of an
array that has a default value set, the default value and will be used as the
value of the dictionary prior to the value remove operation.
.VE TIP508
.TP
\fBdict update \fIdictionaryVariable key varName \fR?\fIkey varName ...\fR? \fIbody\fR
.
Execute the Tcl script in \fIbody\fR with the value for each \fIkey\fR
(as found by reading the dictionary value in \fIdictionaryVariable\fR)
mapped to the variable \fIvarName\fR. There may be multiple
\fIkey\fR/\fIvarName\fR pairs. If a \fIkey\fR does not have a mapping,
................................................................................
terminates, any changes made to the \fIvarName\fRs is reflected back
to the dictionary within \fIdictionaryVariable\fR (unless
\fIdictionaryVariable\fR itself becomes unreadable, when all updates
are silently discarded), even if the result of \fIbody\fR is an error
or some other kind of exceptional exit. The result of \fBdict
update\fR is (unless some kind of error occurs) the result of the
evaluation of \fIbody\fR.
.VS TIP508
If \fIdictionaryVarable\fR indicates an element that does not exist of an
array that has a default value set, the default value and will be used as the
value of the dictionary prior to the update operation.
.VE TIP508
.RS
.PP
Each \fIvarName\fR is mapped in the scope enclosing the \fBdict update\fR;
it is recommended that this command only be used in a local scope
(\fBproc\fRedure, lambda term for \fBapply\fR, or method). Because of
this, the variables set by \fBdict update\fR will continue to
exist after the command finishes (unless explicitly \fBunset\fR).
................................................................................
for the execution of \fIbody\fR. As with \fBdict update\fR, making
\fIdictionaryVariable\fR unreadable will make the updates to the
dictionary be discarded, and this also happens if the contents of
\fIdictionaryVariable\fR are adjusted so that the chain of
dictionaries no longer exists. The result of \fBdict with\fR is
(unless some kind of error occurs) the result of the evaluation of
\fIbody\fR.
.VS TIP508
If \fIdictionaryVarable\fR indicates an element that does not exist of an
array that has a default value set, the default value and will be used as the
value of the dictionary prior to the updating operation.
.VE TIP508
.RS
.PP
The variables are mapped in the scope enclosing the \fBdict with\fR;
it is recommended that this command only be used in a local scope
(\fBproc\fRedure, lambda term for \fBapply\fR, or method). Because of
this, the variables set by \fBdict with\fR will continue to
exist after the command finishes (unless explicitly \fBunset\fR).

    puts "Read record: $record"
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
file(n), open(n), close(n), fblocked(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
.SH KEYWORDS
channel, end of file

    puts "Read record: $record"
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
file(n), open(n), close(n), fblocked(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
.SH KEYWORDS
channel, end of file
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

.QW \[email protected]\0\fIfileId\fR
notation, does not work.  When reading from a socket, a 16-bit DOS
application will hang and a 32-bit application will return immediately with
end-of-file.  When either type of application writes to a socket, the
information is instead sent to the console, if one is present, or is
discarded.
.RS













.PP
The Tk console text widget does not provide real standard IO capabilities.
Under Tk, when redirecting from standard input, all applications will see an
immediate end-of-file; information redirected to standard output or standard
error will be discarded.
.PP
Either forward or backward slashes are accepted as path separators for
................................................................................
.CS
\fBexec\fR cmp.bat somefile.c -o somefile
.CE
.PP
With the file \fIcmp.bat\fR looking something like:
.PP
.CS




@gcc %1 %2 %3 %4 %5 %6 %7 %8 %9
.CE
.SS "WORKING WITH COMMAND BUILT-INS"
.PP
Sometimes you need to be careful, as different programs may have the
same name and be in the path. It can then happen that typing a command
at the DOS prompt finds \fIa different program\fR than the same

.QW \[email protected]\0\fIfileId\fR
notation, does not work.  When reading from a socket, a 16-bit DOS
application will hang and a 32-bit application will return immediately with
end-of-file.  When either type of application writes to a socket, the
information is instead sent to the console, if one is present, or is
discarded.
.RS
.PP
Note that the current escape resp. quoting of arguments for windows works only
with executables using CommandLineToArgv, CRT-library or similar, as well as
with the windows batch files (excepting the newline, see below).
Although it is the common escape algorithm, but, in fact, the way how the
executable parses the command-line (resp. splits it into single arguments)
is decisive.
.PP
Unfortunately, there is currently no way to supply newline character within
an argument to the batch files (\fB.cmd\fR or \fB.bat\fR) or to the command
processor (\fBcmd.exe /c\fR), because this causes truncation of command-line
(also the argument chain) on the first newline character.
But it works properly with an executable (using CommandLineToArgv, etc).
.PP
The Tk console text widget does not provide real standard IO capabilities.
Under Tk, when redirecting from standard input, all applications will see an
immediate end-of-file; information redirected to standard output or standard
error will be discarded.
.PP
Either forward or backward slashes are accepted as path separators for
................................................................................
.CS
\fBexec\fR cmp.bat somefile.c -o somefile
.CE
.PP
With the file \fIcmp.bat\fR looking something like:
.PP
.CS
@gcc %*
.CE
or like another variant using single parameters:
.CS
@gcc %1 %2 %3 %4 %5 %6 %7 %8 %9
.CE
.SS "WORKING WITH COMMAND BUILT-INS"
.PP
Sometimes you need to be careful, as different programs may have the
same name and be in the path. It can then happen that typing a command
at the DOS prompt finds \fIa different program\fR than the same

    \fBexit\fR 2
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
exec(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
abort, exit, process

    \fBexit\fR 2
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
exec(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
abort, exit, process
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

socket -server connect 12345
vwait forever
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
gets(n), open(n), read(n), socket(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
.SH KEYWORDS
blocking, nonblocking

socket -server connect 12345
vwait forever
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
gets(n), open(n), read(n), socket(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
.SH KEYWORDS
blocking, nonblocking
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

\fBfileevent\fR is based on the \fBaddinput\fR command created
by Mark Diekhans.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
fconfigure(n), gets(n), interp(n), puts(n), read(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
.SH KEYWORDS
asynchronous I/O, blocking, channel, event handler, nonblocking, readable,
script, writable.

\fBfileevent\fR is based on the \fBaddinput\fR command created
by Mark Diekhans.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
fconfigure(n), gets(n), interp(n), puts(n), read(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
.SH KEYWORDS
asynchronous I/O, blocking, channel, event handler, nonblocking, readable,
script, writable.
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

.QW .....abc
is illegal.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
file(n), glob(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
current directory, absolute file name, relative file name,
volume-relative file name, portability

.QW .....abc
is illegal.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
file(n), glob(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
current directory, absolute file name, relative file name,
volume-relative file name, portability
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

gets stdin name
puts "Hello there, $name!"
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
file(n), open(n), socket(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
.SH KEYWORDS
blocking, buffer, channel, flush, nonblocking, output

gets stdin name
puts "Hello there, $name!"
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
file(n), open(n), socket(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
.SH KEYWORDS
blocking, buffer, channel, flush, nonblocking, output
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

.CE

.SH "SEE ALSO"
for(n), while(n), break(n), continue(n)

.SH KEYWORDS
foreach, iteration, list, loop

.CE

.SH "SEE ALSO"
for(n), while(n), break(n), continue(n)

.SH KEYWORDS
foreach, iteration, list, loop
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

    append accumulator $string \en
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
namespace(n), upvar(n), variable(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
global, namespace, procedure, variable

    append accumulator $string \en
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
namespace(n), upvar(n), variable(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
global, namespace, procedure, variable
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

is modified to eliminate the history command and replace it with
the result of the history command.
If you want to redo an event without modifying history, then use
the \fBevent\fR operation to retrieve some event,
and the \fBadd\fR operation to add it to history and execute it.
.SH KEYWORDS
event, history, record

is modified to eliminate the history command and replace it with
the result of the history command.
If you want to redo an event without modifying history, then use
the \fBevent\fR operation to retrieve some event,
and the \fBadd\fR operation to add it to history and execute it.
.SH KEYWORDS
event, history, record
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Ajuba Solutions.
'\" Copyright (c) 2004 ActiveState Corporation.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH "http" n 2.7 http "Tcl Bundled Packages"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
http \- Client-side implementation of the HTTP/1.1 protocol
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBpackage require http ?2.7?\fR
.\" See Also -useragent option documentation in body!
.sp
\fB::http::config ?\fI\-option value\fR ...?
.sp
\fB::http::geturl \fIurl\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR ...?
.sp
\fB::http::formatQuery\fR \fIkey value\fR ?\fIkey value\fR ...?


.sp
\fB::http::reset\fR \fItoken\fR ?\fIwhy\fR?
.sp
\fB::http::wait \fItoken\fR
.sp
\fB::http::status \fItoken\fR
.sp
................................................................................
.sp
\fB::http::error \fItoken\fR
.sp
\fB::http::cleanup \fItoken\fR
.sp
\fB::http::register \fIproto port command\fR
.sp


\fB::http::unregister \fIproto\fR
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBhttp\fR package provides the client side of the HTTP/1.1
protocol, as defined in RFC 2616.
The package implements the GET, POST, and HEAD operations
of HTTP/1.1.  It allows configuration of a proxy host to get through
firewalls.  The package is compatible with the \fBSafesock\fR security
policy, so it can be used by untrusted applets to do URL fetching from
a restricted set of hosts. This package can be extended to support
additional HTTP transport protocols, such as HTTPS, by providing
a custom \fBsocket\fR command, via \fB::http::register\fR.
................................................................................
\fB\-accept\fR \fImimetypes\fR
.
The Accept header of the request.  The default is */*, which means that
all types of documents are accepted.  Otherwise you can supply a
comma-separated list of mime type patterns that you are
willing to receive.  For example,
.QW "image/gif, image/jpeg, text/*" .













.TP
\fB\-proxyhost\fR \fIhostname\fR
.
The name of the proxy host, if any.  If this value is the
empty string, the URL host is contacted directly.
.TP
\fB\-proxyport\fR \fInumber\fR
................................................................................
to determine if a proxy is required for a given host.  One argument, a
host name, is added to \fIcommand\fR when it is invoked.  If a proxy
is required, the callback should return a two-element list containing
the proxy server and proxy port.  Otherwise the filter should return
an empty list.  The default filter returns the values of the
\fB\-proxyhost\fR and \fB\-proxyport\fR settings if they are
non-empty.












.TP
\fB\-urlencoding\fR \fIencoding\fR
.
The \fIencoding\fR used for creating the x-url-encoded URLs with

\fB::http::formatQuery\fR.  The default is \fButf-8\fR, as specified by RFC
2718.  Prior to http 2.5 this was unspecified, and that behavior can be
returned by specifying the empty string (\fB{}\fR), although
\fIiso8859-1\fR is recommended to restore similar behavior but without the
\fB::http::formatQuery\fR throwing an error processing non-latin-1
characters.
.TP
\fB\-useragent\fR \fIstring\fR
.
The value of the User-Agent header in the HTTP request.  The default is
.QW "\fBTcl http client package 2.7\fR" .














.RE
.TP
\fB::http::geturl\fR \fIurl\fR ?\fIoptions\fR?
.
The \fB::http::geturl\fR command is the main procedure in the package.
The \fB\-query\fR option causes a POST operation and
the \fB\-validate\fR option causes a HEAD operation;
................................................................................
.CS
Pragma: no-cache
.CE
.RE
.TP
\fB\-keepalive\fR \fIboolean\fR
.
If true, attempt to keep the connection open for servicing
multiple requests.  Default is 0.
.TP
\fB\-method\fR \fItype\fR
.
Force the HTTP request method to \fItype\fR. \fB::http::geturl\fR will
auto-select GET, POST or HEAD based on other options, but this option
enables choices like PUT and DELETE for webdav support.
................................................................................
\fB::http::formatQuery\fR \fIkey value\fR ?\fIkey value\fR ...?
.
This procedure does x-url-encoding of query data.  It takes an even
number of arguments that are the keys and values of the query.  It
encodes the keys and values, and generates one string that has the
proper & and = separators.  The result is suitable for the
\fB\-query\fR value passed to \fB::http::geturl\fR.





.TP
\fB::http::reset\fR \fItoken\fR ?\fIwhy\fR?
.
This command resets the HTTP transaction identified by \fItoken\fR, if any.
This sets the \fBstate(status)\fR value to \fIwhy\fR, which defaults to
\fBreset\fR, and then calls the registered \fB\-command\fR callback.
.TP
................................................................................
package require tls

::http::register https 443 ::tls::socket

set token [::http::geturl https://my.secure.site/]
.CE
.RE











.TP
\fB::http::unregister\fR \fIproto\fR
.
This procedure unregisters a protocol handler that was previously
registered via \fB::http::register\fR, returning a two-item list of
the default port and handler command that was previously installed
(via \fB::http::register\fR) if there was such a handler, and an error if
................................................................................
Once the data associated with the URL is no longer needed, the state
array should be unset to free up storage.
The \fB::http::cleanup\fR procedure is provided for that purpose.
The following elements of
the array are supported:
.RS
.TP








\fBbody\fR
.
The contents of the URL.  This will be empty if the \fB\-channel\fR
option has been specified.  This value is returned by the \fB::http::data\fR command.
.TP
\fBcharset\fR
.
................................................................................
.
A copy of the \fBContent-Type\fR meta-data value.
.TP
\fBurl\fR
.
The requested URL.
.RE




































































































.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
This example creates a procedure to copy a URL to a file while printing a
progress meter, and prints the meta-data associated with the URL.
.PP
.CS
proc httpcopy { url file {chunk 4096} } {

'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Ajuba Solutions.
'\" Copyright (c) 2004 ActiveState Corporation.
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH "http" n 2.9 http "Tcl Bundled Packages"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
http \- Client-side implementation of the HTTP/1.1 protocol
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBpackage require http\fI ?\fB2.8\fR?
.\" See Also -useragent option documentation in body!
.sp
\fB::http::config\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR ...?
.sp
\fB::http::geturl \fIurl\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR ...?
.sp
\fB::http::formatQuery\fR \fIkey value\fR ?\fIkey value\fR ...?
.sp
\fB::http::quoteString\fR \fIvalue\fR
.sp
\fB::http::reset\fR \fItoken\fR ?\fIwhy\fR?
.sp
\fB::http::wait \fItoken\fR
.sp
\fB::http::status \fItoken\fR
.sp
................................................................................
.sp
\fB::http::error \fItoken\fR
.sp
\fB::http::cleanup \fItoken\fR
.sp
\fB::http::register \fIproto port command\fR
.sp
\fB::http::registerError \fIport\fR ?\fImessage\fR?
.sp
\fB::http::unregister \fIproto\fR
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBhttp\fR package provides the client side of the HTTP/1.1
protocol, as defined in RFC 7230 to RFC 7235, which supersede RFC 2616.
The package implements the GET, POST, and HEAD operations
of HTTP/1.1.  It allows configuration of a proxy host to get through
firewalls.  The package is compatible with the \fBSafesock\fR security
policy, so it can be used by untrusted applets to do URL fetching from
a restricted set of hosts. This package can be extended to support
additional HTTP transport protocols, such as HTTPS, by providing
a custom \fBsocket\fR command, via \fB::http::register\fR.
................................................................................
\fB\-accept\fR \fImimetypes\fR
.
The Accept header of the request.  The default is */*, which means that
all types of documents are accepted.  Otherwise you can supply a
comma-separated list of mime type patterns that you are
willing to receive.  For example,
.QW "image/gif, image/jpeg, text/*" .
.TP
\fB\-pipeline\fR \fIboolean\fR
.
Specifies whether HTTP/1.1 transactions on a persistent socket will be
pipelined.  See the \fBPERSISTENT SOCKETS\fR section for details. The default
is 1.
.TP
\fB\-postfresh\fR \fIboolean\fR
.
Specifies whether requests that use the \fBPOST\fR method will always use a
fresh socket, overriding the \fB-keepalive\fR option of
command \fBhttp::geturl\fR.  See the \fBPERSISTENT SOCKETS\fR section for details.
The default is 0.
.TP
\fB\-proxyhost\fR \fIhostname\fR
.
The name of the proxy host, if any.  If this value is the
empty string, the URL host is contacted directly.
.TP
\fB\-proxyport\fR \fInumber\fR
................................................................................
to determine if a proxy is required for a given host.  One argument, a
host name, is added to \fIcommand\fR when it is invoked.  If a proxy
is required, the callback should return a two-element list containing
the proxy server and proxy port.  Otherwise the filter should return
an empty list.  The default filter returns the values of the
\fB\-proxyhost\fR and \fB\-proxyport\fR settings if they are
non-empty.
.TP
\fB\-repost\fR \fIboolean\fR
.
Specifies what to do if a POST request over a persistent connection fails
because the server has half-closed the connection.  If boolean \fBtrue\fR, the
request
will be automatically retried; if boolean \fBfalse\fR it will not, and the
application
that uses \fBhttp::geturl\fR is expected to seek user confirmation before
retrying the POST.  The value \fBtrue\fR should be used only under certain
conditions. See the \fBPERSISTENT SOCKETS\fR section for details. The
default is 0.
.TP
\fB\-urlencoding\fR \fIencoding\fR
.
The \fIencoding\fR used for creating the x-url-encoded URLs with
\fB::http::formatQuery\fR and \fB::http::quoteString\fR.
The default is \fButf-8\fR, as specified by RFC
2718.  Prior to http 2.5 this was unspecified, and that behavior can be
returned by specifying the empty string (\fB{}\fR), although
\fIiso8859-1\fR is recommended to restore similar behavior but without the
\fB::http::formatQuery\fR or \fB::http::quoteString\fR
throwing an error processing non-latin-1 characters.
.TP
\fB\-useragent\fR \fIstring\fR
.
The value of the User-Agent header in the HTTP request.  In an unsafe
interpreter, the default value depends upon the operating system, and
the version numbers of \fBhttp\fR and \fBTcl\fR, and is (for example)
.QW "\fBMozilla/5.0 (Windows; U; Windows NT 10.0) http/2.8.12 Tcl/8.6.8\fR" .
A safe interpreter cannot determine its operating system, and so the default
in a safe interpreter is to use a Windows 10 value with the current version
numbers of \fBhttp\fR and \fBTcl\fR.
.TP
\fB\-zip\fR \fIboolean\fR
.
If the value is boolean \fBtrue\fR, then by default requests will send a header
.QW "\fBAccept-Encoding: gzip,deflate,compress\fR" .
If the value is boolean \fBfalse\fR, then by default this header will not be sent.
In either case the default can be overridden for an individual request by
supplying a custom \fBAccept-Encoding\fR header in the \fB-headers\fR option
of \fBhttp::geturl\fR. The default is 1.
.RE
.TP
\fB::http::geturl\fR \fIurl\fR ?\fIoptions\fR?
.
The \fB::http::geturl\fR command is the main procedure in the package.
The \fB\-query\fR option causes a POST operation and
the \fB\-validate\fR option causes a HEAD operation;
................................................................................
.CS
Pragma: no-cache
.CE
.RE
.TP
\fB\-keepalive\fR \fIboolean\fR
.
If boolean \fBtrue\fR, attempt to keep the connection open for servicing
multiple requests.  Default is 0.
.TP
\fB\-method\fR \fItype\fR
.
Force the HTTP request method to \fItype\fR. \fB::http::geturl\fR will
auto-select GET, POST or HEAD based on other options, but this option
enables choices like PUT and DELETE for webdav support.
................................................................................
\fB::http::formatQuery\fR \fIkey value\fR ?\fIkey value\fR ...?
.
This procedure does x-url-encoding of query data.  It takes an even
number of arguments that are the keys and values of the query.  It
encodes the keys and values, and generates one string that has the
proper & and = separators.  The result is suitable for the
\fB\-query\fR value passed to \fB::http::geturl\fR.
.TP
\fB::http::quoteString\fR \fIvalue\fR
.
This procedure does x-url-encoding of string.  It takes a single argument and
encodes it.
.TP
\fB::http::reset\fR \fItoken\fR ?\fIwhy\fR?
.
This command resets the HTTP transaction identified by \fItoken\fR, if any.
This sets the \fBstate(status)\fR value to \fIwhy\fR, which defaults to
\fBreset\fR, and then calls the registered \fB\-command\fR callback.
.TP
................................................................................
package require tls

::http::register https 443 ::tls::socket

set token [::http::geturl https://my.secure.site/]
.CE
.RE
.TP
\fB::http::registerError\fR \fIport\fR ?\fImessage\fR?
.
This procedure allows a registered protocol handler to deliver an error
message for use by \fBhttp\fR.  Calling this command does not raise an
error. The command is useful when a registered protocol detects an problem
(for example, an invalid TLS certificate) that will cause an error to
propagate to \fBhttp\fR.  The command allows \fBhttp\fR to provide a
precise error message rather than a general one.  The command returns the
value provided by the last call with argument \fImessage\fR, or the empty
string if no such call has been made.
.TP
\fB::http::unregister\fR \fIproto\fR
.
This procedure unregisters a protocol handler that was previously
registered via \fB::http::register\fR, returning a two-item list of
the default port and handler command that was previously installed
(via \fB::http::register\fR) if there was such a handler, and an error if
................................................................................
Once the data associated with the URL is no longer needed, the state
array should be unset to free up storage.
The \fB::http::cleanup\fR procedure is provided for that purpose.
The following elements of
the array are supported:
.RS
.TP
\fBbinary\fR
.
This is boolean \fBtrue\fR if (after decoding any compression specified
by the
.QW "Content-Encoding"
response header) the HTTP response is binary.  It is boolean \fBfalse\fR
if the HTTP response is text.
.TP
\fBbody\fR
.
The contents of the URL.  This will be empty if the \fB\-channel\fR
option has been specified.  This value is returned by the \fB::http::data\fR command.
.TP
\fBcharset\fR
.
................................................................................
.
A copy of the \fBContent-Type\fR meta-data value.
.TP
\fBurl\fR
.
The requested URL.
.RE
.SH "PERSISTENT CONNECTIONS"
.PP
.SS "BASICS"
.PP
See RFC 7230 Sec 6, which supersedes RFC 2616 Sec 8.1.
.PP
A persistent connection allows multiple HTTP/1.1 transactions to be
carried over the same TCP connection.  Pipelining allows a
client to make multiple requests over a persistent connection without
waiting for each response.  The server sends responses in the same order
that the requests were received.
.PP
If a POST request fails to complete, typically user confirmation is
needed before sending the request again.  The user may wish to verify
whether the server was modified by the failed POST request, before
sending the same request again.
.PP
A HTTP request will use a persistent socket if the call to
\fBhttp::geturl\fR has the option \fB-keepalive true\fR. It will use
pipelining where permitted if the \fBhttp::config\fR option
\fB-pipeline\fR is boolean \fBtrue\fR (its default value).
.PP
The http package maintains no more than one persistent connection to each
server (i.e. each value of
.QW "domain:port" ).
If \fBhttp::geturl\fR is called to make a request over a persistent
connection while the connection is busy with another request, the new
request will be held in a queue until the connection is free.
.PP
The http package does not support HTTP/1.0 persistent connections
controlled by the \fBKeep-Alive\fR header.
.SS "SPECIAL CASES"
.PP
This subsection discusses issues related to closure of the
persistent connection by the server, automatic retry of failed requests,
the special treatment necessary for POST requests, and the options for
dealing with these cases.
.PP
In accordance with RFC 7230, \fBhttp::geturl\fR does not pipeline
requests that use the POST method.  If a POST uses a persistent
connection and is not the first request on that connection,
\fBhttp::geturl\fR waits until it has received the response for the previous
request; or (if \fBhttp::config\fR option \fB-postfresh\fR is boolean \fBtrue\fR) it
uses a new connection for each POST.
.PP
If the server is processing a number of pipelined requests, and sends a
response header
.QW "\fBConnection: close\fR"
with one of the responses (other than the last), then subsequent responses
are unfulfilled. \fBhttp::geturl\fR will send the unfulfilled requests again
over a new connection.
.PP
A difficulty arises when a HTTP client sends a request over a persistent
connection that has been idle for a while.  The HTTP server may
half-close an apparently idle connection while the client is sending a
request, but before the request arrives at the server: in this case (an
.QW "asynchronous close event" )
the request will fail.  The difficulty arises because the client cannot
be certain whether the POST modified the state of the server.  For HEAD or
GET requests, \fBhttp::geturl\fR opens another connection and retransmits
the failed request. However, if the request was a POST, RFC 7230 forbids
automatic retry by default, suggesting either user confirmation, or
confirmation by user-agent software that has semantic understanding of
the application.  The \fBhttp::config\fR option \fB-repost\fR allows for
either possibility.
.PP
Asynchronous close events can occur only in a short interval of time.  The
\fBhttp\fR package monitors each persistent connection for closure by the
server.  Upon detection, the connection is also closed at the client end,
and subsequent requests will use a fresh connection.
.PP
If the \fBhttp::geturl\fR command is called with option \fB-keepalive true\fR,
then it will both try to use an existing persistent connection
(if one is available), and it will send the server a
.QW "\fBConnection: keep-alive\fR"
request header asking to keep the connection open for future requests.
.PP
The \fBhttp::config\fR options \fB-pipeline\fR, \fB-postfresh\fR, and
\fB-repost\fR relate to persistent connections.
.PP
Option \fB-pipeline\fR, if boolean \fBtrue\fR, will pipeline GET and HEAD requests
made
over a persistent connection.  POST requests will not be pipelined - if the
POST is not the first transaction on the connection, its request will not
be sent until the previous response has finished.  GET and HEAD requests
made after a POST will not be sent until the POST response has been
delivered, and will not be sent if the POST fails.
.PP
Option \fB-postfresh\fR, if boolean \fBtrue\fR, will override the \fBhttp::geturl\fR option
\fB-keepalive\fR, and always open a fresh connection for a POST request.
.PP
Option \fB-repost\fR, if \fBtrue\fR, permits automatic retry of a POST request
that fails because it uses a persistent connection that the server has
half-closed (an
.QW "asynchronous close event" ).
Subsequent GET and HEAD requests in a failed pipeline will also be retried.
\fIThe -repost option should be used only if the application understands
that the retry is appropriate\fR - specifically, the application must know
that if the failed POST successfully modified the state of the server, a repeat POST
would have no adverse effect.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
This example creates a procedure to copy a URL to a file while printing a
progress meter, and prints the meta-data associated with the URL.
.PP
.CS
proc httpcopy { url file {chunk 4096} } {

1 is added to \fIvarName\fR.
The new value is stored as a decimal string in variable \fIvarName\fR
and also returned as result.
.PP
Starting with the Tcl 8.5 release, the variable \fIvarName\fR passed
to \fBincr\fR may be unset, and in that case, it will be set to
the value \fIincrement\fR or to the default increment value of \fB1\fR.





.SH EXAMPLES
.PP
Add one to the contents of the variable \fIx\fR:
.PP
.CS
\fBincr\fR x
.CE
................................................................................
.CS
\fBincr\fR x 0
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
expr(n), set(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
add, increment, variable, value

1 is added to \fIvarName\fR.
The new value is stored as a decimal string in variable \fIvarName\fR
and also returned as result.
.PP
Starting with the Tcl 8.5 release, the variable \fIvarName\fR passed
to \fBincr\fR may be unset, and in that case, it will be set to
the value \fIincrement\fR or to the default increment value of \fB1\fR.
.VS TIP508
If \fIvarName\fR indicate an element that does not exist of an array that has
a default value set, the sum of the default value and the \fIincrement\fR (or
1) will be stored in the array element.
.VE TIP508
.SH EXAMPLES
.PP
Add one to the contents of the variable \fIx\fR:
.PP
.CS
\fBincr\fR x
.CE
................................................................................
.CS
\fBincr\fR x 0
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
expr(n), set(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
add, increment, variable, value
.\" Local variables:
.\" mode: nroff
.\" fill-column: 78
.\" End:

Returns information about the class, \fIclass\fR. The \fIsubcommand\fRs are
described in \fBCLASS INTROSPECTION\fR below.
.TP
\fBinfo cmdcount\fR
.
Returns a count of the total number of commands that have been invoked
in this interpreter.




































.TP
\fBinfo commands \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
.
If \fIpattern\fR is not specified,
returns a list of names of all the Tcl commands visible
(i.e. executable without using a qualified name) to the current namespace,
including both the built-in commands written in C and

Returns information about the class, \fIclass\fR. The \fIsubcommand\fRs are
described in \fBCLASS INTROSPECTION\fR below.
.TP
\fBinfo cmdcount\fR
.
Returns a count of the total number of commands that have been invoked
in this interpreter.
.TP
\fBinfo cmdtype \fIcommandName\fR
.VS TIP426
Returns a description of the kind of command named by \fIcommandName\fR.  The
supported types are:
.RS
.IP \fBalias\fR
Indicates that \fIcommandName\fR was created by \fBinterp alias\fR. Note that
safe interpreters can only see a subset of aliases (specifically those between
two commands within themselves).
.IP \fBcoroutine\fR
Indicates that \fIcommandName\fR was created by \fBcoroutine\fR.
.IP \fBensemble\fR
Indicates that \fIcommandName\fR was created by \fBnamespace ensemble\fR.
.IP \fBimport\fR
Indicates that \fIcommandName\fR was created by \fBnamespace import\fR.
.IP \fBnative\fR
Indicates that \fIcommandName\fR was created by the \fBTcl_CreateObjProc\fR
interface directly without further registration of the type of command.
.IP \fBobject\fR
Indicates that \fIcommandName\fR is the public command that represents an
instance of \fBoo::object\fR or one of its subclasses.
.IP \fBprivateObject\fR
Indicates that \fIcommandName\fR is the private command (\fBmy\fR by default)
that represents an instance of \fBoo::object\fR or one of its subclasses.
.IP \fBproc\fR
Indicates that \fIcommandName\fR was created by \fBproc\fR.
.IP \fBslave\fR
Indicates that \fIcommandName\fR was created by \fBinterp create\fR.
.IP \fBzlibStream\fR
Indicates that \fIcommandName\fR was created by \fBzlib stream\fR.
.PP
There may be other registered types as well; this is a set that is extensible
at the implementation level with \fBTcl_RegisterCommandTypeName\fR.
.RE
.VE TIP426
.TP
\fBinfo commands \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
.
If \fIpattern\fR is not specified,
returns a list of names of all the Tcl commands visible
(i.e. executable without using a qualified name) to the current namespace,
including both the built-in commands written in C and

execution of all commands.
.PP
Note that once it is on, this flag cannot be switched back off: such
attempts are silently ignored. This is needed to maintain the
consistency of the underlying interpreter's state.
.RE
.TP
\fBinterp\fR \fBdelete \fR?\fIpath ...?\fR
.
Deletes zero or more interpreters given by the optional \fIpath\fR
arguments, and for each interpreter, it also deletes its slaves. The
command also deletes the slave command for each interpreter deleted.
For each \fIpath\fR argument, if no interpreter by that name
exists, the command raises an error.
.TP

execution of all commands.
.PP
Note that once it is on, this flag cannot be switched back off: such
attempts are silently ignored. This is needed to maintain the
consistency of the underlying interpreter's state.
.RE
.TP
\fBinterp\fR \fBdelete \fR?\fIpath ...\fR?
.
Deletes zero or more interpreters given by the optional \fIpath\fR
arguments, and for each interpreter, it also deletes its slaves. The
command also deletes the slave command for each interpreter deleted.
For each \fIpath\fR argument, if no interpreter by that name
exists, the command raises an error.
.TP

\fBjoin\fR $data
     \fB\(-> 1 2 3 4 5 {6 7} 8\fR
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
list(n), lappend(n), split(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
element, join, list, separator

\fBjoin\fR $data
     \fB\(-> 1 2 3 4 5 {6 7} 8\fR
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
list(n), lappend(n), split(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
element, join, list, separator
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
This command treats the variable given by \fIvarName\fR as a list
and appends each of the \fIvalue\fR arguments to that list as a separate
element, with spaces between elements.
If \fIvarName\fR does not exist, it is created as a list with elements
given by the \fIvalue\fR arguments.






\fBLappend\fR is similar to \fBappend\fR except that the \fIvalue\fRs
are appended as list elements rather than raw text.
This command provides a relatively efficient way to build up
large lists.  For example,
.QW "\fBlappend a $b\fR"
is much more efficient than
.QW "\fBset a [concat $a [list $b]]\fR"
................................................................................
1 2 3 4 5
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
list(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lset(n),
lsort(n), lrange(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
append, element, list, variable

.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
This command treats the variable given by \fIvarName\fR as a list
and appends each of the \fIvalue\fR arguments to that list as a separate
element, with spaces between elements.
If \fIvarName\fR does not exist, it is created as a list with elements
given by the \fIvalue\fR arguments.
.VS TIP508
If \fIvarName\fR indicate an element that does not exist of an array that has
a default value set, list that is comprised of the default value with all the
\fIvalue\fR arguments appended as elements will be stored in the array
element.
.VE TIP508
\fBLappend\fR is similar to \fBappend\fR except that the \fIvalue\fRs
are appended as list elements rather than raw text.
This command provides a relatively efficient way to build up
large lists.  For example,
.QW "\fBlappend a $b\fR"
is much more efficient than
.QW "\fBset a [concat $a [list $b]]\fR"
................................................................................
1 2 3 4 5
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
list(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lset(n),
lsort(n), lrange(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
append, element, list, variable
.\" Local variables:
.\" mode: nroff
.\" fill-column: 78
.\" End:

.TH lindex n 8.4 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
lindex \- Retrieve an element from a list
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBlindex \fIlist ?index ...?\fR
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBlindex\fR command accepts a parameter, \fIlist\fR, which
it treats as a Tcl list. It also accepts zero or more \fIindices\fR into
the list.  The indices may be presented either consecutively on the
command line, or grouped in a

.TH lindex n 8.4 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
lindex \- Retrieve an element from a list
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBlindex \fIlist\fR ?\fIindex ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBlindex\fR command accepts a parameter, \fIlist\fR, which
it treats as a Tcl list. It also accepts zero or more \fIindices\fR into
the list.  The indices may be presented either consecutively on the
command line, or grouped in a

'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2011-2015 Andreas Kupries
'\" Copyright (c) 2018 Donal K. Fellows
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH link n 0.3 TclOO "TclOO Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
link \- create link from command to method of object
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
package require TclOO

\fBlink\fR \fImethodName\fR ?\fI...\fR?
\fBlink\fR \fB{\fIcommandName methodName\fB}\fR ?\fI...\fR?
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
The \fBlink\fR command is available within methods. It takes a series of one
or more method names (\fImethodName ...\fR) and/or pairs of command- and
method-name (\fB{\fIcommandName methodName\fB}\fR) and makes the named methods
available as commands without requiring the explicit use of the name of the
object or the \fBmy\fR command. The method does not need to exist at the time
that the link is made; if the link command is invoked when the method does not
exist, the standard \fBunknown\fR method handling system is used.
.PP
The command name under which the method becomes available defaults to the
method name, except where explicitly specified through an alias/method pair.
Formally, every argument must be a list; if the list has two elements, the
first element is the name of the command to create and the second element is
the name of the method of the current object to which the command links;
otherwise, the name of the command and the name of the method are the same
string (the first element of the list).
.PP
If the name of the command is not a fully-qualified command name, it will be
resolved with respect to the current namespace (i.e., the object namespace).
.SH EXAMPLES
This demonstrates linking a single method in various ways. First it makes a
simple link, then a renamed link, then an external link. Note that the method
itself is unexported, but that it can still be called directly from outside
the class.
.PP
.CS
oo::class create ABC {
    method Foo {} {
        puts "This is Foo in [self]"
    }

    constructor {} {
        \fBlink\fR Foo
        # The method foo is now directly accessible as foo here
        \fBlink\fR {bar Foo}
        # The method foo is now directly accessible as bar
        \fBlink\fR {::ExternalCall Foo}
        # The method foo is now directly accessible in the global
        # namespace as ExternalCall
    }

    method grill {} {
        puts "Step 1:"
        Foo
        puts "Step 2:"
        bar
    }
}

ABC create abc
abc grill
        \fI\(-> Step 1:\fR
        \fI\(-> This is foo in ::abc\fR
        \fI\(-> Step 2:\fR
        \fI\(-> This is foo in ::abc\fR
# Direct access via the linked command
puts "Step 3:"; ExternalCall
        \fI\(-> Step 3:\fR
        \fI\(-> This is foo in ::abc\fR
.CE
.PP
This example shows that multiple linked commands can be made in a call to
\fBlink\fR, and that they can handle arguments.
.PP
.CS
oo::class create Ex {
    constructor {} {
        \fBlink\fR a b c
        # The methods a, b, and c (defined below) are all now
        # directly acessible within methods under their own names.
    }

    method a {} {
        puts "This is a"
    }
    method b {x} {
        puts "This is b($x)"
    }
    method c {y z} {
        puts "This is c($y,$z)"
    }

    method call {p q r} {
        a
        b $p
        c $q $r
    }
}

set o [Ex new]
$o 3 5 7
        \fI\(-> This is a\fR
        \fI\(-> This is b(3)\fR
        \fI\(-> This is c(5,7)\fR
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
interp(n), my(n), oo::class(n), oo::define(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
command, method, object
.\" Local Variables:
.\" mode: nroff
.\" fill-column: 78
.\" End:

1,0
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
list(n), lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), lsearch(n),
lset(n), lsort(n), lrange(n), lreplace(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
element, list, length

1,0
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
list(n), lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), lsearch(n),
lset(n), lsort(n), lrange(n), lreplace(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
element, list, length
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
list(n), lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lsearch(n),
lset(n), lreplace(n), lsort(n),
string(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
element, list, range, sublist

.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
list(n), lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lsearch(n),
lset(n), lreplace(n), lsort(n),
string(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
element, list, range, sublist
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

\fBlrepeat\fR 3 a b c
      \fI\(-> a b c a b c a b c\fR
\fBlrepeat\fR 3 [\fBlrepeat\fR 2 a] b c
      \fI\(-> {a a} b c {a a} b c {a a} b c\fR
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
list(n), lappend(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lset(n)

.SH KEYWORDS
element, index, list

\fBlrepeat\fR 3 a b c
      \fI\(-> a b c a b c a b c\fR
\fBlrepeat\fR 3 [\fBlrepeat\fR 2 a] b c
      \fI\(-> {a a} b c {a a} b c {a a} b c\fR
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
list(n), lappend(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lset(n)

.SH KEYWORDS
element, index, list
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

.SH NAME
lreplace \- Replace elements in a list with new elements
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBlreplace \fIlist first last \fR?\fIelement element ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBlreplace\fR returns a new list formed by replacing one or more elements of
\fIlist\fR with the \fIelement\fR arguments.
\fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are index values specifying the first and
last elements of the range to replace.
The index values \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are interpreted
the same as index values for the command \fBstring index\fR,
supporting simple index arithmetic and indices relative to the
end of the list.
0 refers to the first element of the
list, and \fBend\fR refers to the last element of the list.
If \fIlist\fR is empty, then \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are ignored.
.PP

If \fIfirst\fR is less than zero, it is considered to refer to before the
first element of the list.  For non-empty lists, the element indicated
by \fIfirst\fR must exist or \fIfirst\fR must indicate before the
start of the list.




.PP
If \fIlast\fR is less than \fIfirst\fR, then any specified elements
will be inserted into the list before the point specified by \fIfirst\fR
with no elements being deleted.
.PP
The \fIelement\fR arguments specify zero or more new arguments to
be added to the list in place of those that were deleted.
Each \fIelement\fR argument will become a separate element of
the list.  If no \fIelement\fR arguments are specified, then the elements
between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are simply deleted.  If \fIlist\fR
is empty, any \fIelement\fR arguments are added to the end of the list.
.SH EXAMPLES
.PP
Replacing an element of a list with another:
.PP
.CS
% \fBlreplace\fR {a b c d e} 1 1 foo
a foo c d e
................................................................................
.CS
proc lremove {listVariable value} {
    upvar 1 $listVariable var
    set idx [lsearch -exact $var $value]
    set var [\fBlreplace\fR $var $idx $idx]
}
.CE













.SH "SEE ALSO"
list(n), lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lsearch(n),
lset(n), lrange(n), lsort(n),
string(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
element, list, replace

.SH NAME
lreplace \- Replace elements in a list with new elements
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBlreplace \fIlist first last \fR?\fIelement element ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
\fBlreplace\fR returns a new list formed by replacing zero or more elements of
\fIlist\fR with the \fIelement\fR arguments.
\fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are index values specifying the first and
last elements of the range to replace.
The index values \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are interpreted
the same as index values for the command \fBstring index\fR,
supporting simple index arithmetic and indices relative to the
end of the list.
0 refers to the first element of the
list, and \fBend\fR refers to the last element of the list.

.PP
If either \fIfirst\fR or \fIlast\fR is less than zero, it is considered
to refer to before the first element of the list. This allows \fBlreplace\fR
to prepend elements to \fIlist\fR.
.VS TIP505
If either \fIfirst\fR or \fIlast\fR indicates a position greater than the
index of the last element of the list, it is treated as if it is an
index one greater than the last element. This allows \fBlreplace\fR to
append elements to \fIlist\fR.
.VE TIP505
.PP
If \fIlast\fR is less than \fIfirst\fR, then any specified elements
will be inserted into the list before the element specified by \fIfirst\fR
with no elements being deleted.
.PP
The \fIelement\fR arguments specify zero or more new elements to
be added to the list in place of those that were deleted.
Each \fIelement\fR argument will become a separate element of
the list.  If no \fIelement\fR arguments are specified, then the elements
between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are simply deleted.

.SH EXAMPLES
.PP
Replacing an element of a list with another:
.PP
.CS
% \fBlreplace\fR {a b c d e} 1 1 foo
a foo c d e
................................................................................
.CS
proc lremove {listVariable value} {
    upvar 1 $listVariable var
    set idx [lsearch -exact $var $value]
    set var [\fBlreplace\fR $var $idx $idx]
}
.CE
.PP
.VS TIP505
Appending elements to the list; note that \fBend+2\fR will initially
be treated as if it is \fB6\fR here, but both that and \fB12345\fR are greater
than the index of the final item so they behave identically:
.PP
.CS
% set var {a b c d e}
a b c d e
% set var [\fBlreplace\fR $var 12345 end+2 f g h i]
a b c d e f g h i
.CE
.VE TIP505
.SH "SEE ALSO"
list(n), lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lsearch(n),
lset(n), lrange(n), lsort(n),
string(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
element, list, replace
.\" Local variables:
.\" mode: nroff
.\" fill-column: 78
.\" End:

'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH my n 0.1 TclOO "TclOO Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
my \- invoke any method of current object
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
package require TclOO

\fBmy\fI methodName\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?

.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBmy\fR command is used to allow methods of objects to invoke methods





of the object (or its class). In particular, the set of valid values for
\fImethodName\fR is the set of all methods supported by an object and its
superclasses, including those that are not exported
.VS TIP500
and private methods of the object or class when used within another method
defined by that object or class.
.VE TIP500

The object upon which the method is invoked is the one that owns the namespace
that the \fBmy\fR command is contained in initially (\fBNB:\fR the link
remains if the command is renamed), which is the currently invoked object by
default.







.PP
Each object has its own \fBmy\fR command, contained in its instance namespace.

.SH EXAMPLES
.PP
This example shows basic use of \fBmy\fR to use the \fBvariables\fR method of
the \fBoo::object\fR class, which is not publicly visible by default:
.PP
.CS
oo::class create c {
................................................................................
o count              \fI\(-> prints "1"\fR
o count              \fI\(-> prints "2"\fR
o count              \fI\(-> prints "3"\fR
.CE
.PP
This example shows how you can use \fBmy\fR to make callbacks to private
methods from outside the object (from a \fBtrace\fR), using
\fBnamespace code\fR to enter the correct context:

.PP
.CS
oo::class create HasCallback {
    method makeCallback {} {
        return [namespace code {
            \fBmy\fR Callback
        }]
................................................................................
    }
}

set o [HasCallback new]
trace add variable xyz write [$o makeCallback]
set xyz "called"     \fI\(-> prints "callback: xyz {} write"\fR
.CE
































.SH "SEE ALSO"
next(n), oo::object(n), self(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
method, method visibility, object, private method, public method
.\" Local variables:
.\" mode: nroff
.\" fill-column: 78
.\" End:

'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH my n 0.1 TclOO "TclOO Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
my, myclass \- invoke any method of current object or its class
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
package require TclOO

\fBmy\fI methodName\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
\fBmyclass\fI methodName\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBmy\fR command is used to allow methods of objects to invoke methods
of the object (or its class),
.VS TIP478
and he \fBmyclass\fR command is used to allow methods of objects to invoke
methods of the current class of the object \fIas an object\fR.
.VE TIP478
In particular, the set of valid values for
\fImethodName\fR is the set of all methods supported by an object and its
superclasses, including those that are not exported
.VS TIP500
and private methods of the object or class when used within another method
defined by that object or class.
.VE TIP500
.PP
The object upon which the method is invoked via \fBmy\fR is the one that owns
the namespace that the \fBmy\fR command is contained in initially (\fBNB:\fR the link
remains if the command is renamed), which is the currently invoked object by
default.
.VS TIP478
Similarly, the object on which the method is invoked via \fBmyclass\fR is the
object that is the current class of the object that owns the namespace that
the \fBmyclass\fR command is contained in initially. As with \fBmy\fR, the
link remains even if the command is renamed into another namespace, and
defaults to being the manufacturing class of the current object.
.VE TIP478
.PP
Each object has its own \fBmy\fR and \fBmyclass\fR commands, contained in its
instance namespace.
.SH EXAMPLES
.PP
This example shows basic use of \fBmy\fR to use the \fBvariables\fR method of
the \fBoo::object\fR class, which is not publicly visible by default:
.PP
.CS
oo::class create c {
................................................................................
o count              \fI\(-> prints "1"\fR
o count              \fI\(-> prints "2"\fR
o count              \fI\(-> prints "3"\fR
.CE
.PP
This example shows how you can use \fBmy\fR to make callbacks to private
methods from outside the object (from a \fBtrace\fR), using
\fBnamespace code\fR to enter the correct context. (See the \fBcallback\fR
command for the recommended way of doing this.)
.PP
.CS
oo::class create HasCallback {
    method makeCallback {} {
        return [namespace code {
            \fBmy\fR Callback
        }]
................................................................................
    }
}

set o [HasCallback new]
trace add variable xyz write [$o makeCallback]
set xyz "called"     \fI\(-> prints "callback: xyz {} write"\fR
.CE
.PP
.VS TIP478
This example shows how to access a private method of a class from an instance
of that class. (See the \fBclassmethod\fR declaration in \fBoo::define\fR for
a higher level interface for doing this.)
.PP
.CS
oo::class create CountedSteps {
    self {
        variable count
        method Count {} {
            return [incr count]
        }
    }
    method advanceTwice {} {
        puts "in [self] step A: [\fBmyclass\fR Count]"
        puts "in [self] step B: [\fBmyclass\fR Count]"
    }
}

CountedSteps create x
CountedSteps create y
x advanceTwice       \fI\(-> prints "in ::x step A: 1"\fR
                     \fI\(-> prints "in ::x step B: 2"\fR
y advanceTwice       \fI\(-> prints "in ::y step A: 3"\fR
                     \fI\(-> prints "in ::y step B: 4"\fR
x advanceTwice       \fI\(-> prints "in ::x step A: 5"\fR
                     \fI\(-> prints "in ::x step B: 6"\fR
y advanceTwice       \fI\(-> prints "in ::y step A: 7"\fR
                     \fI\(-> prints "in ::y step B: 8"\fR
.CE
.VE TIP478
.SH "SEE ALSO"
next(n), oo::object(n), self(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
method, method visibility, object, private method, public method
.\" Local variables:
.\" mode: nroff
.\" fill-column: 78
.\" End:

specified.
.PP
At least one \fB\-load\fR or \fB\-source\fR parameter must be given.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
package(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
auto-load, index, package, version

specified.
.PP
At least one \fB\-load\fR or \fB\-source\fR parameter must be given.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
package(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
auto-load, index, package, version
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

puts [string repeat - 70]
puts [read $pipeline]
close $pipeline
.CE

.SH "SEE ALSO"
exec(n), open(n)

.SH KEYWORDS
file, pipeline, process identifier

puts [string repeat - 70]
puts [read $pipeline]
close $pipeline
.CE

.SH "SEE ALSO"
exec(n), open(n)

.SH KEYWORDS
file, pipeline, process identifier
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
platform \- System identification support code and utilities
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBpackage require platform ?1.0.10?\fR
.sp
\fBplatform::generic\fR
\fBplatform::identify\fR
\fBplatform::patterns \fIidentifier\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION

.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
platform \- System identification support code and utilities
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBpackage require platform\fR ?\fB1.0.10\fR?
.sp
\fBplatform::generic\fR
\fBplatform::identify\fR
\fBplatform::patterns \fIidentifier\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION

.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
platform::shell \- System identification support code and utilities
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBpackage require platform::shell ?1.1.4?\fR
.sp
\fBplatform::shell::generic \fIshell\fR
\fBplatform::shell::identify \fIshell\fR
\fBplatform::shell::platform \fIshell\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
................................................................................
for the specified Tcl shell, in contrast to the running shell.
.TP
\fBplatform::shell::platform \fIshell\fR
This command returns the contents of \fBtcl_platform(platform)\fR for
the specified Tcl shell.
.SH KEYWORDS
operating system, cpu architecture, platform, architecture

.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
platform::shell \- System identification support code and utilities
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBpackage require platform::shell\fR ?\fB1.1.4\fR?
.sp
\fBplatform::shell::generic \fIshell\fR
\fBplatform::shell::identify \fIshell\fR
\fBplatform::shell::platform \fIshell\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
................................................................................
for the specified Tcl shell, in contrast to the running shell.
.TP
\fBplatform::shell::platform \fIshell\fR
This command returns the contents of \fBtcl_platform(platform)\fR for
the specified Tcl shell.
.SH KEYWORDS
operating system, cpu architecture, platform, architecture
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tcl::prefix \- facilities for prefix matching
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB::tcl::prefix all\fR \fItable\fR \fIstring\fR
\fB::tcl::prefix longest\fR \fItable\fR \fIstring\fR
\fB::tcl::prefix match\fR \fI?option ...?\fR \fItable\fR \fIstring\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
This document describes commands looking up a prefix in a list of strings.
The following commands are supported:
.TP
\fB::tcl::prefix all\fR \fItable\fR \fIstring\fR
.
Returns a list of all elements in \fItable\fR that begin with the prefix
\fIstring\fR.
.TP
\fB::tcl::prefix longest\fR \fItable\fR \fIstring\fR
.
Returns the longest common prefix of all elements in \fItable\fR that
begin with the prefix \fIstring\fR.
.TP
\fB::tcl::prefix match\fR ?\fIoptions\fR? \fItable\fR \fIstring\fR
.
If \fIstring\fR equals one element in \fItable\fR or is a prefix to exactly
one element, the matched element is returned. If not, the result depends
on the \fB\-error\fR option. (It is recommended that the \fItable\fR be sorted
before use with this subcommand, so that the list of matches presented in the
error message also becomes sorted, though this is not strictly necessary for
the operation of this subcommand itself.)

.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tcl::prefix \- facilities for prefix matching
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fB::tcl::prefix all\fR \fItable string\fR
\fB::tcl::prefix longest\fR \fItable string\fR
\fB::tcl::prefix match\fR ?\fIoption ...\fR? \fItable string\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
This document describes commands looking up a prefix in a list of strings.
The following commands are supported:
.TP
\fB::tcl::prefix all\fR \fItable string\fR
.
Returns a list of all elements in \fItable\fR that begin with the prefix
\fIstring\fR.
.TP
\fB::tcl::prefix longest\fR \fItable string\fR
.
Returns the longest common prefix of all elements in \fItable\fR that
begin with the prefix \fIstring\fR.
.TP
\fB::tcl::prefix match\fR ?\fIoptions\fR? \fItable string\fR
.
If \fIstring\fR equals one element in \fItable\fR or is a prefix to exactly
one element, the matched element is returned. If not, the result depends
on the \fB\-error\fR option. (It is recommended that the \fItable\fR be sorted
before use with this subcommand, so that the list of matches presented in the
error message also becomes sorted, though this is not strictly necessary for
the operation of this subcommand itself.)

tcl::process \- Subprocess management
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fB::tcl::process \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
This command provides a way to manage subprocesses created by the \fBopen\fR

and \fBexec\fR commands. The legal \fIoptions\fR (which may be abbreviated) are:
.TP










\fB::tcl::process list\fR
.
Returns the list of subprocess PIDs.









.TP
\fB::tcl::process status\fR ?\fIswitches\fR? ?\fIpids\fR?
.
Returns a dictionary mapping subprocess PIDs to their respective status. If 
\fIpids\fR is specified as a list of PIDs then the command only returns the 
status of the matching subprocesses if they exist, and raises an error 
otherwise. For active processes, the status is an empty value. For terminated
processes, the status is a list with the following format: 
.QW "{code ?\fImsg errorCode\fR?}" ,
where:
.RS
.TP
\fBcode\fR\0
.
is a standard Tcl return code,

.TP
\fBmsg\fR\0
.
is the human-readable error message,
.TP
\fBerrorCode\fR\0
.
uses the same format as the \fBerrorCode\fR global variable
.RE
Note that \fBmsg\fR and \fBerrorCode\fR are only present for abnormally 
terminated processes (i.e. those where \fBcode\fR is nonzero). Under the hood
this command calls \fBTcl_WaitPid\fR with the \fBWNOHANG\fR flag set for
non-blocking behavior, unless the \fB\-wait\fR switch is set (see below).
.RS
.PP
Additionally, \fB::tcl::process status\fR accepts the following switches:
.TP
\fB\-wait\fR\0
.
By default the command returns immediately (the underlying \fBTcl_WaitPid\fR is
called with the \fBWNOHANG\fR flag set) unless this switch is set. If \fBpids\fR
is specified as a list of PIDs then the command waits until the status of the
matching subprocesses are available. If \fBpids\fR is not specified then it
waits for all known subprocesses.
.TP
\fB\-\|\-\fR
.
Marks the end of switches.  The argument following this one will
be treated as the first \fIarg\fR even if it starts with a \fB\-\fR.
.RE
.TP
\fB::tcl::process purge ?\fIpids\fR?
.
Cleans up all data associated with terminated subprocesses. If \fBpids\fR is
specified as a list of PIDs then the command only cleanup data for the matching
subprocesses if they exist, and raises an error otherwise. If the process is
still active then it does nothing.
.TP
\fB::tcl::process autopurge ?\fIflag\fR?
.
Automatic purge facility. If \fBflag\fR is specified as a boolean value then it
activates or deactivate autopurge. In all cases it returns the current status as
a boolean value. When autopurge is active, \fBTcl_ReapDetachedProcs\fR is called
each time the exec command is executed or a pipe channel created by open is
closed. When autopurge is inactive, \fB::tcl::process\fR purge must be called
explicitly. By default autopurge is active.
.RE
.SH "EXAMPLES"
.PP



.CS
\fB::tcl::process autopurge\fR
     \fI\(-> true\fR
\fB::tcl::process autopurge\fR false
     \fI\(-> false\fR

set pid1 [exec command1 a b c | command2 d e f &]
................................................................................
set pid2 [pid $chan]
     \fI\(-> 789 1011\fR

\fB::tcl::process list\fR
     \fI\(-> 123 456 789 1011\fR

\fB::tcl::process status\fR


     \fI\(-> 123 0 456 {1 "child killed: write on pipe with no readers" {CHILDKILLED 456 SIGPIPE "write on pipe with no readers"}} 789 {1 "child suspended: background tty read" {CHILDSUSP 789 SIGTTIN "background tty read"}} 1011 {}\fR




\fB::tcl::process status\fR 123
     \fI\(-> 123 0\fR

\fB::tcl::process status\fR 1011
     \fI\(-> 1011 {}\fR

\fB::tcl::process status\fR -wait


     \fI\(-> 123 0 456 {1 "child killed: write on pipe with no readers" {CHILDKILLED 456 SIGPIPE "write on pipe with no readers"}} 789 {1 "child suspended: background tty read" {CHILDSUSP 789 SIGTTIN "background tty read"}} 1011 {1 "child process exited abnormally" {CHILDSTATUS 1011 -1}}\fR





\fB::tcl::process status\fR 1011
     \fI\(-> 1011 {1 "child process exited abnormally" {CHILDSTATUS 1011 -1}}\fR


\fB::tcl::process purge\fR
exec command1 1 2 3 &
     \fI\(-> 1213\fR
\fB::tcl::process list\fR
     \fI\(-> 1213\fR
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"

exec(n), open(n), Tcl_DetachPids(3), Tcl_WaitPid(3), Tcl_ReapDetachedProcs(3)
.SH "KEYWORDS"
background, child, detach, process, wait
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

tcl::process \- Subprocess management
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fB::tcl::process \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
This command provides a way to manage subprocesses created by the \fBopen\fR
and \fBexec\fR commands, as identified by the process identifiers (PIDs) of
those subprocesses. The legal \fIoptions\fR (which may be abbreviated) are:
.TP
\fB::tcl::process autopurge\fR ?\fIflag\fR?
.
Automatic purge facility. If \fIflag\fR is specified as a boolean value then
it activates or deactivate autopurge. In all cases it returns the current
status as a boolean value. When autopurge is active,
\fBTcl_ReapDetachedProcs\fR is called each time the \fBexec\fR command is
executed or a pipe channel created by \fBopen\fR is closed. When autopurge is
inactive, \fB::tcl::process\fR purge must be called explicitly. By default
autopurge is active.
.TP
\fB::tcl::process list\fR
.
Returns the list of subprocess PIDs. This includes all currently executing
subprocesses and all terminated subprocesses that have not yet had their
corresponding process table entries purged.
.TP
\fB::tcl::process purge\fR ?\fIpids\fR?
.
Cleans up all data associated with terminated subprocesses. If \fIpids\fR is
specified as a list of PIDs then the command only cleanup data for the matching
subprocesses if they exist, and raises an error otherwise. If a process listed is
still active, this command does nothing to that process.
.TP
\fB::tcl::process status\fR ?\fIswitches\fR? ?\fIpids\fR?
.
Returns a dictionary mapping subprocess PIDs to their respective status. If
\fIpids\fR is specified as a list of PIDs then the command only returns the
status of the matching subprocesses if they exist, and raises an error
otherwise. For active processes, the status is an empty value. For terminated
processes, the status is a list with the following format:
.QW "\fB{\fIcode\fR ?\fImsg errorCode\fR?\fB}\fR" ,
where:
.RS
.TP
\fIcode\fR\0
.
is a standard Tcl return code, i.e., \fB0\fR for TCL_OK and \fB1\fR
for TCL_ERROR,
.TP
\fImsg\fR\0
.
is the human-readable error message,
.TP
\fIerrorCode\fR\0
.
uses the same format as the \fBerrorCode\fR global variable
.PP
Note that \fBmsg\fR and \fBerrorCode\fR are only present for abnormally
terminated processes (i.e. those where the \fIcode\fR is nonzero). Under the
hood this command calls \fBTcl_WaitPid\fR with the \fBWNOHANG\fR flag set for
non-blocking behavior, unless the \fB\-wait\fR switch is set (see below).

.PP
Additionally, \fB::tcl::process status\fR accepts the following switches:
.TP
\fB\-wait\fR\0
.
By default the command returns immediately (the underlying \fBTcl_WaitPid\fR is
called with the \fBWNOHANG\fR flag set) unless this switch is set. If \fIpids\fR
is specified as a list of PIDs then the command waits until the status of the
matching subprocesses are available. If \fIpids\fR was not specified, this
command will wait for all known subprocesses.
.TP
\fB\-\|\-\fR
.
Marks the end of switches.  The argument following this one will
be treated as the first \fIarg\fR even if it starts with a \fB\-\fR.
.RE

















.SH "EXAMPLES"
.PP
These show the use of \fB::tcl::process\fR. Some of the results from
\fB::tcl::process status\fR are split over multiple lines for readability.
.PP
.CS
\fB::tcl::process autopurge\fR
     \fI\(-> true\fR
\fB::tcl::process autopurge\fR false
     \fI\(-> false\fR

set pid1 [exec command1 a b c | command2 d e f &]
................................................................................
set pid2 [pid $chan]
     \fI\(-> 789 1011\fR

\fB::tcl::process list\fR
     \fI\(-> 123 456 789 1011\fR

\fB::tcl::process status\fR
     \fI\(-> 123 0
       456 {1 "child killed: write on pipe with no readers" {
         CHILDKILLED 456 SIGPIPE "write on pipe with no readers"}}
       789 {1 "child suspended: background tty read" {
         CHILDSUSP 789 SIGTTIN "background tty read"}}
       1011 {}\fR

\fB::tcl::process status\fR 123
     \fI\(-> 123 0\fR

\fB::tcl::process status\fR 1011
     \fI\(-> 1011 {}\fR

\fB::tcl::process status\fR -wait
     \fI\(-> 123 0
       456 {1 "child killed: write on pipe with no readers" {
         CHILDKILLED 456 SIGPIPE "write on pipe with no readers"}}
       789 {1 "child suspended: background tty read" {
         CHILDSUSP 789 SIGTTIN "background tty read"}}
       1011 {1 "child process exited abnormally" {
         CHILDSTATUS 1011 -1}}\fR

\fB::tcl::process status\fR 1011
     \fI\(-> 1011 {1 "child process exited abnormally" {
         CHILDSTATUS 1011 -1}}\fR

\fB::tcl::process purge\fR
exec command1 1 2 3 &
     \fI\(-> 1213\fR
\fB::tcl::process list\fR
     \fI\(-> 1213\fR
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
exec(n), open(n), pid(n),
Tcl_DetachPids(3), Tcl_WaitPid(3), Tcl_ReapDetachedProcs(3)
.SH "KEYWORDS"
background, child, detach, process, wait
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

\fBputs\fR $chan "$timestamp - Hello, World!"
close $chan
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
file(n), fileevent(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
.SH KEYWORDS
channel, newline, output, write

\fBputs\fR $chan "$timestamp - Hello, World!"
close $chan
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
file(n), fileevent(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
.SH KEYWORDS
channel, newline, output, write
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

exec tar -xf $tarFile
cd $savedDir
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
file(n), cd(n), glob(n), filename(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
working directory

exec tar -xf $tarFile
cd $savedDir
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
file(n), cd(n), glob(n), filename(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
working directory
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

    uplevel 1 ::theRealSource $args
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
namespace(n), proc(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
command, delete, namespace, rename

    uplevel 1 ::theRealSource $args
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
namespace(n), proc(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
command, delete, namespace, rename
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

\fBset\fR vbl in[expr {rand() >= 0.5}]
\fBset\fR out [\fBset\fR $vbl]
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
expr(n), global(n), namespace(n), proc(n), trace(n), unset(n), upvar(n), variable(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
read, write, variable

\fBset\fR vbl in[expr {rand() >= 0.5}]
\fBset\fR out [\fBset\fR $vbl]
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
expr(n), global(n), namespace(n), proc(n), trace(n), unset(n), upvar(n), variable(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
read, write, variable
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2018 Donal K. Fellows
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH singleton n 0.3 TclOO "TclOO Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
oo::singleton \- a class that does only allows one instance of itself
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
package require TclOO

\fBoo::singleton\fI method \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.fi
.SH "CLASS HIERARCHY"
.nf
\fBoo::object\fR
   \(-> \fBoo::class\fR
       \(-> \fBoo::singleton\fR
.fi
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
Singleton classes are classes that only permit at most one instance of
themselves to exist. They unexport the \fBcreate\fR and
\fBcreateWithNamespace\fR methods entirely, and override the \fBnew\fR method
so that it only makes a new instance if there is no existing instance.  It is
not recommended to inherit from a singleton class; singleton-ness is \fInot\fR
inherited. It is not recommended that a singleton class's constructor take any
arguments.
.PP
Instances have their\fB destroy\fR method overridden with a method that always
returns an error in order to discourage destruction of the object, but
destruction remains possible if strictly necessary (e.g., by destroying the
class or using \fBrename\fR to delete it). They also have a (non-exported)
\fB<cloned>\fR method defined on them that similarly always returns errors to
make attempts to use the singleton instance with \fBoo::copy\fR fail.
.SS CONSTRUCTOR
The \fBoo::singleton\fR class does not define an explicit constructor; this
means that it is effectively the same as the constructor of the
\fBoo::class\fR class.
.SS DESTRUCTOR
The \fBoo::singleton\fR class does not define an explicit destructor;
destroying an instance of it is just like destroying an ordinary class (and
will destroy the singleton object).
.SS "EXPORTED METHODS"
.TP
\fIcls \fBnew \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.
This returns the current instance of the singleton class, if one exists, and
creates a new instance only if there is no existing instance. The additional
arguments, \fIarg ...\fR, are only used if a new instance is actually
manufactured; that construction is via the \fBoo::class\fR class's \fBnew\fR
method.
.RS
.PP
This is an override of the behaviour of a superclass's method with an
identical call signature to the superclass's implementation.
.RE
.SS "NON-EXPORTED METHODS"
The \fBoo::singleton\fR class explicitly states that \fBcreate\fR and
\fBcreateWithNamespace\fR are unexported; callers should not assume that they
have control over either the name or the namespace name of the singleton instance.
.SH EXAMPLE
.PP
This example demonstrates that there is only one instance even though the
\fBnew\fR method is called three times.
.PP
.CS
\fBoo::singleton\fR create Highlander {
    method say {} {
        puts "there can be only one"
    }
}

set h1 [Highlander new]
set h2 [Highlander new]
if {$h1 eq $h2} {
    puts "equal objects"    \fI\(-> prints "equal objects"\fR
}
set h3 [Highlander new]
if {$h1 eq $h3} {
    puts "equal objects"    \fI\(-> prints "equal objects"\fR
}
.CE
.PP
Note that the name of the instance of the singleton is not guaranteed to be
anything in particular.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
oo::class(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
class, metaclass, object, single instance
.\" Local variables:
.\" mode: nroff
.\" fill-column: 78
.\" End:

    \fBsource\fR $scriptFile
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
file(n), cd(n), encoding(n), info(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
file, script

    \fBsource\fR $scriptFile
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
file(n), cd(n), encoding(n), info(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
file, script
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

.TH string n 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
.\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
string \- Manipulate strings
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBstring \fIoption arg \fR?\fIarg ...?\fR
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
Performs one of several string operations, depending on \fIoption\fR.
The legal \fIoption\fRs (which may be abbreviated) are:
.TP
\fBstring cat\fR ?\fIstring1\fR? ?\fIstring2...\fR?

.TH string n 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
.\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
string \- Manipulate strings
.SH SYNOPSIS
\fBstring \fIoption arg \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
Performs one of several string operations, depending on \fIoption\fR.
The legal \fIoption\fRs (which may be abbreviated) are:
.TP
\fBstring cat\fR ?\fIstring1\fR? ?\fIstring2...\fR?

The variable \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is used in a similar way when
a newline is typed but the current command is not yet complete;
if \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is not set then no prompt is output for
incomplete commands.
.SH "STANDARD CHANNELS"
.PP
See \fBTcl_StandardChannels\fR for more explanations.









.SH "SEE ALSO"
auto_path(n), encoding(n), env(n), fconfigure(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
application, argument, interpreter, prompt, script file, shell

The variable \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is used in a similar way when
a newline is typed but the current command is not yet complete;
if \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is not set then no prompt is output for
incomplete commands.
.SH "STANDARD CHANNELS"
.PP
See \fBTcl_StandardChannels\fR for more explanations.
.SH ZIPVFS
.PP
When a zipfile is concatenated to the end of a \fBtclsh\fR, on
startup the contents of the zip archive will be mounted as the
virtual file system /zvfs. If a top level directory tcl8.6 is
present in the zip archive, it will become the directory loaded
as env(TCL_LIBRARY). If a file named \fBmain.tcl\fR is present
in the top level directory of the zip archive, it will be sourced
instead of the shell's normal command line handing.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
auto_path(n), encoding(n), env(n), fconfigure(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
application, argument, interpreter, prompt, script file, shell

'\" Copyright (c) 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation
'\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions
'\" Contributions from Don Porter, NIST, 2002. (not subject to US copyright)
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH "tcltest" n 2.3 tcltest "Tcl Bundled Packages"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tcltest \- Test harness support code and utilities
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBpackage require tcltest\fR ?\fB2.3\fR?

\fBtcltest::test \fIname description\fR ?\fI\-option value ...\fR?
\fBtcltest::test \fIname description\fR ?\fIconstraints\fR? \fIbody result\fR

\fBtcltest::loadTestedCommands\fR
\fBtcltest::makeDirectory \fIname\fR ?\fIdirectory\fR?
\fBtcltest::removeDirectory \fIname\fR ?\fIdirectory\fR?
................................................................................
        ?\fB\-setup \fIsetupScript\fR?
        ?\fB\-body \fItestScript\fR?
        ?\fB\-cleanup \fIcleanupScript\fR?
        ?\fB\-result \fIexpectedAnswer\fR?
        ?\fB\-output \fIexpectedOutput\fR?
        ?\fB\-errorOutput \fIexpectedError\fR?
        ?\fB\-returnCodes \fIcodeList\fR?

        ?\fB\-match \fImode\fR?
.CE
.PP
The \fIname\fR may be any string.  It is conventional to choose
a \fIname\fR according to the pattern:
.PP
.CS
................................................................................
a list of return codes that may be accepted from evaluation of the
\fB\-body\fR script.  If evaluation of the \fB\-body\fR script returns
a code not in the \fIexpectedCodeList\fR, the test fails.  All
return codes known to \fBreturn\fR, in both numeric and symbolic
form, including extended return codes, are acceptable elements in
the \fIexpectedCodeList\fR.  Default value is
.QW "\fBok return\fR" .









.PP
To pass, a test must successfully evaluate its \fB\-setup\fR, \fB\-body\fR,
and \fB\-cleanup\fR scripts.  The return code of the \fB\-body\fR script and
its result must match expected values, and if specified, output and error
data from the test must match expected \fB\-output\fR and \fB\-errorOutput\fR
values.  If any of these conditions are not met, then the test fails.
Note that all scripts are evaluated in the context of the caller

'\" Copyright (c) 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation
'\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions
'\" Contributions from Don Porter, NIST, 2002. (not subject to US copyright)
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH "tcltest" n 2.5 tcltest "Tcl Bundled Packages"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
tcltest \- Test harness support code and utilities
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBpackage require tcltest\fR ?\fB2.5\fR?

\fBtcltest::test \fIname description\fR ?\fI\-option value ...\fR?
\fBtcltest::test \fIname description\fR ?\fIconstraints\fR? \fIbody result\fR

\fBtcltest::loadTestedCommands\fR
\fBtcltest::makeDirectory \fIname\fR ?\fIdirectory\fR?
\fBtcltest::removeDirectory \fIname\fR ?\fIdirectory\fR?
................................................................................
        ?\fB\-setup \fIsetupScript\fR?
        ?\fB\-body \fItestScript\fR?
        ?\fB\-cleanup \fIcleanupScript\fR?
        ?\fB\-result \fIexpectedAnswer\fR?
        ?\fB\-output \fIexpectedOutput\fR?
        ?\fB\-errorOutput \fIexpectedError\fR?
        ?\fB\-returnCodes \fIcodeList\fR?
        ?\fB\-errorCode \fIexpectedErrorCode\fR?
        ?\fB\-match \fImode\fR?
.CE
.PP
The \fIname\fR may be any string.  It is conventional to choose
a \fIname\fR according to the pattern:
.PP
.CS
................................................................................
a list of return codes that may be accepted from evaluation of the
\fB\-body\fR script.  If evaluation of the \fB\-body\fR script returns
a code not in the \fIexpectedCodeList\fR, the test fails.  All
return codes known to \fBreturn\fR, in both numeric and symbolic
form, including extended return codes, are acceptable elements in
the \fIexpectedCodeList\fR.  Default value is
.QW "\fBok return\fR" .
.TP
\fB\-errorCode \fIexpectedErrorCode\fR
.
The optional \fB\-errorCode\fR attribute supplies \fIexpectedErrorCode\fR,
a glob pattern that should match the error code reported from evaluation of the
\fB\-body\fR script.  If evaluation of the \fB\-body\fR script returns
a code not matching \fIexpectedErrorCode\fR, the test fails.  Default value is
.QW "\fB*\fR" .
If \fB\-returnCodes\fR does not include \fBerror\fR it is set to \fBerror\fR.
.PP
To pass, a test must successfully evaluate its \fB\-setup\fR, \fB\-body\fR,
and \fB\-cleanup\fR scripts.  The return code of the \fB\-body\fR script and
its result must match expected values, and if specified, output and error
data from the test must match expected \fB\-output\fR and \fB\-errorOutput\fR
values.  If any of these conditions are not met, then the test fails.
Note that all scripts are evaluated in the context of the caller

    seek $chan $offset
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
file(n), open(n), close(n), gets(n), seek(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
.SH KEYWORDS
access position, channel, seeking

    seek $chan $offset
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
file(n), open(n), close(n), gets(n), seek(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
.SH KEYWORDS
access position, channel, seeking
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

\fBtrace \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
This command causes Tcl commands to be executed whenever certain operations are
invoked.  The legal \fIoption\fRs (which may be abbreviated) are:
.TP
\fBtrace add \fItype name ops ?args?\fR

Where \fItype\fR is \fBcommand\fR, \fBexecution\fR, or \fBvariable\fR.
.RS
.TP
\fBtrace add command\fR \fIname ops commandPrefix\fR
.
Arrange for \fIcommandPrefix\fR to be executed (with additional arguments)
whenever command \fIname\fR is modified in one of the ways given by the list

\fBtrace \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
This command causes Tcl commands to be executed whenever certain operations are
invoked.  The legal \fIoption\fRs (which may be abbreviated) are:
.TP
\fBtrace add \fItype name ops\fR ?\fIargs\fR?
.
Where \fItype\fR is \fBcommand\fR, \fBexecution\fR, or \fBvariable\fR.
.RS
.TP
\fBtrace add command\fR \fIname ops commandPrefix\fR
.
Arrange for \fIcommandPrefix\fR to be executed (with additional arguments)
whenever command \fIname\fR is modified in one of the ways given by the list

    uplevel 1 [list _original_unknown {*}$args]
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
info(n), proc(n), interp(n), library(n), namespace(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
error, non-existent command, unknown

    uplevel 1 [list _original_unknown {*}$args]
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
info(n), proc(n), interp(n), library(n), namespace(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
error, non-existent command, unknown
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

    \fBupdate\fR
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
after(n), interp(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
asynchronous I/O, event, flush, handler, idle, update

    \fBupdate\fR
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
after(n), interp(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
asynchronous I/O, event, flush, handler, idle, update
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

been passed to \fBconcat\fR; the result is then evaluated in the
variable context indicated by \fIlevel\fR.  \fBUplevel\fR returns
the result of that evaluation.
.PP
If \fIlevel\fR is an integer then
it gives a distance (up the procedure calling stack) to move before
executing the command.  If \fIlevel\fR consists of \fB#\fR followed by
a number then the number gives an absolute level number.  If \fIlevel\fR
is omitted then it defaults to \fB1\fR.  \fILevel\fR cannot be
defaulted if the first \fIcommand\fR argument starts with a digit or \fB#\fR.
.PP
For example, suppose that procedure \fBa\fR was invoked
from top-level, and that it called \fBb\fR, and that \fBb\fR called \fBc\fR.
Suppose that \fBc\fR invokes the \fBuplevel\fR command.  If \fIlevel\fR
is \fB1\fR or \fB#2\fR  or omitted, then the command will be executed
in the variable context of \fBb\fR.  If \fIlevel\fR is \fB2\fR or \fB#1\fR
then the command will be executed in the variable context of \fBa\fR.

been passed to \fBconcat\fR; the result is then evaluated in the
variable context indicated by \fIlevel\fR.  \fBUplevel\fR returns
the result of that evaluation.
.PP
If \fIlevel\fR is an integer then
it gives a distance (up the procedure calling stack) to move before
executing the command.  If \fIlevel\fR consists of \fB#\fR followed by
a integer then the level gives an absolute level.  If \fIlevel\fR
is omitted then it defaults to \fB1\fR.  \fILevel\fR cannot be
defaulted if the first \fIcommand\fR argument is an integer or starts with \fB#\fR.
.PP
For example, suppose that procedure \fBa\fR was invoked
from top-level, and that it called \fBb\fR, and that \fBb\fR called \fBc\fR.
Suppose that \fBc\fR invokes the \fBuplevel\fR command.  If \fIlevel\fR
is \fB1\fR or \fB#2\fR  or omitted, then the command will be executed
in the variable context of \fBb\fR.  If \fIlevel\fR is \fB2\fR or \fB#1\fR
then the command will be executed in the variable context of \fBa\fR.

    puts "[incr lineCount]: $line"
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
break(n), continue(n), for(n), foreach(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
boolean, loop, test, while

    puts "[incr lineCount]: $line"
}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
break(n), continue(n), for(n), foreach(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
boolean, loop, test, while
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" fill-column: 78
'\" End:

'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2015 Jan Nijtmans <[email protected]>
'\" Copyright (c) 2015 Christian Werner <[email protected]>
'\" Copyright (c) 2017 Sean Woods <[email protected]>
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH Tclzipfs 3 8.7 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
.so man.macros
.BS
.SH NAME
TclZipfs_AppHook, Tclzipfs_Mount, TclZipfs_MountBuffer, Tclzipfs_Unmount \- handle ZIP files as Tcl virtual filesystems
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
int
\fBTclZipfs_AppHook(\fIargcPtr, argvPtr\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTclzipfs_Mount\fR(\fIinterp, mountpoint, zipname, password\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTclZipfs_MountBuffer\fR(\fIinterp, mountpoint, data, dataLen, copy\fR)
.sp
int
\fBTclzipfs_Unmount\fR(\fIinterp, mountpoint\fR)
.fi
.SH ARGUMENTS
.AS Tcl_Interp *mountpoint in
.AP "int" *argcPtr in
Pointer to a variable holding the number of command line arguments from
\fBmain\fR().
.AP "char" ***argvPtr in
Pointer to an array of strings containing the command line arguments to
\fBmain\fR().
.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
Interpreter in which the ZIP file system is mounted.  The interpreter's result is
modified to hold the result or error message from the script.
.AP "const char" *zipname in
Name of a ZIP file. Must not be NULL when either mounting or unmounting a ZIP.
.AP "const char" *mountpoint in
Name of a mount point, which must be a legal Tcl file or directory name. May
be NULL to query current mount points.
.AP "const char" *password in
An (optional) password. Use NULL if no password is wanted to read the file.
.AP "unsigned char" *data in
A data buffer to mount. The data buffer must hold the contents of a ZIP
archive, and must not be NULL.
.AP size_t dataLen in
The number of bytes in the supplied data buffer argument, \fIdata\fR.
.AP int copy in
If non-zero, the ZIP archive in the data buffer will be internally copied
before mounting, allowing the data buffer to be disposed once
\fBTclZipfs_MountBuffer\fR returns. If zero, the caller guarantees that the
buffer will be valid to read from for the duration of the mount.
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
\fBTclZipfs_AppHook\fR is a utility function to perform standard application
initialization procedures, taking into account available ZIP archives as
follows:
.IP [1]
If the current application has a mountable ZIP archive, that archive is
mounted under \fIZIPFS_VOLUME\fB/app\fR as a read-only Tcl virtual file
system. \fIZIPFS_VOLUME\fR is usually \fB//zipfs:\fR on all platforms, but
\fBzipfs:\fR may also be used on Windows (due to differences in the
platform's filename parsing).
.IP [2]
If a file named \fBmain.tcl\fR is located in the root directory of that file
system (i.e., at \fIZIPROOT\fB/app/main.tcl\fR after the ZIP archive is
mounted as described above) it is treated as the startup script for the
process.
.IP [3]
If the file \fIZIPROOT\fB/app/tcl_library/init.tcl\fR is present, the
\fBtcl_library\fR global variable in the initial Tcl interpreter is set to
\fIZIPROOT\fB/app/tcl_library\fR.
.IP [4]
If the directory \fBtcl_library\fR was not found in the main application
mount, the system will then search for it as either a VFS attached to the
application dynamic library, or as a zip archive named
\fBlibtcl_\fImajor\fB_\fIminor\fB_\fIpatchlevel\fB.zip\fR either in the
present working directory or in the standard Tcl install location. (For
example, the Tcl 8.7.2 release would be searched for in a file
\fBlibtcl_8_7_2.zip\fR.) That archive, if located, is also mounted read-only.
.PP
On Windows, \fBTclZipfs_AppHook\fR has a slightly different signature, since
it uses WCHAR in stead of char. As a result, it requires your application to
be compiled with the UNICODE preprocessor symbol defined (e.g., via the
\fB-DUNICODE\fR compiler flag).
.PP
The result of \fBTclZipfs_AppHook\fR is a Tcl result code (e.g., \fBTCL_OK\fR
when the function is successful). The function \fImay\fR modify the variables
pointed to by \fIargcPtr\fR and \fIargvPtr\fR to remove arguments; the
current implementation does not do so, but callers \fIshould not\fR assume
that this will be true in the future.
.PP
\fBTclzipfs_Mount\fR mounts the ZIP archive \fIzipname\fR on the mount point
given in \fImountpoint\fR using the optional ZIP password \fIpassword\fR.
Errors during that process are reported in the interpreter \fIinterp\fR.  If
\fImountpoint\fR is a NULL pointer, information on all currently mounted ZIP
file systems is written into \fIinterp\fR's result as a sequence of mount
points and ZIP file names.  The result of this call is a standard Tcl result
code.
.PP
\fBTclzipfs_MountBuffer\fR mounts the ZIP archive in the buffer pointed to by
\fIdata\fR on the mount point given in \fImountpoint\fR. The ZIP archive is
assumed to be not password protected.  Errors during that process are reported
in the interpreter \fIinterp\fR. The \fIcopy\fR argument determines whether
the buffer is internally copied before mounting or not. The result of this
call is a standard Tcl result code.
.PP
\fBTclzipfs_Unmount\fR undoes the effect of \fBTclzipfs_Mount\fR, i.e., it
unmounts the mounted ZIP file system that was mounted from \fIzipname\fR (at
\fImountpoint\fR). Errors are reported in the interpreter \fIinterp\fR.  The
result of this call is a standard Tcl result code.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
zipfs(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
compress, filesystem, zip

'\"
'\" Copyright (c) 2015 Jan Nijtmans <[email protected]>
'\" Copyright (c) 2015 Christian Werner <[email protected]>
'\" Copyright (c) 2015 Sean Woods <[email protected]>
'\"
'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
'\"
.TH zipfs n 1.0 Zipfs "zipfs Commands"
.so man.macros
.BS
'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
.SH NAME
zipfs \- Mount and work with ZIP files within Tcl
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
\fBpackage require zipfs \fR?\fB1.0\fR?
.sp
\fBzipfs canonical\fR ?\fImntpnt\fR? \fIfilename\fR ?\fIZIPFS\fR?
\fBzipfs exists\fR \fIfilename\fR
\fBzipfs find\fR \fIdirectoryName\fR
\fBzipfs info\fR \fIfilename\fR
\fBzipfs list\fR ?(\fB\-glob\fR|\fB\-regexp\fR)? ?\fIpattern\fR?
\fBzipfs lmkimg\fR \fIoutfile inlist\fR ?\fIpassword infile\fR?
\fBzipfs lmkzip\fR \fIoutfile inlist\fR ?\fIpassword\fR?
\fBzipfs mkimg\fR \fIoutfile indir\fR ?\fIstrip\fR? ?\fIpassword\fR? ?\fIinfile\fR?
\fBzipfs mkkey\fR \fIpassword\fR
\fBzipfs mkzip\fR \fIoutfile indir\fR ?\fIstrip\fR? ?\fIpassword\fR?
\fBzipfs mount\fR ?\fImountpoint\fR? ?\fIzipfile\fR? ?\fIpassword\fR?
\fBzipfs root\fR
\fBzipfs unmount\fR \fImountpoint\fR
.fi
'\" The following subcommand is *UNDOCUMENTED*
'\" \fBzipfs mount_data\fR ?\fImountpoint\fR? ?\fIdata\fR?
.BE
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
The \fBzipfs\fR command (the sole public command provided by the built-in
package with the same name) provides Tcl with the ability to mount the
contents of a ZIP archive file as a virtual file system. ZIP archives support
simple encryption, sufficient to prevent casual inspection of their contents
but not able to prevent access by even a moderately determined attacker.
.TP
\fBzipfs canonical\fR ?\fImountpoint\fR? \fIfilename\fR ?\fIinZipfs\fR?
.
This takes the name of a file, \fIfilename\fR, and produces where it would be
mapped into a zipfs mount as its result. If specified, \fImountpoint\fR says
within which mount the mapping will be done; if omitted, the main root of the
zipfs system is used. The \fIinZipfs\fR argument is a an optional boolean
which controls whether to fully canonicalise the name; it defaults to true.
.TP
\fBzipfs exists\fR \fIfilename\fR
.
Return 1 if the given filename exists in the mounted zipfs and 0 if it does not.
.TP
\fBzipfs find\fR \fIdirectoryName\fR
.
Recursively lists files including and below the directory \fIdirectoryName\fR.
The result list consists of relative path names starting from the given
directory. This command is also used by the \fBzipfs mkzip\fR and \fBzipfs
mkimg\fR commands.
.TP
\fBzipfs info\fR \fIfile\fR
.
Return information about the given \fIfile\fR in the mounted zipfs.  The
information consists of:
.RS
.IP (1)
the name of the ZIP archive file that contains the file,
.IP (2)
the size of the file after decompressions,
.IP (3)
the compressed size of the file, and
.IP (4)
the offset of the compressed data in the ZIP archive file.
.PP
Note: querying the mount point gives the start of the zip data as the offset
in (4), which can be used to truncate the zip information from an executable.
.RE
.TP
\fBzipfs list\fR ?(\fB\-glob\fR|\fB\-regexp\fR)? ?\fIpattern\fR?
.
Return a list of all files in the mounted zipfs, or just those matching
\fIpattern\fR (optionally controlled by the option parameters).  The order of
the names in the list is arbitrary.
.TP
\fBzipfs mount ?\fImountpoint\fR? ?\fIzipfile\fR? ?\fIpassword\fR?
.
The \fBzipfs mount\fR command mounts a ZIP archive file as a Tcl virtual
filesystem at \fImountpoint\fR.  After this command executes, files contained
in \fIzipfile\fR will appear to Tcl to be regular files at the mount point.
.RS
.PP
With no \fIzipfile\fR, returns the zipfile mounted at \fImountpoint\fR.  With
no \fImountpoint\fR, return all zipfile/mount pairs.  If \fImountpoint\fR is
specified as an empty string, mount on file path.
.PP
\fBNB:\fR because the current working directory is a concept maintained by the
operating system, using \fBcd\fR into a mounted archive will only work in the
current process, and then not entirely consistently (e.g., if a shared library
uses direct access to the OS rather than through Tcl's filesystem API, it will
not see the current directory as being inside the mount and will not be able
to access the files inside the mount).
.RE
.TP
\fBzipfs root\fR
.
Returns a constant string which indicates the mount point for zipfs volumes
for the current platform. On Windows, this value is
.QW \fBzipfs:/\fR .
On Unix, this value is
.QW \fB//zipfs:/\fR .
.RE
.TP
\fBzipfs unmount \fImountpoint\fR
.
Unmounts a previously mounted ZIP archive mounted to \fImountpoint\fR.
.SS "ZIP CREATION COMMANDS"
This package also provides several commands to aid the creation of ZIP
archives as Tcl applications.
.TP
\fBzipfs mkzip\fR \fIoutfile indir\fR ?\fIstrip\fR? ?\fIpassword\fR?
.
Creates a ZIP archive file named \fIoutfile\fR from the contents of the input
directory \fIindir\fR (contained regular files only) with optional ZIP
password \fIpassword\fR. While processing the files below \fIindir\fR the
optional file name prefix given in \fIstrip\fR is stripped off the beginning
of the respective file name.  When stripping, it is common to remove either
the whole source directory name or the name of its parent directory.
.RS
.PP
\fBCaution:\fR the choice of the \fIindir\fR parameter (less the optional
stripped prefix) determines the later root name of the archive's content.
.RE
.TP
\fBzipfs mkimg\fR \fIoutfile indir\fR ?\fIstrip\fR? ?\fIpassword\fR? ?\fIinfile\fR?
.
Creates an image (potentially a new executable file) similar to \fBzipfs
mkzip\fR; see that command for a description of most parameters to this
command, as they behave identically here.
.RS
.PP
If the \fIinfile\fR parameter is specified, this file is prepended in front of
the ZIP archive, otherwise the file returned by \fBinfo nameofexecutable\fR
(i.e., the executable file of the running process) is used. If the
\fIpassword\fR parameter is not empty, an obfuscated version of that password
(see \fBzipfs mkkey\fR) is placed between the image and ZIP chunks of the
output file and the contents of the ZIP chunk are protected with that
password.
.PP
If there is a file, \fBmain.tcl\fR, in the root directory of the resulting
archive and the image file that the archive is attached to is a \fBtclsh\fR
(or \fBwish\fR) instance (true by default, but depends on your configuration),
then the resulting image is an executable that will \fBsource\fR the script in
that \fBmain.tcl\fR after mounting the ZIP archive, and will \fBexit\fR once
that script has been executed.
.PP
\fBCaution:\fR highly experimental, not usable on Android, only partially
tested on Linux and Windows.
.RE
.TP
\fBzipfs mkkey\fR \fIpassword\fR
.
Given the clear text \fIpassword\fR argument, an obfuscated string version is
returned with the same format used in the \fBzipfs mkimg\fR command.
.TP
\fBzipfs lmkimg\fR \fIoutfile inlist\fR ?\fIpassword infile\fR?
.
This command is like \fBzipfs mkimg\fR, but instead of an input directory,
\fIinlist\fR must be a Tcl list where the odd elements are the names of files
to be copied into the archive in the image, and the even elements are their
respective names within that archive.
.TP
\fBzipfs lmkzip\fR \fIoutfile inlist\fR ?\fIpassword\fR?
.
This command is like \fBzipfs mkzip\fR, but instead of an input directory,
\fIinlist\fR must be a Tcl list where the odd elements are the names of files
to be copied into the archive, and the even elements are their respective
names within that archive.
.SH "EXAMPLES"
.PP
Mounting an ZIP archive as an application directory and running code out of it
before unmounting it again:
.PP
.CS
set zip myApp.zip
set base [file join [\fbzipfs root\fR] myApp]

\fBzipfs mount\fR $base $zip
# $base now has the contents of myApp.zip

source [file join $base app.tcl]
# use the contents, load libraries from it, etc...

\fBzipfs unmount\fR $zip
.CE
.PP
Creating a ZIP archive, given that a directory exists containing the content
to put in the archive. Note that the source directory is given twice, in order
to strip the exterior directory name from each filename in the archive.
.PP
.CS
set sourceDirectory [file normalize myApp]
set targetZip myApp.zip

\fBzipfs mkzip\fR $targetZip $sourceDirectory $sourceDirectory
.CE
.PP
Encryption can be applied to ZIP archives by providing a password when
building the ZIP and when mounting it.
.PP
.CS
set zip myApp.zip
set sourceDir [file normalize myApp]
set password "hunter2"
set base [file join [\fbzipfs root\fR] myApp]

# Create with password
\fBzipfs mkzip\fR $targetZip $sourceDir $sourceDir $password

# Mount with password
\fBzipfs mount\fR $base $zip $password
.CE
.PP
When creating an executable image with a password, the password is placed
within the executable in a shrouded form so that the application can read
files inside the embedded ZIP archive yet casual inspection cannot read it.
.PP
.CS
set appDir [file normalize myApp]
set img "myApp.bin"
set password "hunter2"

# Create some simple content to define a basic application
file mkdir $appDir
set f [open $appDir/main.tcl]
puts $f {
    puts "Hi. This is [info script]"
}
close $f

# Create the executable
\fBzipfs mkimg\fR $img $appDir $appDir $password

# Launch the executable, printing its output to stdout
exec $img >@stdout
#    prints: \fIHi. This is //zipfs:/app/main.tcl\fR
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
tclsh(1), file(n), zipfs(3), zlib(n)
.SH "KEYWORDS"
compress, filesystem, zip
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:

}
declare 20 {
    void Tcl_DbIncrRefCount(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, const char *file, int line)
}
declare 21 {
    int Tcl_DbIsShared(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, const char *file, int line)
}
declare 22 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_DbNewBooleanObj(int boolValue, const char *file, int line)
}
declare 23 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_DbNewByteArrayObj(const unsigned char *bytes, int length,
	    const char *file, int line)
}
declare 24 {
................................................................................
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_DbNewDoubleObj(double doubleValue, const char *file,
	    int line)
}
declare 25 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_DbNewListObj(int objc, Tcl_Obj *const *objv,
	    const char *file, int line)
}
declare 26 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_DbNewLongObj(long longValue, const char *file, int line)
}
declare 27 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_DbNewObj(const char *file, int line)
}
declare 28 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_DbNewStringObj(const char *bytes, int length,
................................................................................
declare 34 {
    int Tcl_GetDouble(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *src, double *doublePtr)
}
declare 35 {
    int Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
	    double *doublePtr)
}
declare 36 {
    int Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
	    const char *const *tablePtr, const char *msg, int flags, int *indexPtr)
}
declare 37 {
    int Tcl_GetInt(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *src, int *intPtr)
}
declare 38 {
................................................................................
    int Tcl_ListObjLength(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *listPtr,
	    int *lengthPtr)
}
declare 48 {
    int Tcl_ListObjReplace(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *listPtr, int first,
	    int count, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
}
declare 49 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_NewBooleanObj(int boolValue)
}
declare 50 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_NewByteArrayObj(const unsigned char *bytes, int length)
}
declare 51 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_NewDoubleObj(double doubleValue)
}
declare 52 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_NewIntObj(int intValue)
}
declare 53 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_NewListObj(int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
}
declare 54 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_NewLongObj(long longValue)
}
declare 55 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_NewObj(void)
}
declare 56 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_NewStringObj(const char *bytes, int length)
}
declare 57 {
    void Tcl_SetBooleanObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int boolValue)
}
declare 58 {
    unsigned char *Tcl_SetByteArrayLength(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int length)
}
declare 59 {
    void Tcl_SetByteArrayObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, const unsigned char *bytes,
	    int length)
}
declare 60 {
    void Tcl_SetDoubleObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, double doubleValue)
}
declare 61 {
    void Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int intValue)
}
declare 62 {
    void Tcl_SetListObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
}
declare 63 {
    void Tcl_SetLongObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, long longValue)
}
declare 64 {
    void Tcl_SetObjLength(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int length)
}
declare 65 {
    void Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, const char *bytes, int length)
}
declare 66 {
    void Tcl_AddErrorInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *message)
}
declare 67 {
    void Tcl_AddObjErrorInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *message,
	    int length)
}
declare 68 {
    void Tcl_AllowExceptions(Tcl_Interp *interp)
}
declare 69 {
................................................................................
}
declare 129 {
    int Tcl_Eval(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *script)
}
declare 130 {
    int Tcl_EvalFile(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *fileName)
}
declare 131 {
    int Tcl_EvalObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
}
declare 132 {
    void Tcl_EventuallyFree(ClientData clientData, Tcl_FreeProc *freeProc)
}
declare 133 {
    TCL_NORETURN void Tcl_Exit(int status)
................................................................................
}
declare 173 {
    Tcl_Channel Tcl_GetStdChannel(int type)
}
declare 174 {
    const char *Tcl_GetStringResult(Tcl_Interp *interp)
}
declare 175 {
    const char *Tcl_GetVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *varName,
	    int flags)
}
declare 176 {
    const char *Tcl_GetVar2(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *part1,
	    const char *part2, int flags)
}
declare 177 {
    int Tcl_GlobalEval(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *command)
}
declare 178 {
    int Tcl_GlobalEvalObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
}
declare 179 {
    int Tcl_HideCommand(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *cmdName,
	    const char *hiddenCmdToken)
}
declare 180 {
................................................................................
}
declare 235 {
    void Tcl_SetObjResult(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *resultObjPtr)
}
declare 236 {
    void Tcl_SetStdChannel(Tcl_Channel channel, int type)
}
declare 237 {
    const char *Tcl_SetVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *varName,
	    const char *newValue, int flags)
}
declare 238 {
    const char *Tcl_SetVar2(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *part1,
	    const char *part2, const char *newValue, int flags)
}
................................................................................
}
declare 245 {
    int Tcl_StringMatch(const char *str, const char *pattern)
}
declare 246 {deprecated {}} {
    int Tcl_TellOld(Tcl_Channel chan)
}
declare 247 {
    int Tcl_TraceVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *varName, int flags,
	    Tcl_VarTraceProc *proc, ClientData clientData)
}
declare 248 {
    int Tcl_TraceVar2(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *part1, const char *part2,
	    int flags, Tcl_VarTraceProc *proc, ClientData clientData)
}
................................................................................
}
declare 251 {
    void Tcl_UnlinkVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *varName)
}
declare 252 {
    int Tcl_UnregisterChannel(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel chan)
}
declare 253 {
    int Tcl_UnsetVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *varName, int flags)
}
declare 254 {
    int Tcl_UnsetVar2(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *part1, const char *part2,
	    int flags)
}
declare 255 {
    void Tcl_UntraceVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *varName, int flags,
	    Tcl_VarTraceProc *proc, ClientData clientData)
}
declare 256 {
    void Tcl_UntraceVar2(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *part1,
	    const char *part2, int flags, Tcl_VarTraceProc *proc,
	    ClientData clientData)
}
declare 257 {
    void Tcl_UpdateLinkedVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *varName)
}
declare 258 {
    int Tcl_UpVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *frameName,
	    const char *varName, const char *localName, int flags)
}
declare 259 {
    int Tcl_UpVar2(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *frameName, const char *part1,
	    const char *part2, const char *localName, int flags)
}
declare 260 {
    int Tcl_VarEval(Tcl_Interp *interp, ...)
}
declare 261 {
    ClientData Tcl_VarTraceInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *varName,
	    int flags, Tcl_VarTraceProc *procPtr, ClientData prevClientData)
}
declare 262 {
    ClientData Tcl_VarTraceInfo2(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *part1,
	    const char *part2, int flags, Tcl_VarTraceProc *procPtr,
	    ClientData prevClientData)
................................................................................
declare 269 {
    char *Tcl_HashStats(Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr)
}
declare 270 {
    const char *Tcl_ParseVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *start,
	    const char **termPtr)
}
declare 271 {
    const char *Tcl_PkgPresent(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name,
	    const char *version, int exact)
}
declare 272 {
    const char *Tcl_PkgPresentEx(Tcl_Interp *interp,
	    const char *name, const char *version, int exact,
	    void *clientDataPtr)
}
declare 273 {
    int Tcl_PkgProvide(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name,
	    const char *version)
}
# TIP #268: The internally used new Require function is in slot 573.
declare 274 {
    const char *Tcl_PkgRequire(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name,
	    const char *version, int exact)
}
declare 275 {deprecated {see TIP #422}} {
    void Tcl_SetErrorCodeVA(Tcl_Interp *interp, va_list argList)
}
declare 276 {deprecated {see TIP #422}} {
................................................................................
}
declare 380 {
    int Tcl_GetCharLength(Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
}
declare 381 {
    int Tcl_GetUniChar(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int index)
}
declare 382 {
    Tcl_UniChar *Tcl_GetUnicode(Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
}
declare 383 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_GetRange(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int first, int last)
}
declare 384 {
    void Tcl_AppendUnicodeToObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, const Tcl_UniChar *unicode,
................................................................................

# TIP #456
declare 631 {
    Tcl_Channel Tcl_OpenTcpServerEx(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *service,
	    const char *host, unsigned int flags, Tcl_TcpAcceptProc *acceptProc,
	    ClientData callbackData)
}

# ----- BASELINE -- FOR -- 8.7.0 ----- #

















##############################################################################

# Define the platform specific public Tcl interface. These functions are only
# available on the designated platform.

interface tclPlat
................................................................................
##############################################################################

# Public functions that are not accessible via the stubs table.

export {
    void Tcl_Main(int argc, char **argv, Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc)
}




export {
    const char *Tcl_InitStubs(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *version,
	int exact)
}
export {
    const char *TclTomMathInitializeStubs(Tcl_Interp* interp,
	const char* version, int epoch, int revision)

}
declare 20 {
    void Tcl_DbIncrRefCount(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, const char *file, int line)
}
declare 21 {
    int Tcl_DbIsShared(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, const char *file, int line)
}
declare 22 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_DbNewBooleanObj(int boolValue, const char *file, int line)
}
declare 23 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_DbNewByteArrayObj(const unsigned char *bytes, int length,
	    const char *file, int line)
}
declare 24 {
................................................................................
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_DbNewDoubleObj(double doubleValue, const char *file,
	    int line)
}
declare 25 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_DbNewListObj(int objc, Tcl_Obj *const *objv,
	    const char *file, int line)
}
declare 26 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_DbNewLongObj(long longValue, const char *file, int line)
}
declare 27 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_DbNewObj(const char *file, int line)
}
declare 28 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_DbNewStringObj(const char *bytes, int length,
................................................................................
declare 34 {
    int Tcl_GetDouble(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *src, double *doublePtr)
}
declare 35 {
    int Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
	    double *doublePtr)
}
declare 36 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    int Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
	    const char *const *tablePtr, const char *msg, int flags, int *indexPtr)
}
declare 37 {
    int Tcl_GetInt(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *src, int *intPtr)
}
declare 38 {
................................................................................
    int Tcl_ListObjLength(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *listPtr,
	    int *lengthPtr)
}
declare 48 {
    int Tcl_ListObjReplace(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *listPtr, int first,
	    int count, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
}
declare 49 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_NewBooleanObj(int boolValue)
}
declare 50 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_NewByteArrayObj(const unsigned char *bytes, int length)
}
declare 51 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_NewDoubleObj(double doubleValue)
}
declare 52 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_NewIntObj(int intValue)
}
declare 53 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_NewListObj(int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
}
declare 54 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_NewLongObj(long longValue)
}
declare 55 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_NewObj(void)
}
declare 56 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_NewStringObj(const char *bytes, int length)
}
declare 57 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    void Tcl_SetBooleanObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int boolValue)
}
declare 58 {
    unsigned char *Tcl_SetByteArrayLength(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int length)
}
declare 59 {
    void Tcl_SetByteArrayObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, const unsigned char *bytes,
	    int length)
}
declare 60 {
    void Tcl_SetDoubleObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, double doubleValue)
}
declare 61 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    void Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int intValue)
}
declare 62 {
    void Tcl_SetListObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
}
declare 63 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    void Tcl_SetLongObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, long longValue)
}
declare 64 {
    void Tcl_SetObjLength(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int length)
}
declare 65 {
    void Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, const char *bytes, int length)
}
declare 66 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    void Tcl_AddErrorInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *message)
}
declare 67 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    void Tcl_AddObjErrorInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *message,
	    int length)
}
declare 68 {
    void Tcl_AllowExceptions(Tcl_Interp *interp)
}
declare 69 {
................................................................................
}
declare 129 {
    int Tcl_Eval(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *script)
}
declare 130 {
    int Tcl_EvalFile(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *fileName)
}
declare 131 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    int Tcl_EvalObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
}
declare 132 {
    void Tcl_EventuallyFree(ClientData clientData, Tcl_FreeProc *freeProc)
}
declare 133 {
    TCL_NORETURN void Tcl_Exit(int status)
................................................................................
}
declare 173 {
    Tcl_Channel Tcl_GetStdChannel(int type)
}
declare 174 {
    const char *Tcl_GetStringResult(Tcl_Interp *interp)
}
declare 175 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    const char *Tcl_GetVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *varName,
	    int flags)
}
declare 176 {
    const char *Tcl_GetVar2(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *part1,
	    const char *part2, int flags)
}
declare 177 {
    int Tcl_GlobalEval(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *command)
}
declare 178 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    int Tcl_GlobalEvalObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
}
declare 179 {
    int Tcl_HideCommand(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *cmdName,
	    const char *hiddenCmdToken)
}
declare 180 {
................................................................................
}
declare 235 {
    void Tcl_SetObjResult(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *resultObjPtr)
}
declare 236 {
    void Tcl_SetStdChannel(Tcl_Channel channel, int type)
}
declare 237 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    const char *Tcl_SetVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *varName,
	    const char *newValue, int flags)
}
declare 238 {
    const char *Tcl_SetVar2(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *part1,
	    const char *part2, const char *newValue, int flags)
}
................................................................................
}
declare 245 {
    int Tcl_StringMatch(const char *str, const char *pattern)
}
declare 246 {deprecated {}} {
    int Tcl_TellOld(Tcl_Channel chan)
}
declare 247 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    int Tcl_TraceVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *varName, int flags,
	    Tcl_VarTraceProc *proc, ClientData clientData)
}
declare 248 {
    int Tcl_TraceVar2(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *part1, const char *part2,
	    int flags, Tcl_VarTraceProc *proc, ClientData clientData)
}
................................................................................
}
declare 251 {
    void Tcl_UnlinkVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *varName)
}
declare 252 {
    int Tcl_UnregisterChannel(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel chan)
}
declare 253 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    int Tcl_UnsetVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *varName, int flags)
}
declare 254 {
    int Tcl_UnsetVar2(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *part1, const char *part2,
	    int flags)
}
declare 255 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    void Tcl_UntraceVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *varName, int flags,
	    Tcl_VarTraceProc *proc, ClientData clientData)
}
declare 256 {
    void Tcl_UntraceVar2(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *part1,
	    const char *part2, int flags, Tcl_VarTraceProc *proc,
	    ClientData clientData)
}
declare 257 {
    void Tcl_UpdateLinkedVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *varName)
}
declare 258 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    int Tcl_UpVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *frameName,
	    const char *varName, const char *localName, int flags)
}
declare 259 {
    int Tcl_UpVar2(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *frameName, const char *part1,
	    const char *part2, const char *localName, int flags)
}
declare 260 {
    int Tcl_VarEval(Tcl_Interp *interp, ...)
}
declare 261 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    ClientData Tcl_VarTraceInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *varName,
	    int flags, Tcl_VarTraceProc *procPtr, ClientData prevClientData)
}
declare 262 {
    ClientData Tcl_VarTraceInfo2(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *part1,
	    const char *part2, int flags, Tcl_VarTraceProc *procPtr,
	    ClientData prevClientData)
................................................................................
declare 269 {
    char *Tcl_HashStats(Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr)
}
declare 270 {
    const char *Tcl_ParseVar(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *start,
	    const char **termPtr)
}
declare 271 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    const char *Tcl_PkgPresent(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name,
	    const char *version, int exact)
}
declare 272 {
    const char *Tcl_PkgPresentEx(Tcl_Interp *interp,
	    const char *name, const char *version, int exact,
	    void *clientDataPtr)
}
declare 273 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    int Tcl_PkgProvide(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name,
	    const char *version)
}
# TIP #268: The internally used new Require function is in slot 573.
declare 274 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    const char *Tcl_PkgRequire(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *name,
	    const char *version, int exact)
}
declare 275 {deprecated {see TIP #422}} {
    void Tcl_SetErrorCodeVA(Tcl_Interp *interp, va_list argList)
}
declare 276 {deprecated {see TIP #422}} {
................................................................................
}
declare 380 {
    int Tcl_GetCharLength(Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
}
declare 381 {
    int Tcl_GetUniChar(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int index)
}
declare 382 {deprecated {No longer in use, changed to macro}} {
    Tcl_UniChar *Tcl_GetUnicode(Tcl_Obj *objPtr)
}
declare 383 {
    Tcl_Obj *Tcl_GetRange(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, int first, int last)
}
declare 384 {
    void Tcl_AppendUnicodeToObj(Tcl_Obj *objPtr, const Tcl_UniChar *unicode,
................................................................................

# TIP #456
declare 631 {
    Tcl_Channel Tcl_OpenTcpServerEx(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *service,
	    const char *host, unsigned int flags, Tcl_TcpAcceptProc *acceptProc,
	    ClientData callbackData)
}

# TIP #430
declare 632 {
    int TclZipfs_Mount(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *mountPoint,
	    const char *zipname, const char *passwd)
}
declare 633 {
    int TclZipfs_Unmount(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *mountPoint)
}
declare 634 {
    Tcl_Obj *TclZipfs_TclLibrary(void)
}
declare 635 {
    int TclZipfs_MountBuffer(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *mountPoint,
	    unsigned char *data, size_t datalen, int copy)
}

# ----- BASELINE -- FOR -- 8.7.0 ----- #

##############################################################################

# Define the platform specific public Tcl interface. These functions are only
# available on the designated platform.

interface tclPlat
................................................................................
##############################################################################

# Public functions that are not accessible via the stubs table.

export {
    void Tcl_Main(int argc, char **argv, Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc)
}
export {
    void Tcl_MainEx(int argc, char **argv, Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc,
    Tcl_Interp *interp)
}
export {
    const char *Tcl_InitStubs(Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *version,
	int exact)
}
export {
    const char *TclTomMathInitializeStubs(Tcl_Interp* interp,
	const char* version, int epoch, int revision)

/*
 * These macros are used to control whether functions are being declared for
 * import or export. If a function is being declared while it is being built
 * to be included in a shared library, then it should have the DLLEXPORT
 * storage class. If is being declared for use by a module that is going to
 * link against the shared library, then it should have the DLLIMPORT storage
 * class. If the symbol is beind declared for a static build or for use from a
 * stub library, then the storage class should be empty.
 *
 * The convention is that a macro called BUILD_xxxx, where xxxx is the name of
 * a library we are building, is set on the compile line for sources that are
 * to be placed in the library. When this macro is set, the storage class will
 * be set to DLLEXPORT. At the end of the header file, the storage class will
 * be reset to DLLIMPORT.
................................................................................
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 * Definitions needed for the Tcl_OpenTcpServerEx function. [TIP #456]
 */
#define TCL_TCPSERVER_REUSEADDR (1<<0)
#define TCL_TCPSERVER_REUSEPORT (1<<1)








/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 * Single public declaration for NRE.
 */

typedef int (Tcl_NRPostProc) (ClientData data[], Tcl_Interp *interp,
				int result);
................................................................................

/*
 * Public functions that are not accessible via the stubs table.
 * Tcl_GetMemoryInfo is needed for AOLserver. [Bug 1868171]
 */

#define Tcl_Main(argc, argv, proc) Tcl_MainEx(argc, argv, proc, \
	    ((Tcl_SetPanicProc(Tcl_ConsolePanic), Tcl_CreateInterp)()))
EXTERN void		Tcl_MainEx(int argc, char **argv,
			    Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc, Tcl_Interp *interp);
EXTERN const char *	Tcl_PkgInitStubsCheck(Tcl_Interp *interp,
			    const char *version, int exact);
EXTERN void		Tcl_GetMemoryInfo(Tcl_DString *dsPtr);



 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 * Include the public function declarations that are accessible via the stubs
 * table.
 */

/*
 * These macros are used to control whether functions are being declared for
 * import or export. If a function is being declared while it is being built
 * to be included in a shared library, then it should have the DLLEXPORT
 * storage class. If is being declared for use by a module that is going to
 * link against the shared library, then it should have the DLLIMPORT storage
 * class. If the symbol is being declared for a static build or for use from a
 * stub library, then the storage class should be empty.
 *
 * The convention is that a macro called BUILD_xxxx, where xxxx is the name of
 * a library we are building, is set on the compile line for sources that are
 * to be placed in the library. When this macro is set, the storage class will
 * be set to DLLEXPORT. At the end of the header file, the storage class will
 * be reset to DLLIMPORT.
................................................................................
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 * Definitions needed for the Tcl_OpenTcpServerEx function. [TIP #456]
 */
#define TCL_TCPSERVER_REUSEADDR (1<<0)
#define TCL_TCPSERVER_REUSEPORT (1<<1)

/*
 * Constants for special int-typed values, see TIP #494
 */

#define TCL_IO_FAILURE	(-1)
#define TCL_AUTO_LENGTH	(-1)

/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 * Single public declaration for NRE.
 */

typedef int (Tcl_NRPostProc) (ClientData data[], Tcl_Interp *interp,
				int result);
................................................................................

/*
 * Public functions that are not accessible via the stubs table.
 * Tcl_GetMemoryInfo is needed for AOLserver. [Bug 1868171]
 */

#define Tcl_Main(argc, argv, proc) Tcl_MainEx(argc, argv, proc, \
	    (((Tcl_SetPanicProc)(Tcl_ConsolePanic), Tcl_CreateInterp)()))
EXTERN void		Tcl_MainEx(int argc, char **argv,
			    Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc, Tcl_Interp *interp);
EXTERN const char *	Tcl_PkgInitStubsCheck(Tcl_Interp *interp,
			    const char *version, int exact);
EXTERN void		Tcl_GetMemoryInfo(Tcl_DString *dsPtr);
#ifndef _WIN32
EXTERN int		TclZipfs_AppHook(int *argc, char ***argv);
#endif
 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 * Include the public function declarations that are accessible via the stubs
 * table.
 */

    Tcl_Obj *value;
    int status;

    /* General operand validity check */
    if (GetNextOperand(assemEnvPtr, tokenPtrPtr, &value) != TCL_OK) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
     
    /* Convert to an integer, advance to the next token and return. */
    /*
     * NOTE: Indexing a list with an index before it yields the
     * same result as indexing after it, and might be more easily portable
     * when list size limits grow.
     */
    status = TclIndexEncode(interp, value,

    Tcl_Obj *value;
    int status;

    /* General operand validity check */
    if (GetNextOperand(assemEnvPtr, tokenPtrPtr, &value) != TCL_OK) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }

    /* Convert to an integer, advance to the next token and return. */
    /*
     * NOTE: Indexing a list with an index before it yields the
     * same result as indexing after it, and might be more easily portable
     * when list size limits grow.
     */
    status = TclIndexEncode(interp, value,

				 * a default result. */
    int length;			/* Length of the above error message. */
    ClientData clientData;	/* Ignored */
    int flags;			/* Additional flags */
} CancelInfo;
static Tcl_HashTable cancelTable;
static int cancelTableInitialized = 0;	/* 0 means not yet initialized. */
TCL_DECLARE_MUTEX(cancelLock)












/*
 * Declarations for managing contexts for non-recursive coroutines. Contexts
 * are used to save the evaluation state between NR calls to each coro.
 */

#define SAVE_CONTEXT(context)				\
................................................................................
    iPtr->cmdFramePtr = (context).cmdFramePtr;		\
    iPtr->lineLABCPtr = (context).lineLABCPtr
 
/*
 * Static functions in this file:
 */


static char *		CallCommandTraces(Interp *iPtr, Command *cmdPtr,
			    const char *oldName, const char *newName,
			    int flags);
static int		CancelEvalProc(ClientData clientData,
			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int code);
static int		CheckDoubleResult(Tcl_Interp *interp, double dResult);
static void		DeleteCoroutine(ClientData clientData);
................................................................................
#   define DTraceCmdReturn	NULL
#endif /* USE_DTRACE */
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprAbsFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprBinaryFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprBoolFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprCeilFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprDoubleFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprEntierFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprFloorFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprIntFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprIsqrtFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprMaxFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprMinFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprRandFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprRoundFunc;
................................................................................
#define CMD_IS_SAFE         1   /* Whether this command is part of the set of
                                 * commands present by default in a safe
                                 * interpreter. */
/* CMD_COMPILES_EXPANDED - Whether the compiler for this command can handle
 * expansion for itself rather than needing the generic layer to take care of
 * it for it. Defined in tclInt.h. */



















/*
 * The built-in commands, and the functions that implement them:
 */

static const CmdInfo builtInCmds[] = {
    /*
     * Commands in the generic core.
................................................................................
    {"time",		Tcl_TimeObjCmd,		NULL,			NULL,	CMD_IS_SAFE},
    {"unload",		Tcl_UnloadObjCmd,	NULL,			NULL,	0},
    {"update",		Tcl_UpdateObjCmd,	NULL,			NULL,	CMD_IS_SAFE},
    {"vwait",		Tcl_VwaitObjCmd,	NULL,			NULL,	CMD_IS_SAFE},
    {NULL,		NULL,			NULL,			NULL,	0}
};































































/*
 * Math functions. All are safe.
 */

typedef struct {
    const char *name;		/* Name of the function. The full name is
				 * "::tcl::mathfunc::<name>". */
................................................................................
    { "atan",	ExprUnaryFunc,	(ClientData) atan	},
    { "atan2",	ExprBinaryFunc,	(ClientData) atan2	},
    { "bool",	ExprBoolFunc,	NULL			},
    { "ceil",	ExprCeilFunc,	NULL			},
    { "cos",	ExprUnaryFunc,	(ClientData) cos	},
    { "cosh",	ExprUnaryFunc,	(ClientData) cosh	},
    { "double",	ExprDoubleFunc,	NULL			},
    { "entier",	ExprEntierFunc,	NULL			},
    { "exp",	ExprUnaryFunc,	(ClientData) exp	},
    { "floor",	ExprFloorFunc,	NULL			},
    { "fmod",	ExprBinaryFunc,	(ClientData) fmod	},
    { "hypot",	ExprBinaryFunc,	(ClientData) hypot	},
    { "int",	ExprIntFunc,	NULL			},
    { "isqrt",	ExprIsqrtFunc,	NULL			},
    { "log",	ExprUnaryFunc,	(ClientData) log	},
................................................................................
{
    Tcl_MutexLock(&cancelLock);
    if (cancelTableInitialized == 1) {
	Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cancelTable);
	cancelTableInitialized = 0;
    }
    Tcl_MutexUnlock(&cancelLock);







}
 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * Tcl_CreateInterp --
 *
................................................................................

    if (cancelTableInitialized == 0) {
	Tcl_MutexLock(&cancelLock);
	if (cancelTableInitialized == 0) {
	    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cancelTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
	    cancelTableInitialized = 1;
	}

	Tcl_MutexUnlock(&cancelLock);
    }














    /*
     * Initialize support for namespaces and create the global namespace
     * (whose name is ""; an alias is "::"). This also initializes the Tcl
     * object type table and other object management code.
     */

................................................................................
     * compile and link against.
     */

#ifdef HAVE_ZLIB
    if (TclZlibInit(interp) != TCL_OK) {
	Tcl_Panic("%s", TclGetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)));
    }



#endif

    TOP_CB(iPtr) = NULL;
    return interp;
}

static void
................................................................................
DeleteOpCmdClientData(
    ClientData clientData)
{
    TclOpCmdClientData *occdPtr = clientData;

    ckfree(occdPtr);
}

































































 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * TclHideUnsafeCommands --
 *
 *	Hides base commands that are not marked as safe from this interpreter.
................................................................................
 */

int
TclHideUnsafeCommands(
    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Hide commands in this interpreter. */
{
    register const CmdInfo *cmdInfoPtr;


    if (interp == NULL) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
    for (cmdInfoPtr = builtInCmds; cmdInfoPtr->name != NULL; cmdInfoPtr++) {
	if (!(cmdInfoPtr->flags & CMD_IS_SAFE)) {
	    Tcl_HideCommand(interp, cmdInfoPtr->name, cmdInfoPtr->name);
	}
    }
    TclMakeEncodingCommandSafe(interp); /* Ugh! */

    TclMakeFileCommandSafe(interp);     /* Ugh! */





































    return TCL_OK;
}


































 
/*
 *--------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * Tcl_CallWhenDeleted --
 *
 *	Arrange for a function to be called before a given interpreter is
................................................................................
	Tcl_DecrRefCount(resultPtr);
	if (Tcl_InitBignumFromDouble(interp, d, &big) != TCL_OK) {
	    return TCL_ERROR;
	}
	resultPtr = Tcl_NewBignumObj(&big);
	/* FALLTHROUGH */
    }
    case TCL_NUMBER_WIDE:
    case TCL_NUMBER_BIG:
	result = TclGetLongFromObj(interp, resultPtr, ptr);
	break;

    case TCL_NUMBER_NAN:
	Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, resultPtr, &d);
	result = TCL_ERROR;
................................................................................
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }

    if (TclGetNumberFromObj(interp, objv[1], &ptr, &type) != TCL_OK) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }

    if (type == TCL_NUMBER_WIDE) {
	Tcl_WideInt l = *((const Tcl_WideInt *) ptr);

	if (l > (Tcl_WideInt)0) {
	    goto unChanged;
	} else if (l == (Tcl_WideInt)0) {
	    const char *string = objv[1]->bytes;
	    if (string) {
................................................................................
			Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewLongObj(0));
			return TCL_OK;
		    }
		    string++;
		}
	    }
	    goto unChanged;
	} else if (l == LLONG_MIN) {
	    TclInitBignumFromWideInt(&big, l);
	    goto tooLarge;
	}
	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewWideIntObj(-l));
	return TCL_OK;
    }

................................................................................
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(dResult));
    return TCL_OK;
}

static int
ExprEntierFunc(
    ClientData clientData,	/* Ignored. */
    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interpreter in which to execute the
				 * function. */
    int objc,			/* Actual parameter count. */
    Tcl_Obj *const *objv)	/* Actual parameter vector. */
{
    double d;
................................................................................
    }
    if (TclGetNumberFromObj(interp, objv[1], &ptr, &type) != TCL_OK) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }

    if (type == TCL_NUMBER_DOUBLE) {
	d = *((const double *) ptr);
	if ((d >= (double)LONG_MAX) || (d <= (double)LONG_MIN)) {
	    mp_int big;

	    if (Tcl_InitBignumFromDouble(interp, d, &big) != TCL_OK) {
		/* Infinity */
		return TCL_ERROR;
	    }
	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBignumObj(&big));
	    return TCL_OK;
	} else {
	    long result = (long) d;

	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewLongObj(result));
	    return TCL_OK;
	}
    }

    if (type != TCL_NUMBER_NAN) {
	/*
	 * All integers are already of integer type.
................................................................................
     * Get the error message for NaN.
     */

    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[1], &d);
    return TCL_ERROR;
}

static int
ExprIntFunc(
    ClientData clientData,	/* Ignored. */
    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interpreter in which to execute the
				 * function. */
    int objc,			/* Actual parameter count. */
    Tcl_Obj *const *objv)	/* Actual parameter vector. */
{
    long iResult;
    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
    if (ExprEntierFunc(NULL, interp, objc, objv) != TCL_OK) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
    objPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
    if (TclGetLongFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &iResult) != TCL_OK) {
	/*
	 * Truncate the bignum; keep only bits in long range.
	 */

	mp_int big;

	Tcl_GetBignumFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &big);
	mp_mod_2d(&big, (int) CHAR_BIT * sizeof(long), &big);
	objPtr = Tcl_NewBignumObj(&big);
	Tcl_IncrRefCount(objPtr);
	TclGetLongFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &iResult);
	Tcl_DecrRefCount(objPtr);
    }
    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewLongObj(iResult));
    return TCL_OK;
}

static int
ExprWideFunc(
    ClientData clientData,	/* Ignored. */
    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interpreter in which to execute the
				 * function. */
    int objc,			/* Actual parameter count. */
    Tcl_Obj *const *objv)	/* Actual parameter vector. */
{
    Tcl_WideInt wResult;
    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;

    if (ExprEntierFunc(NULL, interp, objc, objv) != TCL_OK) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
    objPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
    if (TclGetWideIntFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &wResult) != TCL_OK) {
	/*
	 * Truncate the bignum; keep only bits in wide int range.
	 */

	mp_int big;

	Tcl_GetBignumFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &big);
	mp_mod_2d(&big, (int) CHAR_BIT * sizeof(Tcl_WideInt), &big);
	objPtr = Tcl_NewBignumObj(&big);
	Tcl_IncrRefCount(objPtr);
	TclGetWideIntFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &wResult);
	Tcl_DecrRefCount(objPtr);
    }
    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewWideIntObj(wResult));
    return TCL_OK;
}

/*
 * Common implmentation of max() and min().
 */
................................................................................

	iPtr->randSeed = TclpGetClicks() + (PTR2INT(Tcl_GetCurrentThread())<<12);

	/*
	 * Make sure 1 <= randSeed <= (2^31) - 2. See below.
	 */

	iPtr->randSeed &= (unsigned long) 0x7fffffff;
	if ((iPtr->randSeed == 0) || (iPtr->randSeed == 0x7fffffff)) {
	    iPtr->randSeed ^= 123459876;
	}
    }

    /*
     * Generate the random number using the linear congruential generator
................................................................................
    ClientData clientData,	/* Ignored. */
    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interpreter in which to execute the
				 * function. */
    int objc,			/* Actual parameter count. */
    Tcl_Obj *const *objv)	/* Parameter vector. */
{
    Interp *iPtr = (Interp *) interp;
    long i = 0;			/* Initialized to avoid compiler warning. */

    /*
     * Convert argument and use it to reset the seed.
     */

    if (objc != 2) {
	MathFuncWrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objc, objv);
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }

    if (TclGetLongFromObj(NULL, objv[1], &i) != TCL_OK) {
	Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
	mp_int big;

	if (Tcl_GetBignumFromObj(interp, objv[1], &big) != TCL_OK) {
	    /* TODO: more ::errorInfo here? or in caller? */
	    return TCL_ERROR;
	}

	mp_mod_2d(&big, (int) CHAR_BIT * sizeof(long), &big);
	objPtr = Tcl_NewBignumObj(&big);
	Tcl_IncrRefCount(objPtr);
	TclGetLongFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &i);
	Tcl_DecrRefCount(objPtr);
    }

    /*
     * Reset the seed. Make sure 1 <= randSeed <= 2^31 - 2. See comments in
     * ExprRandFunc for more details.
     */

    iPtr->flags |= RAND_SEED_INITIALIZED;
    iPtr->randSeed = i;
    iPtr->randSeed &= (unsigned long) 0x7fffffff;
    if ((iPtr->randSeed == 0) || (iPtr->randSeed == 0x7fffffff)) {
	iPtr->randSeed ^= 123459876;
    }

    /*
     * To avoid duplicating the random number generation code we simply clean
     * up our state and call the real random number function. That function

				 * a default result. */
    int length;			/* Length of the above error message. */
    ClientData clientData;	/* Ignored */
    int flags;			/* Additional flags */
} CancelInfo;
static Tcl_HashTable cancelTable;
static int cancelTableInitialized = 0;	/* 0 means not yet initialized. */
TCL_DECLARE_MUTEX(cancelLock);

/*
 * Table used to map command implementation functions to a human-readable type
 * name, for [info type]. The keys in the table are function addresses, and
 * the values in the table are static char* containing strings in Tcl's
 * internal encoding (almost UTF-8).
 */

static Tcl_HashTable commandTypeTable;
static int commandTypeInit = 0;
TCL_DECLARE_MUTEX(commandTypeLock);

/*
 * Declarations for managing contexts for non-recursive coroutines. Contexts
 * are used to save the evaluation state between NR calls to each coro.
 */

#define SAVE_CONTEXT(context)				\
................................................................................
    iPtr->cmdFramePtr = (context).cmdFramePtr;		\
    iPtr->lineLABCPtr = (context).lineLABCPtr
 
/*
 * Static functions in this file:
 */

static Tcl_ObjCmdProc   BadEnsembleSubcommand;
static char *		CallCommandTraces(Interp *iPtr, Command *cmdPtr,
			    const char *oldName, const char *newName,
			    int flags);
static int		CancelEvalProc(ClientData clientData,
			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int code);
static int		CheckDoubleResult(Tcl_Interp *interp, double dResult);
static void		DeleteCoroutine(ClientData clientData);
................................................................................
#   define DTraceCmdReturn	NULL
#endif /* USE_DTRACE */
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprAbsFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprBinaryFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprBoolFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprCeilFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprDoubleFunc;

static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprFloorFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprIntFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprIsqrtFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprMaxFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprMinFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprRandFunc;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	ExprRoundFunc;
................................................................................
#define CMD_IS_SAFE         1   /* Whether this command is part of the set of
                                 * commands present by default in a safe
                                 * interpreter. */
/* CMD_COMPILES_EXPANDED - Whether the compiler for this command can handle
 * expansion for itself rather than needing the generic layer to take care of
 * it for it. Defined in tclInt.h. */

/*
 * The following struct states that the command it talks about (a subcommand
 * of one of Tcl's built-in ensembles) is unsafe and must be hidden when an
 * interpreter is made safe. (TclHideUnsafeCommands accesses an array of these
 * structs.) Alas, we can't sensibly just store the information directly in
 * the commands.
 */

typedef struct {
    const char *ensembleNsName; /* The ensemble's name within ::tcl. NULL for
                                 * the end of the list of commands to hide. */
    const char *commandName;    /* The name of the command within the
                                 * ensemble. If this is NULL, we want to also
                                 * make the overall command be hidden, an ugly
                                 * hack because it is expected by security
                                 * policies in the wild. */
} UnsafeEnsembleInfo;

/*
 * The built-in commands, and the functions that implement them:
 */

static const CmdInfo builtInCmds[] = {
    /*
     * Commands in the generic core.
................................................................................
    {"time",		Tcl_TimeObjCmd,		NULL,			NULL,	CMD_IS_SAFE},
    {"unload",		Tcl_UnloadObjCmd,	NULL,			NULL,	0},
    {"update",		Tcl_UpdateObjCmd,	NULL,			NULL,	CMD_IS_SAFE},
    {"vwait",		Tcl_VwaitObjCmd,	NULL,			NULL,	CMD_IS_SAFE},
    {NULL,		NULL,			NULL,			NULL,	0}
};

/*
 * Information about which pieces of ensembles to hide when making an
 * interpreter safe:
 */

static const UnsafeEnsembleInfo unsafeEnsembleCommands[] = {
    /* [encoding] has two unsafe commands. Assumed by older security policies
     * to be overall unsafe; it isn't but... */
    {"encoding", NULL},
    {"encoding", "dirs"},
    {"encoding", "system"},
    /* [file] has MANY unsafe commands! Assumed by older security policies to
     * be overall unsafe; it isn't but... */
    {"file", NULL},
    {"file", "atime"},
    {"file", "attributes"},
    {"file", "copy"},
    {"file", "delete"},
    {"file", "dirname"},
    {"file", "executable"},
    {"file", "exists"},
    {"file", "extension"},
    {"file", "isdirectory"},
    {"file", "isfile"},
    {"file", "link"},
    {"file", "lstat"},
    {"file", "mtime"},
    {"file", "mkdir"},
    {"file", "nativename"},
    {"file", "normalize"},
    {"file", "owned"},
    {"file", "readable"},
    {"file", "readlink"},
    {"file", "rename"},
    {"file", "rootname"},
    {"file", "size"},
    {"file", "stat"},
    {"file", "tail"},
    {"file", "tempfile"},
    {"file", "type"},
    {"file", "volumes"},
    {"file", "writable"},
    /* [info] has two unsafe commands */
    {"info", "cmdtype"},
    {"info", "nameofexecutable"},
    /* [tcl::process] has ONLY unsafe commands! */
    {"process", "list"},
    {"process", "status"},
    {"process", "purge"},
    {"process", "autopurge"},
    /* [zipfs] has MANY unsafe commands! */
    {"zipfs", "lmkimg"},
    {"zipfs", "lmkzip"},
    {"zipfs", "mkimg"},
    {"zipfs", "mkkey"},
    {"zipfs", "mkzip"},
    {"zipfs", "mount"},
    {"zipfs", "mount_data"},
    {"zipfs", "unmount"},
    {NULL, NULL}
};

/*
 * Math functions. All are safe.
 */

typedef struct {
    const char *name;		/* Name of the function. The full name is
				 * "::tcl::mathfunc::<name>". */
................................................................................
    { "atan",	ExprUnaryFunc,	(ClientData) atan	},
    { "atan2",	ExprBinaryFunc,	(ClientData) atan2	},
    { "bool",	ExprBoolFunc,	NULL			},
    { "ceil",	ExprCeilFunc,	NULL			},
    { "cos",	ExprUnaryFunc,	(ClientData) cos	},
    { "cosh",	ExprUnaryFunc,	(ClientData) cosh	},
    { "double",	ExprDoubleFunc,	NULL			},
    { "entier",	ExprIntFunc,	NULL			},
    { "exp",	ExprUnaryFunc,	(ClientData) exp	},
    { "floor",	ExprFloorFunc,	NULL			},
    { "fmod",	ExprBinaryFunc,	(ClientData) fmod	},
    { "hypot",	ExprBinaryFunc,	(ClientData) hypot	},
    { "int",	ExprIntFunc,	NULL			},
    { "isqrt",	ExprIsqrtFunc,	NULL			},
    { "log",	ExprUnaryFunc,	(ClientData) log	},
................................................................................
{
    Tcl_MutexLock(&cancelLock);
    if (cancelTableInitialized == 1) {
	Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cancelTable);
	cancelTableInitialized = 0;
    }
    Tcl_MutexUnlock(&cancelLock);

    Tcl_MutexLock(&commandTypeLock);
    if (commandTypeInit) {
        Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&commandTypeTable);
        commandTypeInit = 0;
    }
    Tcl_MutexUnlock(&commandTypeLock);
}
 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * Tcl_CreateInterp --
 *
................................................................................

    if (cancelTableInitialized == 0) {
	Tcl_MutexLock(&cancelLock);
	if (cancelTableInitialized == 0) {
	    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cancelTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
	    cancelTableInitialized = 1;
	}

	Tcl_MutexUnlock(&cancelLock);
    }

    if (commandTypeInit == 0) {
        TclRegisterCommandTypeName(TclObjInterpProc, "proc");
        TclRegisterCommandTypeName(TclEnsembleImplementationCmd, "ensemble");
        TclRegisterCommandTypeName(TclAliasObjCmd, "alias");
        TclRegisterCommandTypeName(TclLocalAliasObjCmd, "alias");
        TclRegisterCommandTypeName(TclSlaveObjCmd, "slave");
        TclRegisterCommandTypeName(TclInvokeImportedCmd, "import");
        TclRegisterCommandTypeName(TclOOPublicObjectCmd, "object");
        TclRegisterCommandTypeName(TclOOPrivateObjectCmd, "privateObject");
        TclRegisterCommandTypeName(TclOOMyClassObjCmd, "privateClass");
        TclRegisterCommandTypeName(TclNRInterpCoroutine, "coroutine");
    }

    /*
     * Initialize support for namespaces and create the global namespace
     * (whose name is ""; an alias is "::"). This also initializes the Tcl
     * object type table and other object management code.
     */

................................................................................
     * compile and link against.
     */

#ifdef HAVE_ZLIB
    if (TclZlibInit(interp) != TCL_OK) {
	Tcl_Panic("%s", TclGetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)));
    }
    if (TclZipfs_Init(interp) != TCL_OK) {
	Tcl_Panic("%s", Tcl_GetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)));
    }
#endif

    TOP_CB(iPtr) = NULL;
    return interp;
}

static void
................................................................................
DeleteOpCmdClientData(
    ClientData clientData)
{
    TclOpCmdClientData *occdPtr = clientData;

    ckfree(occdPtr);
}
 
/*
 * ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * TclRegisterCommandTypeName, TclGetCommandTypeName --
 *
 *      Command type registration and lookup mechanism. Everything is keyed by
 *      the Tcl_ObjCmdProc for the command, and that is used as the *key* into
 *      the hash table that maps to constant strings that are names. (It is
 *      recommended that those names be ASCII.)
 *
 * ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 */

void
TclRegisterCommandTypeName(
    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *implementationProc,
    const char *nameStr)
{
    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;

    Tcl_MutexLock(&commandTypeLock);
    if (commandTypeInit == 0) {
        Tcl_InitHashTable(&commandTypeTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
        commandTypeInit = 1;
    }
    if (nameStr != NULL) {
        int isNew;

        hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&commandTypeTable,
                (void *) implementationProc, &isNew);
        Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, (void *) nameStr);
    } else {
        hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&commandTypeTable,
                (void *) implementationProc);
        if (hPtr != NULL) {
            Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hPtr);
        }
    }
    Tcl_MutexUnlock(&commandTypeLock);
}

const char *
TclGetCommandTypeName(
    Tcl_Command command)
{
    Command *cmdPtr = (Command *) command;
    void *procPtr = cmdPtr->objProc;
    const char *name = "native";

    if (procPtr == NULL) {
        procPtr = cmdPtr->nreProc;
    }
    Tcl_MutexLock(&commandTypeLock);
    if (commandTypeInit) {
        Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&commandTypeTable, procPtr);

        if (hPtr && Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr)) {
            name = (const char *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
        }
    }
    Tcl_MutexUnlock(&commandTypeLock);

    return name;
}
 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * TclHideUnsafeCommands --
 *
 *	Hides base commands that are not marked as safe from this interpreter.
................................................................................
 */

int
TclHideUnsafeCommands(
    Tcl_Interp *interp)		/* Hide commands in this interpreter. */
{
    register const CmdInfo *cmdInfoPtr;
    register const UnsafeEnsembleInfo *unsafePtr;

    if (interp == NULL) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
    for (cmdInfoPtr = builtInCmds; cmdInfoPtr->name != NULL; cmdInfoPtr++) {
	if (!(cmdInfoPtr->flags & CMD_IS_SAFE)) {
	    Tcl_HideCommand(interp, cmdInfoPtr->name, cmdInfoPtr->name);
	}
    }


    for (unsafePtr = unsafeEnsembleCommands;
            unsafePtr->ensembleNsName; unsafePtr++) {
        if (unsafePtr->commandName) {
            /*
             * Hide an ensemble subcommand.
             */

            Tcl_Obj *cmdName = Tcl_ObjPrintf("::tcl::%s::%s",
                    unsafePtr->ensembleNsName, unsafePtr->commandName);
            Tcl_Obj *hideName = Tcl_ObjPrintf("tcl:%s:%s",
                    unsafePtr->ensembleNsName, unsafePtr->commandName);

            if (TclRenameCommand(interp, TclGetString(cmdName),
                        "___tmp") != TCL_OK
                    || Tcl_HideCommand(interp, "___tmp",
                            TclGetString(hideName)) != TCL_OK) {
                Tcl_Panic("problem making '%s %s' safe: %s",
                        unsafePtr->ensembleNsName, unsafePtr->commandName,
                        Tcl_GetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)));
            }
            Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, TclGetString(cmdName),
                    BadEnsembleSubcommand, (ClientData) unsafePtr, NULL);
            TclDecrRefCount(cmdName);
            TclDecrRefCount(hideName);
        } else {
            /*
             * Hide an ensemble main command (for compatibility).
             */

            if (Tcl_HideCommand(interp, unsafePtr->ensembleNsName,
                    unsafePtr->ensembleNsName) != TCL_OK) {
                Tcl_Panic("problem making '%s' safe: %s",
                        unsafePtr->ensembleNsName,
                        Tcl_GetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)));
            }
        }
    }

    return TCL_OK;
}
 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * BadEnsembleSubcommand --
 *
 *	Command used to act as a backstop implementation when subcommands of
 *	ensembles are unsafe (the real implementations of the subcommands are
 *	hidden). The clientData is description of what was hidden.
 *
 * Results:
 *	A standard Tcl result (always a TCL_ERROR).
 *
 * Side effects:
 *	None.
 *
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 */

static int
BadEnsembleSubcommand(
    ClientData clientData,
    Tcl_Interp *interp,
    int objc,
    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
{
    const UnsafeEnsembleInfo *infoPtr = clientData;

    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
            "not allowed to invoke subcommand %s of %s",
            infoPtr->commandName, infoPtr->ensembleNsName));
    Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TCL", "SAFE", "SUBCOMMAND", NULL);
    return TCL_ERROR;
}
 
/*
 *--------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * Tcl_CallWhenDeleted --
 *
 *	Arrange for a function to be called before a given interpreter is
................................................................................
	Tcl_DecrRefCount(resultPtr);
	if (Tcl_InitBignumFromDouble(interp, d, &big) != TCL_OK) {
	    return TCL_ERROR;
	}
	resultPtr = Tcl_NewBignumObj(&big);
	/* FALLTHROUGH */
    }
    case TCL_NUMBER_INT:
    case TCL_NUMBER_BIG:
	result = TclGetLongFromObj(interp, resultPtr, ptr);
	break;

    case TCL_NUMBER_NAN:
	Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, resultPtr, &d);
	result = TCL_ERROR;
................................................................................
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }

    if (TclGetNumberFromObj(interp, objv[1], &ptr, &type) != TCL_OK) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }

    if (type == TCL_NUMBER_INT) {
	Tcl_WideInt l = *((const Tcl_WideInt *) ptr);

	if (l > (Tcl_WideInt)0) {
	    goto unChanged;
	} else if (l == (Tcl_WideInt)0) {
	    const char *string = objv[1]->bytes;
	    if (string) {
................................................................................
			Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewLongObj(0));
			return TCL_OK;
		    }
		    string++;
		}
	    }
	    goto unChanged;
	} else if (l == WIDE_MIN) {
	    TclInitBignumFromWideInt(&big, l);
	    goto tooLarge;
	}
	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewWideIntObj(-l));
	return TCL_OK;
    }

................................................................................
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewDoubleObj(dResult));
    return TCL_OK;
}

static int
ExprIntFunc(
    ClientData clientData,	/* Ignored. */
    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interpreter in which to execute the
				 * function. */
    int objc,			/* Actual parameter count. */
    Tcl_Obj *const *objv)	/* Actual parameter vector. */
{
    double d;
................................................................................
    }
    if (TclGetNumberFromObj(interp, objv[1], &ptr, &type) != TCL_OK) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }

    if (type == TCL_NUMBER_DOUBLE) {
	d = *((const double *) ptr);
	if ((d >= (double)WIDE_MAX) || (d <= (double)WIDE_MIN)) {
	    mp_int big;

	    if (Tcl_InitBignumFromDouble(interp, d, &big) != TCL_OK) {
		/* Infinity */
		return TCL_ERROR;
	    }
	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBignumObj(&big));
	    return TCL_OK;
	} else {
	    Tcl_WideInt result = (Tcl_WideInt) d;

	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewWideIntObj(result));
	    return TCL_OK;
	}
    }

    if (type != TCL_NUMBER_NAN) {
	/*
	 * All integers are already of integer type.
................................................................................
     * Get the error message for NaN.
     */

    Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, objv[1], &d);
    return TCL_ERROR;
}

































static int
ExprWideFunc(
    ClientData clientData,	/* Ignored. */
    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interpreter in which to execute the
				 * function. */
    int objc,			/* Actual parameter count. */
    Tcl_Obj *const *objv)	/* Actual parameter vector. */
{
    Tcl_WideInt wResult;


    if (ExprIntFunc(NULL, interp, objc, objv) != TCL_OK) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
    TclGetWideBitsFromObj(NULL, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), &wResult);














    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewWideIntObj(wResult));
    return TCL_OK;
}

/*
 * Common implmentation of max() and min().
 */
................................................................................

	iPtr->randSeed = TclpGetClicks() + (PTR2INT(Tcl_GetCurrentThread())<<12);

	/*
	 * Make sure 1 <= randSeed <= (2^31) - 2. See below.
	 */

	iPtr->randSeed &= 0x7fffffff;
	if ((iPtr->randSeed == 0) || (iPtr->randSeed == 0x7fffffff)) {
	    iPtr->randSeed ^= 123459876;
	}
    }

    /*
     * Generate the random number using the linear congruential generator
................................................................................
    ClientData clientData,	/* Ignored. */
    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interpreter in which to execute the
				 * function. */
    int objc,			/* Actual parameter count. */
    Tcl_Obj *const *objv)	/* Parameter vector. */
{
    Interp *iPtr = (Interp *) interp;
    Tcl_WideInt w = 0;			/* Initialized to avoid compiler warning. */

    /*
     * Convert argument and use it to reset the seed.
     */

    if (objc != 2) {
	MathFuncWrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objc, objv);
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }

    if (TclGetWideBitsFromObj(NULL, objv[1], &w) != TCL_OK) {





	return TCL_ERROR;







    }

    /*
     * Reset the seed. Make sure 1 <= randSeed <= 2^31 - 2. See comments in
     * ExprRandFunc for more details.
     */

    iPtr->flags |= RAND_SEED_INITIALIZED;
    iPtr->randSeed = (long) w & 0x7fffffff;

    if ((iPtr->randSeed == 0) || (iPtr->randSeed == 0x7fffffff)) {
	iPtr->randSeed ^= 123459876;
    }

    /*
     * To avoid duplicating the random number generation code we simply clean
     * up our state and call the real random number function. That function

FormatNumber(
    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter, used to report
				 * errors. */
    int type,			/* Type of number to format. */
    Tcl_Obj *src,		/* Number to format. */
    unsigned char **cursorPtr)	/* Pointer to index into destination buffer. */
{
    long value;
    double dvalue;
    Tcl_WideInt wvalue;
    float fvalue;

    switch (type) {
    case 'd':
    case 'q':
................................................................................

	/*
	 * 64-bit integer values.
	 */
    case 'w':
    case 'W':
    case 'm':
	if (Tcl_GetWideIntFromObj(interp, src, &wvalue) != TCL_OK) {
	    return TCL_ERROR;
	}
	if (NeedReversing(type)) {
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue >> 8);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue >> 16);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue >> 24);
................................................................................

	/*
	 * 32-bit integer values.
	 */
    case 'i':
    case 'I':
    case 'n':
	if (TclGetLongFromObj(interp, src, &value) != TCL_OK) {
	    return TCL_ERROR;
	}
	if (NeedReversing(type)) {
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(value);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(value >> 8);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(value >> 16);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(value >> 24);
	} else {
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(value >> 24);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(value >> 16);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(value >> 8);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(value);
	}
	return TCL_OK;

	/*
	 * 16-bit integer values.
	 */
    case 's':
    case 'S':
    case 't':
	if (TclGetLongFromObj(interp, src, &value) != TCL_OK) {
	    return TCL_ERROR;
	}
	if (NeedReversing(type)) {
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(value);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(value >> 8);
	} else {
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(value >> 8);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(value);
	}
	return TCL_OK;

	/*
	 * 8-bit integer values.
	 */
    case 'c':
	if (TclGetLongFromObj(interp, src, &value) != TCL_OK) {
	    return TCL_ERROR;
	}
	*(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(value);
	return TCL_OK;

    default:
	Tcl_Panic("unexpected fallthrough");
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
}
................................................................................
	for (i=0 ; i<2 ; i++) {
	    if (data >= dataend) {
		value <<= 4;
		break;
	    }

	    c = *data++;
	    if (!isxdigit((int) c)) {
		if (strict || !isspace(c)) {
		    goto badChar;
		}
		i--;
		continue;
	    }

	    value <<= 4;
................................................................................

    while (data < dataend) {
	char d[4] = {0, 0, 0, 0};

	if (lineLen < 0) {
	    c = *data++;
	    if (c < 32 || c > 96) {
		if (strict || !isspace(c)) {
		    goto badUu;
		}
		i--;
		continue;
	    }
	    lineLen = (c - 32) & 0x3f;
	}
................................................................................
	 */

	for (i=0 ; i<4 ; i++) {
	    if (data < dataend) {
		d[i] = c = *data++;
		if (c < 32 || c > 96) {
		    if (strict) {
			if (!isspace(c)) {
			    goto badUu;
			} else if (c == '\n') {
			    goto shortUu;
			}
		    }
		    i--;
		    continue;
................................................................................
	    do {
		c = *data++;
		if (c == '\n') {
		    break;
		} else if (c >= 32 && c <= 96) {
		    data--;
		    break;
		} else if (strict || !isspace(c)) {
		    goto badUu;
		}
	    } while (data < dataend);
	}
    }

    /*
................................................................................
	     * input whitespace characters.
	     */

	    if (cut) {
		if (c == '=' && i > 1) {
		     value <<= 6;
		     cut++;
		} else if (!strict && isspace(c)) {
		     i--;
		} else {
		    goto bad64;
		}
	    } else if (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z') {
		value = (value << 6) | ((c - 'A') & 0x3f);
	    } else if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z') {
................................................................................
	    } else if (c == '+') {
		value = (value << 6) | 0x3e;
	    } else if (c == '/') {
		value = (value << 6) | 0x3f;
	    } else if (c == '=') {
		value <<= 6;
		cut++;
	    } else if (strict || !isspace(c)) {
		goto bad64;
	    } else {
		i--;
	    }
	}
	*cursor++ = UCHAR((value >> 16) & 0xff);
	*cursor++ = UCHAR((value >> 8) & 0xff);
................................................................................
	 */

	if (cut && data < dataend) {
	    if (strict) {
		goto bad64;
	    }
	    for (; data < dataend; data++) {
		if (!isspace(*data)) {
		    goto bad64;
		}
	    }
	}
    }
    Tcl_SetByteArrayLength(resultObj, cursor - begin - cut);
    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);

FormatNumber(
    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter, used to report
				 * errors. */
    int type,			/* Type of number to format. */
    Tcl_Obj *src,		/* Number to format. */
    unsigned char **cursorPtr)	/* Pointer to index into destination buffer. */
{

    double dvalue;
    Tcl_WideInt wvalue;
    float fvalue;

    switch (type) {
    case 'd':
    case 'q':
................................................................................

	/*
	 * 64-bit integer values.
	 */
    case 'w':
    case 'W':
    case 'm':
	if (TclGetWideBitsFromObj(interp, src, &wvalue) != TCL_OK) {
	    return TCL_ERROR;
	}
	if (NeedReversing(type)) {
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue >> 8);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue >> 16);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue >> 24);
................................................................................

	/*
	 * 32-bit integer values.
	 */
    case 'i':
    case 'I':
    case 'n':
	if (TclGetWideBitsFromObj(interp, src, &wvalue) != TCL_OK) {
	    return TCL_ERROR;
	}
	if (NeedReversing(type)) {
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue >> 8);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue >> 16);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue >> 24);
	} else {
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue >> 24);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue >> 16);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue >> 8);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue);
	}
	return TCL_OK;

	/*
	 * 16-bit integer values.
	 */
    case 's':
    case 'S':
    case 't':
	if (TclGetWideBitsFromObj(interp, src, &wvalue) != TCL_OK) {
	    return TCL_ERROR;
	}
	if (NeedReversing(type)) {
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue >> 8);
	} else {
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue >> 8);
	    *(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue);
	}
	return TCL_OK;

	/*
	 * 8-bit integer values.
	 */
    case 'c':
	if (TclGetWideBitsFromObj(interp, src, &wvalue) != TCL_OK) {
	    return TCL_ERROR;
	}
	*(*cursorPtr)++ = UCHAR(wvalue);
	return TCL_OK;

    default:
	Tcl_Panic("unexpected fallthrough");
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
}
................................................................................
	for (i=0 ; i<2 ; i++) {
	    if (data >= dataend) {
		value <<= 4;
		break;
	    }

	    c = *data++;
	    if (!isxdigit(UCHAR(c))) {
		if (strict || !TclIsSpaceProc(c)) {
		    goto badChar;
		}
		i--;
		continue;
	    }

	    value <<= 4;
................................................................................

    while (data < dataend) {
	char d[4] = {0, 0, 0, 0};

	if (lineLen < 0) {
	    c = *data++;
	    if (c < 32 || c > 96) {
		if (strict || !TclIsSpaceProc(c)) {
		    goto badUu;
		}
		i--;
		continue;
	    }
	    lineLen = (c - 32) & 0x3f;
	}
................................................................................
	 */

	for (i=0 ; i<4 ; i++) {
	    if (data < dataend) {
		d[i] = c = *data++;
		if (c < 32 || c > 96) {
		    if (strict) {
			if (!TclIsSpaceProc(c)) {
			    goto badUu;
			} else if (c == '\n') {
			    goto shortUu;
			}
		    }
		    i--;
		    continue;
................................................................................
	    do {
		c = *data++;
		if (c == '\n') {
		    break;
		} else if (c >= 32 && c <= 96) {
		    data--;
		    break;
		} else if (strict || !TclIsSpaceProc(c)) {
		    goto badUu;
		}
	    } while (data < dataend);
	}
    }

    /*
................................................................................
	     * input whitespace characters.
	     */

	    if (cut) {
		if (c == '=' && i > 1) {
		     value <<= 6;
		     cut++;
		} else if (!strict && TclIsSpaceProc(c)) {
		     i--;
		} else {
		    goto bad64;
		}
	    } else if (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z') {
		value = (value << 6) | ((c - 'A') & 0x3f);
	    } else if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z') {
................................................................................
	    } else if (c == '+') {
		value = (value << 6) | 0x3e;
	    } else if (c == '/') {
		value = (value << 6) | 0x3f;
	    } else if (c == '=') {
		value <<= 6;
		cut++;
	    } else if (strict || !TclIsSpaceProc(c)) {
		goto bad64;
	    } else {
		i--;
	    }
	}
	*cursor++ = UCHAR((value >> 16) & 0xff);
	*cursor++ = UCHAR((value >> 8) & 0xff);
................................................................................
	 */

	if (cut && data < dataend) {
	    if (strict) {
		goto bad64;
	    }
	    for (; data < dataend; data++) {
		if (!TclIsSpaceProc(*data)) {
		    goto bad64;
		}
	    }
	}
    }
    Tcl_SetByteArrayLength(resultObj, cursor - begin - cut);
    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, resultObj);

/*
 * Prototypes for local procedures defined in this file:
 */

static int		CheckAccess(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *pathPtr,
			    int mode);
static int		BadEncodingSubcommand(ClientData dummy,
			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int		EncodingConvertfromObjCmd(ClientData dummy,
			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int		EncodingConverttoObjCmd(ClientData dummy,
			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int		EncodingDirsObjCmd(ClientData dummy,
................................................................................
static Tcl_NRPostProc	ForSetupCallback;
static Tcl_NRPostProc	ForCondCallback;
static Tcl_NRPostProc	ForNextCallback;
static Tcl_NRPostProc	ForPostNextCallback;
static Tcl_NRPostProc	ForeachLoopStep;
static Tcl_NRPostProc	EvalCmdErrMsg;

static Tcl_ObjCmdProc	BadFileSubcommand;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc FileAttrAccessTimeCmd;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc FileAttrIsDirectoryCmd;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc FileAttrIsExecutableCmd;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc FileAttrIsExistingCmd;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc FileAttrIsFileCmd;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc FileAttrIsOwnedCmd;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc FileAttrIsReadableCmd;
................................................................................
{
    if (objc != 1) {
	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, NULL);
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
    return TCL_CONTINUE;
}
 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * Tcl_EncodingObjCmd --
 *
 *	This command manipulates encodings.
 *
 * Results:
 *	A standard Tcl result.
 *
 * Side effects:
 *	See the user documentation.
 *
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 */

int
Tcl_EncodingObjCmd(
    ClientData dummy,		/* Not used. */
    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
{
    int index;

    static const char *const optionStrings[] = {
	"convertfrom", "convertto", "dirs", "names", "system",
	NULL
    };
    enum options {
	ENC_CONVERTFROM, ENC_CONVERTTO, ENC_DIRS, ENC_NAMES, ENC_SYSTEM
    };

    if (objc < 2) {
	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg ...?");
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], optionStrings, "option", 0,
	    &index) != TCL_OK) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }

    switch ((enum options) index) {
    case ENC_CONVERTTO:
	return EncodingConverttoObjCmd(dummy, interp, objc, objv);
    case ENC_CONVERTFROM:
	return EncodingConvertfromObjCmd(dummy, interp, objc, objv);
    case ENC_DIRS:
	return EncodingDirsObjCmd(dummy, interp, objc, objv);
    case ENC_NAMES:
	return EncodingNamesObjCmd(dummy, interp, objc, objv);
    case ENC_SYSTEM:
	return EncodingSystemObjCmd(dummy, interp, objc, objv);
    }
    return TCL_OK;
}
 
/*
 *-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * TclInitEncodingCmd --
 *
 *	This function creates the 'encoding' ensemble.
................................................................................
Tcl_Command
TclInitEncodingCmd(
    Tcl_Interp* interp)		/* Tcl interpreter */
{
    static const EnsembleImplMap encodingImplMap[] = {
	{"convertfrom", EncodingConvertfromObjCmd, TclCompileBasic1Or2ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"convertto",   EncodingConverttoObjCmd,   TclCompileBasic1Or2ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"dirs",        EncodingDirsObjCmd,        TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"names",       EncodingNamesObjCmd,       TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd,    NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"system",      EncodingSystemObjCmd,      TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{NULL,          NULL,                      NULL,                      NULL, NULL, 0}
    };

    return TclMakeEnsemble(interp, "encoding", encodingImplMap);
}
 
/*
 *-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * TclMakeEncodingCommandSafe --
 *
 *	This function hides the unsafe 'dirs' and 'system' subcommands of
 *	the "encoding" Tcl command ensemble. It must be called only from
 *	TclHideUnsafeCommands.
 *
 * Results:
 *	A standard Tcl result
 *
 * Side effects:
 *	Adds commands to the table of hidden commands.
 *
 *-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 */

int
TclMakeEncodingCommandSafe(
    Tcl_Interp* interp)		/* Tcl interpreter */
{
    static const struct {
	const char *cmdName;
	int unsafe;
    } unsafeInfo[] = {
	{"convertfrom", 0},
	{"convertto",   0},
	{"dirs",        1},
	{"names",       0},
	{"system",      0},
	{NULL,          0}
    };

    int i;
    Tcl_DString oldBuf, newBuf;

    Tcl_DStringInit(&oldBuf);
    TclDStringAppendLiteral(&oldBuf, "::tcl::encoding::");
    Tcl_DStringInit(&newBuf);
    TclDStringAppendLiteral(&newBuf, "tcl:encoding:");
    for (i=0 ; unsafeInfo[i].cmdName != NULL ; i++) {
	if (unsafeInfo[i].unsafe) {
	    const char *oldName, *newName;

	    Tcl_DStringSetLength(&oldBuf, 17);
	    oldName = Tcl_DStringAppend(&oldBuf, unsafeInfo[i].cmdName, -1);
	    Tcl_DStringSetLength(&newBuf, 13);
	    newName = Tcl_DStringAppend(&newBuf, unsafeInfo[i].cmdName, -1);
	    if (TclRenameCommand(interp, oldName, "___tmp") != TCL_OK
		    || Tcl_HideCommand(interp, "___tmp", newName) != TCL_OK) {
		Tcl_Panic("problem making 'encoding %s' safe: %s",
			unsafeInfo[i].cmdName,
			Tcl_GetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)));
	    }
	    Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, oldName, BadEncodingSubcommand,
		    (ClientData) unsafeInfo[i].cmdName, NULL);
	}
    }
    Tcl_DStringFree(&oldBuf);
    Tcl_DStringFree(&newBuf);

    /*
     * Ugh. The [encoding] command is now actually safe, but it is assumed by
     * scripts that it is not, which messes up security policies.
     */

    if (Tcl_HideCommand(interp, "encoding", "encoding") != TCL_OK) {
	Tcl_Panic("problem making 'encoding' safe: %s",
		Tcl_GetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)));
    }
    return TCL_OK;
}
 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * BadEncodingSubcommand --
 *
 *	Command used to act as a backstop implementation when subcommands of
 *	"encoding" are unsafe (the real implementations of the subcommands are
 *	hidden). The clientData is always the full official subcommand name.
 *
 * Results:
 *	A standard Tcl result (always a TCL_ERROR).
 *
 * Side effects:
 *	None.
 *
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 */

static int
BadEncodingSubcommand(
    ClientData clientData,
    Tcl_Interp *interp,
    int objc,
    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
{
    const char *subcommandName = (const char *) clientData;

    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
	    "not allowed to invoke subcommand %s of encoding", subcommandName));
    Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TCL", "SAFE", "SUBCOMMAND", NULL);
    return TCL_ERROR;
}
 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * EncodingConvertfromObjCmd --
 *
 *	This command converts a byte array in an external encoding into a
................................................................................
    /*
     * Note that most subcommands are unsafe because either they manipulate
     * the native filesystem or because they reveal information about the
     * native filesystem.
     */

    static const EnsembleImplMap initMap[] = {
	{"atime",	FileAttrAccessTimeCmd,	TclCompileBasic1Or2ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"attributes",	TclFileAttrsCmd,	NULL, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"channels",	TclChannelNamesCmd,	TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"copy",	TclFileCopyCmd,		NULL, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"delete",	TclFileDeleteCmd,	TclCompileBasicMin0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"dirname",	PathDirNameCmd,		TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"executable",	FileAttrIsExecutableCmd, TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"exists",	FileAttrIsExistingCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"extension",	PathExtensionCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"isdirectory",	FileAttrIsDirectoryCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"isfile",	FileAttrIsFileCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"join",	PathJoinCmd,		TclCompileBasicMin1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"link",	TclFileLinkCmd,		TclCompileBasic1To3ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"lstat",	FileAttrLinkStatCmd,	TclCompileBasic2ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"mtime",	FileAttrModifyTimeCmd,	TclCompileBasic1Or2ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"mkdir",	TclFileMakeDirsCmd,	TclCompileBasicMin0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"nativename",	PathNativeNameCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"normalize",	PathNormalizeCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"owned",	FileAttrIsOwnedCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"pathtype",	PathTypeCmd,		TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"readable",	FileAttrIsReadableCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"readlink",	TclFileReadLinkCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"rename",	TclFileRenameCmd,	NULL, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"rootname",	PathRootNameCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"separator",	FilesystemSeparatorCmd,	TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"size",	FileAttrSizeCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"split",	PathSplitCmd,		TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"stat",	FileAttrStatCmd,	TclCompileBasic2ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"system",	PathFilesystemCmd,	TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"tail",	PathTailCmd,		TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"tempfile",	TclFileTemporaryCmd,	TclCompileBasic0To2ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"type",	FileAttrTypeCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"volumes",	FilesystemVolumesCmd,	TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"writable",	FileAttrIsWritableCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0}
    };
    return TclMakeEnsemble(interp, "file", initMap);
}
 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * TclMakeFileCommandSafe --
 *
 *	This function hides the unsafe subcommands of the "file" Tcl command
 *	ensemble. It must only be called from TclHideUnsafeCommands.
 *
 * Results:
 *	A standard Tcl result.
 *
 * Side effects:
 *	Adds commands to the table of hidden commands.
 *
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 */

int
TclMakeFileCommandSafe(
    Tcl_Interp *interp)
{
    static const struct {
	const char *cmdName;
	int unsafe;
    } unsafeInfo[] = {
	{"atime",	 1},
	{"attributes",	 1},
	{"channels",	 0},
	{"copy",	 1},
	{"delete",	 1},
	{"dirname",	 1},
	{"executable",	 1},
	{"exists",	 1},
	{"extension",	 1},
	{"isdirectory",	 1},
	{"isfile",	 1},
	{"join",	 0},
	{"link",	 1},
	{"lstat",	 1},
	{"mtime",	 1},
	{"mkdir",	 1},
	{"nativename",	 1},
	{"normalize",	 1},
	{"owned",	 1},
	{"pathtype",	 0},
	{"readable",	 1},
	{"readlink",	 1},
	{"rename",	 1},
	{"rootname",	 1},
	{"separator",	 0},
	{"size",	 1},
	{"split",	 0},
	{"stat",	 1},
	{"system",	 0},
	{"tail",	 1},
	{"tempfile",	 1},
	{"type",	 1},
	{"volumes",	 1},
	{"writable",	 1},
	{NULL, 0}
    };
    int i;
    Tcl_DString oldBuf, newBuf;

    Tcl_DStringInit(&oldBuf);
    TclDStringAppendLiteral(&oldBuf, "::tcl::file::");
    Tcl_DStringInit(&newBuf);
    TclDStringAppendLiteral(&newBuf, "tcl:file:");
    for (i=0 ; unsafeInfo[i].cmdName != NULL ; i++) {
	if (unsafeInfo[i].unsafe) {
	    const char *oldName, *newName;

	    Tcl_DStringSetLength(&oldBuf, 13);
	    oldName = Tcl_DStringAppend(&oldBuf, unsafeInfo[i].cmdName, -1);
	    Tcl_DStringSetLength(&newBuf, 9);
	    newName = Tcl_DStringAppend(&newBuf, unsafeInfo[i].cmdName, -1);
	    if (TclRenameCommand(interp, oldName, "___tmp") != TCL_OK
		    || Tcl_HideCommand(interp, "___tmp", newName) != TCL_OK) {
		Tcl_Panic("problem making 'file %s' safe: %s",
			unsafeInfo[i].cmdName,
			Tcl_GetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)));
	    }
	    Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, oldName, BadFileSubcommand,
		    (ClientData) unsafeInfo[i].cmdName, NULL);
	}
    }
    Tcl_DStringFree(&oldBuf);
    Tcl_DStringFree(&newBuf);

    /*
     * Ugh. The [file] command is now actually safe, but it is assumed by
     * scripts that it is not, which messes up security policies. [Bug
     * 3211758]
     */

    if (Tcl_HideCommand(interp, "file", "file") != TCL_OK) {
	Tcl_Panic("problem making 'file' safe: %s",
		Tcl_GetString(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp)));
    }
    return TCL_OK;
}
 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * BadFileSubcommand --
 *
 *	Command used to act as a backstop implementation when subcommands of
 *	"file" are unsafe (the real implementations of the subcommands are
 *	hidden). The clientData is always the full official subcommand name.
 *
 * Results:
 *	A standard Tcl result (always a TCL_ERROR).
 *
 * Side effects:
 *	None.
 *
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 */

static int
BadFileSubcommand(
    ClientData clientData,
    Tcl_Interp *interp,
    int objc,
    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])
{
    const char *subcommandName = (const char *) clientData;

    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
	    "not allowed to invoke subcommand %s of file", subcommandName));
    Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TCL", "SAFE", "SUBCOMMAND", NULL);
    return TCL_ERROR;
}
 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * FileAttrAccessTimeCmd --
 *
 *	This function is invoked to process the "file atime" Tcl command. See
................................................................................

    if (objc == 3) {
	/*
	 * Need separate variable for reading longs from an object on 64-bit
	 * platforms. [Bug 698146]
	 */

	long newTime;

	if (TclGetLongFromObj(interp, objv[2], &newTime) != TCL_OK) {
	    return TCL_ERROR;
	}

	tval.actime = newTime;
	tval.modtime = buf.st_mtime;

	if (Tcl_FSUtime(objv[1], &tval) != 0) {
................................................................................
#endif
    if (objc == 3) {
	/*
	 * Need separate variable for reading longs from an object on 64-bit
	 * platforms. [Bug 698146]
	 */

	long newTime;

	if (TclGetLongFromObj(interp, objv[2], &newTime) != TCL_OK) {
	    return TCL_ERROR;
	}

	tval.actime = buf.st_atime;
	tval.modtime = newTime;

	if (Tcl_FSUtime(objv[1], &tval) != 0) {

/*
 * Prototypes for local procedures defined in this file:
 */

static int		CheckAccess(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *pathPtr,
			    int mode);



static int		EncodingConvertfromObjCmd(ClientData dummy,
			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int		EncodingConverttoObjCmd(ClientData dummy,
			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
			    Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int		EncodingDirsObjCmd(ClientData dummy,
................................................................................
static Tcl_NRPostProc	ForSetupCallback;
static Tcl_NRPostProc	ForCondCallback;
static Tcl_NRPostProc	ForNextCallback;
static Tcl_NRPostProc	ForPostNextCallback;
static Tcl_NRPostProc	ForeachLoopStep;
static Tcl_NRPostProc	EvalCmdErrMsg;


static Tcl_ObjCmdProc FileAttrAccessTimeCmd;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc FileAttrIsDirectoryCmd;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc FileAttrIsExecutableCmd;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc FileAttrIsExistingCmd;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc FileAttrIsFileCmd;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc FileAttrIsOwnedCmd;
static Tcl_ObjCmdProc FileAttrIsReadableCmd;
................................................................................
{
    if (objc != 1) {
	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, NULL);
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
    return TCL_CONTINUE;
}

























































 
/*
 *-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * TclInitEncodingCmd --
 *
 *	This function creates the 'encoding' ensemble.
................................................................................
Tcl_Command
TclInitEncodingCmd(
    Tcl_Interp* interp)		/* Tcl interpreter */
{
    static const EnsembleImplMap encodingImplMap[] = {
	{"convertfrom", EncodingConvertfromObjCmd, TclCompileBasic1Or2ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"convertto",   EncodingConverttoObjCmd,   TclCompileBasic1Or2ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"dirs",        EncodingDirsObjCmd,        TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"names",       EncodingNamesObjCmd,       TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd,    NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"system",      EncodingSystemObjCmd,      TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{NULL,          NULL,                      NULL,                      NULL, NULL, 0}
    };

    return TclMakeEnsemble(interp, "encoding", encodingImplMap);
}











































































































 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * EncodingConvertfromObjCmd --
 *
 *	This command converts a byte array in an external encoding into a
................................................................................
    /*
     * Note that most subcommands are unsafe because either they manipulate
     * the native filesystem or because they reveal information about the
     * native filesystem.
     */

    static const EnsembleImplMap initMap[] = {
	{"atime",	FileAttrAccessTimeCmd,	TclCompileBasic1Or2ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"attributes",	TclFileAttrsCmd,	NULL, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"channels",	TclChannelNamesCmd,	TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"copy",	TclFileCopyCmd,		NULL, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"delete",	TclFileDeleteCmd,	TclCompileBasicMin0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"dirname",	PathDirNameCmd,		TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"executable",	FileAttrIsExecutableCmd, TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"exists",	FileAttrIsExistingCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"extension",	PathExtensionCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"isdirectory",	FileAttrIsDirectoryCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"isfile",	FileAttrIsFileCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"join",	PathJoinCmd,		TclCompileBasicMin1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"link",	TclFileLinkCmd,		TclCompileBasic1To3ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"lstat",	FileAttrLinkStatCmd,	TclCompileBasic2ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"mtime",	FileAttrModifyTimeCmd,	TclCompileBasic1Or2ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"mkdir",	TclFileMakeDirsCmd,	TclCompileBasicMin0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"nativename",	PathNativeNameCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"normalize",	PathNormalizeCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"owned",	FileAttrIsOwnedCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"pathtype",	PathTypeCmd,		TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"readable",	FileAttrIsReadableCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"readlink",	TclFileReadLinkCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"rename",	TclFileRenameCmd,	NULL, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"rootname",	PathRootNameCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"separator",	FilesystemSeparatorCmd,	TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"size",	FileAttrSizeCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"split",	PathSplitCmd,		TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"stat",	FileAttrStatCmd,	TclCompileBasic2ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"system",	PathFilesystemCmd,	TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
	{"tail",	PathTailCmd,		TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"tempfile",	TclFileTemporaryCmd,	TclCompileBasic0To2ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"type",	FileAttrTypeCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"volumes",	FilesystemVolumesCmd,	TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{"writable",	FileAttrIsWritableCmd,	TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
	{NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0}
    };
    return TclMakeEnsemble(interp, "file", initMap);
}







































































































































 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * FileAttrAccessTimeCmd --
 *
 *	This function is invoked to process the "file atime" Tcl command. See
................................................................................

    if (objc == 3) {
	/*
	 * Need separate variable for reading longs from an object on 64-bit
	 * platforms. [Bug 698146]
	 */

	Tcl_WideInt newTime;

	if (TclGetWideIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &newTime) != TCL_OK) {
	    return TCL_ERROR;
	}

	tval.actime = newTime;
	tval.modtime = buf.st_mtime;

	if (Tcl_FSUtime(objv[1], &tval) != 0) {
................................................................................
#endif
    if (objc == 3) {
	/*
	 * Need separate variable for reading longs from an object on 64-bit
	 * platforms. [Bug 698146]
	 */

	Tcl_WideInt newTime;

	if (TclGetWideIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &newTime) != TCL_OK) {
	    return TCL_ERROR;
	}

	tval.actime = buf.st_atime;
	tval.modtime = newTime;

	if (Tcl_FSUtime(objv[1], &tval) != 0) {

static int		InfoPatchLevelCmd(ClientData dummy, Tcl_Interp *interp,
			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int		InfoProcsCmd(ClientData dummy, Tcl_Interp *interp,
			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int		InfoScriptCmd(ClientData dummy, Tcl_Interp *interp,
			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int		InfoSharedlibCmd(ClientData dummy, Tcl_Interp *interp,


			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int		InfoTclVersionCmd(ClientData dummy, Tcl_Interp *interp,
			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static SortElement *	MergeLists(SortElement *leftPtr, SortElement *rightPtr,
			    SortInfo *infoPtr);
static int		SortCompare(SortElement *firstPtr, SortElement *second,
			    SortInfo *infoPtr);
................................................................................
 * "info" command.
 */

static const EnsembleImplMap defaultInfoMap[] = {
    {"args",		   InfoArgsCmd,		    TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"body",		   InfoBodyCmd,		    TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"cmdcount",	   InfoCmdCountCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},

    {"commands",	   InfoCommandsCmd,	    TclCompileInfoCommandsCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"complete",	   InfoCompleteCmd,	    TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"coroutine",	   TclInfoCoroutineCmd,     TclCompileInfoCoroutineCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"default",		   InfoDefaultCmd,	    TclCompileBasic3ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"errorstack",	   InfoErrorStackCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"exists",		   TclInfoExistsCmd,	    TclCompileInfoExistsCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"frame",		   InfoFrameCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
................................................................................
    {"functions",	   InfoFunctionsCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"globals",		   TclInfoGlobalsCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"hostname",	   InfoHostnameCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"level",		   InfoLevelCmd,	    TclCompileInfoLevelCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"library",		   InfoLibraryCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"loaded",		   InfoLoadedCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"locals",		   TclInfoLocalsCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"nameofexecutable",   InfoNameOfExecutableCmd, TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"patchlevel",	   InfoPatchLevelCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"procs",		   InfoProcsCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"script",		   InfoScriptCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"sharedlibextension", InfoSharedlibCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"tclversion",	   InfoTclVersionCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"vars",		   TclInfoVarsCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0}
................................................................................
    }
    return TCL_ERROR;
}
 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *






















































 * Tcl_JoinObjCmd --
 *
 *	This procedure is invoked to process the "join" Tcl command. See the
 *	user documentation for details on what it does.
 *
 * Results:
 *	A standard Tcl object result.
................................................................................
    if (result != TCL_OK) {
	return result;
    }

    if (first < 0) {
	first = 0;
    }



    /*
     * Complain if the user asked for a start element that is greater than the
     * list length. This won't ever trigger for the "end-*" case as that will
     * be properly constrained by TclGetIntForIndex because we use listLen-1
     * (to allow for replacing the last elem).
     */

    if ((first >= listLen) && (listLen > 0)) {
	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
		"list doesn't contain element %s", TclGetString(objv[2])));
	Tcl_SetErrorCode(interp, "TCL", "OPERATION", "LREPLACE", "BADIDX",
		NULL);
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
    if (last >= listLen) {
	last = listLen - 1;
    }
    if (first <= last) {
	numToDelete = last - first + 1;
    } else {
	numToDelete = 0;
................................................................................
	/*
	 * If the data is sorted, we can do a more intelligent search. Note
	 * that there is no point in being smart when -all was specified; in
	 * that case, we have to look at all items anyway, and there is no
	 * sense in doing this when the match sense is inverted.
	 */

	/* 
	 * With -stride, lower, upper and i are kept as multiples of groupSize.
	 */

	lower = start - groupSize;
	upper = listc;
	while (lower + groupSize != upper && sortInfo.resultCode == TCL_OK) {
	    i = (lower + upper)/2;
................................................................................
		sortInfo.indexv = NULL;
	    } else {
		sortInfo.indexc--;

		/*
		 * Do not shrink the actual memory block used; that doesn't
		 * work with TclStackAlloc-allocated memory. [Bug 2918962]
		 * 
		 * TODO: Consider a pointer increment to replace this
		 * array shift.
		 */

		for (i = 0; i < sortInfo.indexc; i++) {
		    sortInfo.indexv[i] = sortInfo.indexv[i+1];
		}

static int		InfoPatchLevelCmd(ClientData dummy, Tcl_Interp *interp,
			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int		InfoProcsCmd(ClientData dummy, Tcl_Interp *interp,
			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int		InfoScriptCmd(ClientData dummy, Tcl_Interp *interp,
			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int		InfoSharedlibCmd(ClientData dummy, Tcl_Interp *interp,
			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int		InfoCmdTypeCmd(ClientData dummy, Tcl_Interp *interp,
			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static int		InfoTclVersionCmd(ClientData dummy, Tcl_Interp *interp,
			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]);
static SortElement *	MergeLists(SortElement *leftPtr, SortElement *rightPtr,
			    SortInfo *infoPtr);
static int		SortCompare(SortElement *firstPtr, SortElement *second,
			    SortInfo *infoPtr);
................................................................................
 * "info" command.
 */

static const EnsembleImplMap defaultInfoMap[] = {
    {"args",		   InfoArgsCmd,		    TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"body",		   InfoBodyCmd,		    TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"cmdcount",	   InfoCmdCountCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"cmdtype",		   InfoCmdTypeCmd,	    TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
    {"commands",	   InfoCommandsCmd,	    TclCompileInfoCommandsCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"complete",	   InfoCompleteCmd,	    TclCompileBasic1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"coroutine",	   TclInfoCoroutineCmd,     TclCompileInfoCoroutineCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"default",		   InfoDefaultCmd,	    TclCompileBasic3ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"errorstack",	   InfoErrorStackCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"exists",		   TclInfoExistsCmd,	    TclCompileInfoExistsCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"frame",		   InfoFrameCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
................................................................................
    {"functions",	   InfoFunctionsCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"globals",		   TclInfoGlobalsCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"hostname",	   InfoHostnameCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"level",		   InfoLevelCmd,	    TclCompileInfoLevelCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"library",		   InfoLibraryCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"loaded",		   InfoLoadedCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"locals",		   TclInfoLocalsCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"nameofexecutable",   InfoNameOfExecutableCmd, TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 1},
    {"patchlevel",	   InfoPatchLevelCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"procs",		   InfoProcsCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"script",		   InfoScriptCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"sharedlibextension", InfoSharedlibCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"tclversion",	   InfoTclVersionCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {"vars",		   TclInfoVarsCmd,	    TclCompileBasic0Or1ArgCmd, NULL, NULL, 0},
    {NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, 0}
................................................................................
    }
    return TCL_ERROR;
}
 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * InfoCmdTypeCmd --
 *
 *	Called to implement the "info cmdtype" command that returns the type
 *	of a given command. Handles the following syntax:
 *
 *	    info cmdtype cmdName
 *
 * Results:
 *	Returns TCL_OK if successful and TCL_ERROR if there is an error.
 *
 * Side effects:
 *	Returns a type name. If there is an error, the result is an error
 *	message.
 *
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 */

static int
InfoCmdTypeCmd(
    ClientData dummy,		/* Not used. */
    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* Current interpreter. */
    int objc,			/* Number of arguments. */
    Tcl_Obj *const objv[])	/* Argument objects. */
{
    Tcl_Command command;

    if (objc != 2) {
	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "commandName");
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
    command = Tcl_FindCommand(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), NULL,
	    TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG);
    if (command == NULL) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }

    /*
     * There's one special case: safe slave interpreters can't see aliases as
     * aliases as they're part of the security mechanisms.
     */

    if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)
	    && (((Command *) command)->objProc == TclAliasObjCmd)) {
	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "native", NULL);
    } else {
	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
		Tcl_NewStringObj(TclGetCommandTypeName(command), -1));
    }
    return TCL_OK;
}
 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * Tcl_JoinObjCmd --
 *
 *	This procedure is invoked to process the "join" Tcl command. See the
 *	user documentation for details on what it does.
 *
 * Results:
 *	A standard Tcl object result.
................................................................................
    if (result != TCL_OK) {
	return result;
    }

    if (first < 0) {
	first = 0;
    }
    if (first > listLen) {
	first = listLen;
    }














    if (last >= listLen) {
	last = listLen - 1;
    }
    if (first <= last) {
	numToDelete = last - first + 1;
    } else {
	numToDelete = 0;
................................................................................
	/*
	 * If the data is sorted, we can do a more intelligent search. Note
	 * that there is no point in being smart when -all was specified; in
	 * that case, we have to look at all items anyway, and there is no
	 * sense in doing this when the match sense is inverted.
	 */

	/*
	 * With -stride, lower, upper and i are kept as multiples of groupSize.
	 */

	lower = start - groupSize;
	upper = listc;
	while (lower + groupSize != upper && sortInfo.resultCode == TCL_OK) {
	    i = (lower + upper)/2;
................................................................................
		sortInfo.indexv = NULL;
	    } else {
		sortInfo.indexc--;

		/*
		 * Do not shrink the actual memory block used; that doesn't
		 * work with TclStackAlloc-allocated memory. [Bug 2918962]
		 *
		 * TODO: Consider a pointer increment to replace this
		 * array shift.
		 */

		for (i = 0; i < sortInfo.indexc; i++) {
		    sortInfo.indexv[i] = sortInfo.indexv[i+1];
		}

     * regexp to avoid shimmering problems.
     */

    objPtr = objv[1];
    stringLength = Tcl_GetCharLength(objPtr);

    if (startIndex) {
	TclGetIntForIndexM(NULL, startIndex, stringLength, &offset);
	Tcl_DecrRefCount(startIndex);
	if (offset < 0) {
	    offset = 0;
	}
    }

    regExpr = Tcl_GetRegExpFromObj(interp, objv[0], cflags);
................................................................................

    objc -= idx;
    objv += idx;

    if (startIndex) {
	int stringLength = Tcl_GetCharLength(objv[1]);

	TclGetIntForIndexM(NULL, startIndex, stringLength, &offset);
	Tcl_DecrRefCount(startIndex);
	if (offset < 0) {
	    offset = 0;
	}
    }

    if (all && (offset == 0) && (command == 0)
................................................................................
	    unsigned char uch = (unsigned char) ch;

	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewByteArrayObj(&uch, 1));
	} else {
	    char buf[4];

	    length = Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, buf);



	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(buf, length));
	}
    }
    return TCL_OK;
}
 
/*
................................................................................
	}
	break;
    }
    case STR_IS_GRAPH:
	chcomp = Tcl_UniCharIsGraph;
	break;
    case STR_IS_INT:
	if (TCL_OK == TclGetIntFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &i)) {
	    break;
	}
	goto failedIntParse;
    case STR_IS_ENTIER:
	if ((objPtr->typePtr == &tclIntType) ||
		(objPtr->typePtr == &tclBignumType)) {
	    break;
	}
	string1 = TclGetStringFromObj(objPtr, &length1);
	if (length1 == 0) {
................................................................................
	}
	break;
    case STR_IS_WIDE:
	if (TCL_OK == TclGetWideIntFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &w)) {
	    break;
	}

    failedIntParse:
	string1 = TclGetStringFromObj(objPtr, &length1);
	if (length1 == 0) {
	    if (strict) {
		result = 0;
	    }
	    goto str_is_done;
	}
................................................................................
    return (character >= 0) && (character < 0x80);
}

static int
UniCharIsHexDigit(
    int character)
{
    return (character >= 0) && (character < 0x80) && isxdigit(character);
}
 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * StringMapCmd --
 *

     * regexp to avoid shimmering problems.
     */

    objPtr = objv[1];
    stringLength = Tcl_GetCharLength(objPtr);

    if (startIndex) {
	TclGetIntForIndexM(interp, startIndex, stringLength, &offset);
	Tcl_DecrRefCount(startIndex);
	if (offset < 0) {
	    offset = 0;
	}
    }

    regExpr = Tcl_GetRegExpFromObj(interp, objv[0], cflags);
................................................................................

    objc -= idx;
    objv += idx;

    if (startIndex) {
	int stringLength = Tcl_GetCharLength(objv[1]);

	TclGetIntForIndexM(interp, startIndex, stringLength, &offset);
	Tcl_DecrRefCount(startIndex);
	if (offset < 0) {
	    offset = 0;
	}
    }

    if (all && (offset == 0) && (command == 0)
................................................................................
	    unsigned char uch = (unsigned char) ch;

	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewByteArrayObj(&uch, 1));
	} else {
	    char buf[4];

	    length = Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, buf);
	    if (!length) {
		length = Tcl_UniCharToUtf(-1, buf);
	    }
	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewStringObj(buf, length));
	}
    }
    return TCL_OK;
}
 
/*
................................................................................
	}
	break;
    }
    case STR_IS_GRAPH:
	chcomp = Tcl_UniCharIsGraph;
	break;
    case STR_IS_INT:




    case STR_IS_ENTIER:
	if ((objPtr->typePtr == &tclIntType) ||
		(objPtr->typePtr == &tclBignumType)) {
	    break;
	}
	string1 = TclGetStringFromObj(objPtr, &length1);
	if (length1 == 0) {
................................................................................
	}
	break;
    case STR_IS_WIDE:
	if (TCL_OK == TclGetWideIntFromObj(NULL, objPtr, &w)) {
	    break;
	}


	string1 = TclGetStringFromObj(objPtr, &length1);
	if (length1 == 0) {
	    if (strict) {
		result = 0;
	    }
	    goto str_is_done;
	}
................................................................................
    return (character >= 0) && (character < 0x80);
}

static int
UniCharIsHexDigit(
    int character)
{
    return (character >= 0) && (character < 0x80) && isxdigit(UCHAR(character));
}
 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * StringMapCmd --
 *

 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * TclGetIndexFromToken --
 *
 *	Parse a token to determine if an index value is known at
 *	compile time. 
 *
 * Returns:
 *	TCL_OK if parsing succeeded, and TCL_ERROR if it failed.
 *
 * Side effects:
 *	When TCL_OK is returned, the encoded index value is written
 *	to *index.
................................................................................
				 * command. */
    Command *cmdPtr,		/* Points to defintion of command being
				 * compiled. */
    CompileEnv *envPtr)		/* Holds the resulting instructions. */
{
    Tcl_Token *tokenPtr, *listTokenPtr;
    DefineLineInformation;	/* TIP #280 */
    int idx1, idx2, i, offset, offset2;
    int emptyPrefix=1, suffixStart = 0;

    if (parsePtr->numWords < 4) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
    listTokenPtr = TokenAfter(parsePtr->tokenPtr);

................................................................................

    tokenPtr = TokenAfter(tokenPtr);
    if (TclGetIndexFromToken(tokenPtr, TCL_INDEX_BEFORE, TCL_INDEX_END,
	    &idx2) != TCL_OK) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }

    /*
     * idx1, idx2 are the conventional encoded forms of the tokens parsed
     * as all forms of index values.  Values of idx1 that come before the
     * list are treated the same as if they were the start of the list.
     * Values of idx2 that come after the list are treated the same as if
     * they were the end of the list.
     */

    if (idx1 == TCL_INDEX_AFTER) {
	/*
	 * [lreplace] treats idx1 value end+1 differently from end+2, etc.
	 * The operand encoding cannot distinguish them, so we must bail
	 * out to direct evaluation.
	 */
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }

    /*
     * General structure of the [lreplace] result is
     *		prefix replacement suffix
     * In a few cases we can predict various parts will be empty and
     * take advantage.
     *
     * The proper suffix begins with the greater of indices idx1 or
     * idx2 + 1. If we cannot tell at compile time which is greater,
     * we must defer to direct evaluation.
     */



    if (idx2 == TCL_INDEX_BEFORE) {
	suffixStart = idx1;
    } else if (idx2 == TCL_INDEX_END) {
	suffixStart = TCL_INDEX_AFTER;
    } else if (((idx2 < TCL_INDEX_END) && (idx1 <= TCL_INDEX_END))
	    || ((idx2 >= TCL_INDEX_START) && (idx1 >= TCL_INDEX_START))) {
	suffixStart = (idx1 > idx2 + 1) ? idx1 : idx2 + 1;
    } else {
................................................................................
	}

	/* Make a list of them... */
	TclEmitInstInt4(	INST_LIST, i - 4,		envPtr);

	emptyPrefix = 0;
    }
     
    /*
     * [lreplace] raises an error when idx1 points after the list, but
     * only when the list is not empty. This is maximum stupidity.
     *
     * TODO: TIP this nonsense away!
     */
    if (idx1 >= TCL_INDEX_START) {
	if (emptyPrefix) {
	    TclEmitOpcode(	INST_DUP,			envPtr);
	} else {
	    TclEmitInstInt4(	INST_OVER, 1,			envPtr);
	}
	TclEmitOpcode(		INST_LIST_LENGTH,		envPtr);
	TclEmitOpcode(		INST_DUP,			envPtr);
	offset = CurrentOffset(envPtr);
	TclEmitInstInt1(	INST_JUMP_FALSE1, 0,		envPtr);

	/* List is not empty */
	TclEmitPush(TclAddLiteralObj(envPtr, Tcl_NewIntObj(idx1),
							NULL),	envPtr);
	TclEmitOpcode(		INST_GT,			envPtr);
	offset2 = CurrentOffset(envPtr);
	TclEmitInstInt1(	INST_JUMP_TRUE1, 0,		envPtr);

	/* Idx1 >= list length ===> raise an error */
	TclEmitPush(TclAddLiteralObj(envPtr, Tcl_ObjPrintf(
		"list doesn't contain element %d", idx1), NULL), envPtr);
	CompileReturnInternal(envPtr, INST_RETURN_IMM, TCL_ERROR, 0,
		Tcl_ObjPrintf("-errorcode {TCL OPERATION LREPLACE BADIDX}"));
	TclStoreInt1AtPtr(CurrentOffset(envPtr) - offset,
		envPtr->codeStart + offset + 1);
	TclEmitOpcode(		INST_POP,			envPtr);
	TclStoreInt1AtPtr(CurrentOffset(envPtr) - offset2,
		envPtr->codeStart + offset2 + 1);
    }

    if ((idx1 == suffixStart) && (parsePtr->numWords == 4)) {
	/*
	 * This is a "no-op". Example: [lreplace {a b c} 2 0]
	 * We still do a list operation to get list-verification
	 * and canonicalization side effects.
	 */

 
/*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
 *
 * TclGetIndexFromToken --
 *
 *	Parse a token to determine if an index value is known at
 *	compile time.
 *
 * Returns:
 *	TCL_OK if parsing succeeded, and TCL_ERROR if it failed.
 *
 * Side effects:
 *	When TCL_OK is returned, the encoded index value is written
 *	to *index.
................................................................................
				 * command. */
    Command *cmdPtr,		/* Points to defintion of command being
				 * compiled. */
    CompileEnv *envPtr)		/* Holds the resulting instructions. */
{
    Tcl_Token *tokenPtr, *listTokenPtr;
    DefineLineInformation;	/* TIP #280 */
    int idx1, idx2, i;
    int emptyPrefix=1, suffixStart = 0;

    if (parsePtr->numWords < 4) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
    listTokenPtr = TokenAfter(parsePtr->tokenPtr);

................................................................................

    tokenPtr = TokenAfter(tokenPtr);
    if (TclGetIndexFromToken(tokenPtr, TCL_INDEX_BEFORE, TCL_INDEX_END,
	    &idx2) != TCL_OK) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }


















    /*
     * General structure of the [lreplace] result is
     *		prefix replacement suffix
     * In a few cases we can predict various parts will be empty and
     * take advantage.
     *
     * The proper suffix begins with the greater of indices idx1 or
     * idx2 + 1. If we cannot tell at compile time which is greater,
     * we must defer to direct evaluation.
     */

    if (idx1 == TCL_INDEX_AFTER) {
	suffixStart = idx1;
    } else if (idx2 == TCL_INDEX_BEFORE) {
	suffixStart = idx1;
    } else if (idx2 == TCL_INDEX_END) {
	suffixStart = TCL_INDEX_AFTER;
    } else if (((idx2 < TCL_INDEX_END) && (idx1 <= TCL_INDEX_END))
	    || ((idx2 >= TCL_INDEX_START) && (idx1 >= TCL_INDEX_START))) {
	suffixStart = (idx1 > idx2 + 1) ? idx1 : idx2 + 1;
    } else {
................................................................................
	}

	/* Make a list of them... */
	TclEmitInstInt4(	INST_LIST, i - 4,		envPtr);

	emptyPrefix = 0;
    }





































    if ((idx1 == suffixStart) && (parsePtr->numWords == 4)) {
	/*
	 * This is a "no-op". Example: [lreplace {a b c} 2 0]
	 * We still do a list operation to get list-verification
	 * and canonicalization side effects.
	 */

	} else {
	    OP(		NUM_TYPE);
	    OP(		DUP);
	    JUMP1(	JUMP_FALSE, end);
	}

	switch (t) {
	case STR_IS_INT:
	    PUSH(	"1");
	    OP(		EQ);
	    break;
	case STR_IS_WIDE:
	    PUSH(	"2");
	    OP(		LE);
	    break;

	case STR_IS_ENTIER:
	    PUSH(	"3");
	    OP(		LE);
	    break;
	}
	FIXJUMP1(	end);
	return TCL_OK;
................................................................................
    Tcl_Token *tokenPtr, *valueTokenPtr;
    DefineLineInformation;	/* TIP #280 */
    int first, last;

    if (parsePtr->numWords < 4 || parsePtr->numWords > 5) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }
 
    /* Bytecode to compute/push string argument being replaced */
    valueTokenPtr = TokenAfter(parsePtr->tokenPtr);
    CompileWord(envPtr, valueTokenPtr, interp, 1);

    /*
     * Check for first index known and useful at compile time. 
     */
    tokenPtr = TokenAfter(valueTokenPtr);
    if (TclGetIndexFromToken(tokenPtr, TCL_INDEX_BEFORE, TCL_INDEX_AFTER,
	    &first) != TCL_OK) {
	goto genericReplace;
    }

    /*
     * Check for last index known and useful at compile time. 
     */
    tokenPtr = TokenAfter(tokenPtr);
    if (TclGetIndexFromToken(tokenPtr, TCL_INDEX_BEFORE, TCL_INDEX_AFTER,
	    &last) != TCL_OK) {
	goto genericReplace;
    }

    /* 
     * [string replace] is an odd bird.  For many arguments it is
     * a conventional substring replacer.  However it also goes out
     * of its way to become a no-op for many cases where it would be
     * replacing an empty substring.  Precisely, it is a no-op when
     *
     *		(last < first)		OR
     *		(last < 0)		OR
................................................................................
     * The encoded indices (last >= TCL_INDEX_START) and
     * (last == TCL_INDEX_AFTER) always meet this condition but any
     * other encoded last index has some list for which it fails.
     *
     * Finally we need, third:
     *
     *		(first <= last)
     * 
     * Considered in combination with the constraints we already have,
     * we see that we can proceed when (first == TCL_INDEX_BEFORE)
     * or (last == TCL_INDEX_AFTER). These also permit simplification
     * of the prefix|replace|suffix construction. The other constraints,
     * though, interfere with getting a guarantee that first <= last. 
     */

    if ((first == TCL_INDEX_BEFORE) && (last >= TCL_INDEX_START)) {
	/* empty prefix */
	tokenPtr = TokenAfter(tokenPtr);
	CompileWord(envPtr, tokenPtr, interp, 4);
	OP4(		REVERSE, 2);
................................................................................
	OP1(		STR_CONCAT1, 2);
	return TCL_OK;
    }

	/* FLOW THROUGH TO genericReplace */

    } else {
	/* 
	 * When we have no replacement string to worry about, we may
	 * have more luck, because the forbidden empty string replacements
	 * are harmless when they are replaced by another empty string.
	 */

	if ((first == TCL_INDEX_BEFORE) || (first == TCL_INDEX_START)) {
	    /* empty prefix - build suffix only */
................................................................................
    return (character >= 0) && (character < 0x80);
}

static int
UniCharIsHexDigit(
    int character)
{
    return (character >= 0) && (character < 0x80) && isxdigit(character);
}

StringClassDesc const tclStringClassTable[] = {
    {"alnum",	Tcl_UniCharIsAlnum},
    {"alpha",	Tcl_UniCharIsAlpha},
    {"ascii",	UniCharIsAscii},
    {"control", Tcl_UniCharIsControl},

	} else {
	    OP(		NUM_TYPE);
	    OP(		DUP);
	    JUMP1(	JUMP_FALSE, end);
	}

	switch (t) {




	case STR_IS_WIDE:
	    PUSH(	"2");
	    OP(		LE);
	    break;
	case STR_IS_INT:
	case STR_IS_ENTIER:
	    PUSH(	"3");
	    OP(		LE);
	    break;
	}
	FIXJUMP1(	end);
	return TCL_OK;
................................................................................
    Tcl_Token *tokenPtr, *valueTokenPtr;
    DefineLineInformation;	/* TIP #280 */
    int first, last;

    if (parsePtr->numWords < 4 || parsePtr->numWords > 5) {
	return TCL_ERROR;
    }

    /* Bytecode to compute/push string argument being replaced */
    valueTokenPtr = TokenAfter(parsePtr->tokenPtr);
    CompileWord(envPtr, valueTokenPtr, interp, 1);

    /*
     * Check for first index known and useful at compile time.
     */
    tokenPtr = TokenAfter(valueTokenPtr);
    if (TclGetIndexFromToken(tokenPtr, TCL_INDEX_BEFORE, TCL_INDEX_AFTER,
	    &first) != TCL_OK) {
	goto genericReplace;
    }

    /*
     * Check for last index known and useful at compile time.
     */
    tokenPtr = TokenAfter(tokenPtr);
    if (TclGetIndexFromToken(tokenPtr, TCL_INDEX_BEFORE, TCL_INDEX_AFTER,
	    &last) != TCL_OK) {
	goto genericReplace;
    }

    /*
     * [string replace] is an odd bird.  For many arguments it is
     * a conventional substring replacer.  However it also goes out
     * of its way to become a no-op for many cases where it would be
     * replacing an empty substring.  Precisely, it is a no-op when
     *
     *		(last < first)		OR
     *		(last < 0)		OR
................................................................................
     * The encoded indices (last >= TCL_INDEX_START) and
     * (last == TCL_INDEX_AFTER) always meet this condition but any
     * other encoded last index has some list for which it fails.
     *
     * Finally we need, third:
     *
     *		(first <= last)
     *
     * Considered in combination with the constraints we already have,
     * we see that we can proceed when (first == TCL_INDEX_BEFORE)
     * or (last == TCL_INDEX_AFTER). These also permit simplification
     * of the prefix|replace|suffix construction. The other constraints,
     * though, interfere with getting a guarantee that first <= last.
     */

    if ((first == TCL_INDEX_BEFORE) && (last >= TCL_INDEX_START)) {
	/* empty prefix */
	tokenPtr = TokenAfter(tokenPtr);
	CompileWord(envPtr, tokenPtr, interp, 4);
	OP4(		REVERSE, 2);
................................................................................
	OP1(		STR_CONCAT1, 2);
	return TCL_OK;
    }

	/* FLOW THROUGH TO genericReplace */

    } else {
	/*
	 * When we have no replacement string to worry about, we may
	 * have more luck, because the forbidden empty string replacements
	 * are harmless when they are replaced by another empty string.
	 */

	if ((first == TCL_INDEX_BEFORE) || (first == TCL_INDEX_START)) {
	    /* empty prefix - build suffix only */
................................................................................
    return (character >= 0) && (character < 0x80);
}

static int
UniCharIsHexDigit(
    int character)
{
    return (character >= 0) && (character < 0x80) && isxdigit(UCHAR(character));
}

StringClassDesc const tclStringClassTable[] = {
    {"alnum",	Tcl_UniCharIsAlnum},
    {"alpha",	Tcl_UniCharIsAlpha},
    {"ascii",	UniCharIsAscii},
    {"control", Tcl_UniCharIsControl},

		 */

		subExprTokenPtr = parsePtr->tokenPtr + subExprTokenIdx;
		subExprTokenPtr->size = start - subExprTokenPtr->start;

		/*
		 * All the Tcl_Tokens allocated and filled belong to
		 * this subexpresion. The first token is the leading
		 * TCL_TOKEN_SUB_EXPR token, and all the rest (one fewer)
		 * are its components.
		 */

		subExprTokenPtr->numComponents =
			(parsePtr->numTokens - subExprTokenIdx) - 1;

		 */

		subExprTokenPtr = parsePtr->tokenPtr + subExprTokenIdx;
		subExprTokenPtr->size = start - subExprTokenPtr->start;

		/*
		 * All the Tcl_Tokens allocated and filled belong to
		 * this subexpression. The first token is the leading
		 * TCL_TOKEN_SUB_EXPR token, and all the rest (one fewer)
		 * are its components.
		 */

		subExprTokenPtr->numComponents =
			(parsePtr->numTokens - subExprTokenIdx) - 1;

#   define TclGetInt1AtPtr(p) ((int) *((signed char *) p))
#else
#   define TclGetInt1AtPtr(p) \
    (((int) *((char *) p)) | ((*(p) & 0200) ? (-256) : 0))
#endif

#define TclGetInt4AtPtr(p) \
    (((int) TclGetInt1AtPtr(p) << 24) |				\
		     (*((p)+1) << 16) |				\
		     (*((p)+2) <<  8) |				\
		     (*((p)+3)))

#define TclGetUInt1AtPtr(p) \
    ((unsigned int) *(p))
#define TclGetUInt4AtPtr(p) \

#   define TclGetInt1AtPtr(p) ((int) *((signed char *) p))
#else
#   define TclGetInt1AtPtr(p) \
    (((int) *((char *) p)) | ((*(p) & 0200) ? (-256) : 0))
#endif

#define TclGetInt4AtPtr(p) \
    (((int) (TclGetUInt1AtPtr(p) << 24)) |				\
		     (*((p)+1) << 16) |				\
		     (*((p)+2) <<  8) |				\
		     (*((p)+3)))

#define TclGetUInt1AtPtr(p) \
    ((unsigned int) *(p))
#define TclGetUInt4AtPtr(p) \

/* A Bison parser, made by GNU Bison 2.3.  */

/* Skeleton implementation for Bison's Yacc-like parsers in C

   Copyright (C) 1984, 1989, 1990, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
   Free Software Foundation, Inc.

   This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
   it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
   the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
   any later version.

   This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
   GNU General Public License for more details.

   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
   along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
   Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor,
   Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.  */

/* As a special exception, you may create a larger work that contains
   part or all of the Bison parser skeleton and distribute that work
   under terms of your choice, so long as that work isn't itself a
   parser generator using the skeleton or a modified version thereof
   as a parser skeleton.  Alternatively, if you modify or redistribute
   the parser skeleton itself, you may (at your option) remove this
................................................................................
   define necessary library symbols; they are noted "INFRINGES ON
   USER NAME SPACE" below.  */

/* Identify Bison output.  */
#define YYBISON 1

/* Bison version.  */
#define YYBISON_VERSION "2.3"

/* Skeleton name.  */
#define YYSKELETON_NAME "yacc.c"

/* Pure parsers.  */
#define YYPURE 1

/* Using locations.  */
#define YYLSP_NEEDED 1





/* Substitute the variable and function names.  */
#define yyparse TclDateparse
#define yylex   TclDatelex
#define yyerror TclDateerror
#define yylval  TclDatelval
#define yychar  TclDatechar
#define yydebug TclDatedebug
#define yynerrs TclDatenerrs
#define yylloc TclDatelloc

/* Tokens.  */
#ifndef YYTOKENTYPE
# define YYTOKENTYPE
   /* Put the tokens into the symbol table, so that GDB and other debuggers
      know about them.  */
   enum yytokentype {
     tAGO = 258,
     tDAY = 259,
     tDAYZONE = 260,
     tID = 261,
     tMERIDIAN = 262,
     tMONTH = 263,
     tMONTH_UNIT = 264,
     tSTARDATE = 265,
     tSEC_UNIT = 266,
     tSNUMBER = 267,
     tUNUMBER = 268,
     tZONE = 269,
     tEPOCH = 270,
     tDST = 271,
     tISOBASE = 272,
     tDAY_UNIT = 273,
     tNEXT = 274
   };
#endif
/* Tokens.  */
#define tAGO 258
#define tDAY 259
#define tDAYZONE 260
#define tID 261
#define tMERIDIAN 262
#define tMONTH 263
#define tMONTH_UNIT 264
#define tSTARDATE 265
#define tSEC_UNIT 266
#define tSNUMBER 267
#define tUNUMBER 268
#define tZONE 269
#define tEPOCH 270
#define tDST 271
#define tISOBASE 272
#define tDAY_UNIT 273
#define tNEXT 274




/* Copy the first part of user declarations.  */


/*
 * tclDate.c --
................................................................................
 *	tclGetDate.y. It should not be edited directly.
 *
 * Copyright (c) 1992-1995 Karl Lehenbauer and Mark Diekhans.
 * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
 *
 * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
 * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.

 */
#include "tclInt.h"

/*
 * Bison generates several labels that happen to be unused. MS Visual C++
 * doesn't like that, and complains. Tell it to shut up.
 */
................................................................................

typedef enum _MERIDIAN {
    MERam, MERpm, MER24
} MERIDIAN;



/* Enabling traces.  */

#ifndef YYDEBUG



# define YYDEBUG 0

#endif

/* Enabling verbose error messages.  */
#ifdef YYERROR_VERBOSE
# undef YYERROR_VERBOSE
# define YYERROR_VERBOSE 1
#else
# define YYERROR_VERBOSE 0
#endif

/* Enabling the token table.  */










#ifndef YYTOKEN_TABLE
# define YYTOKEN_TABLE 0




















#endif


#if ! defined YYSTYPE && ! defined YYSTYPE_IS_DECLARED

typedef union YYSTYPE

{

    time_t Number;
    enum _MERIDIAN Meridian;
}
/* Line 187 of yacc.c.  */



	YYSTYPE;
# define yystype YYSTYPE /* obsolescent; will be withdrawn */
# define YYSTYPE_IS_DECLARED 1
# define YYSTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL 1
#endif


#if ! defined YYLTYPE && ! defined YYLTYPE_IS_DECLARED
typedef struct YYLTYPE

{
  int first_line;
  int first_column;
  int last_line;
  int last_column;
} YYLTYPE;
# define yyltype YYLTYPE /* obsolescent; will be withdrawn */
# define YYLTYPE_IS_DECLARED 1
# define YYLTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL 1
#endif







/* Copy the second part of user declarations.  */



/*
................................................................................
				   DateInfo* info);
static time_t		ToSeconds(time_t Hours, time_t Minutes,
			    time_t Seconds, MERIDIAN Meridian);
MODULE_SCOPE int	yyparse(DateInfo*);
 


/* Line 216 of yacc.c.  */


#ifdef short
# undef short
#endif

#ifdef YYTYPE_UINT8
typedef YYTYPE_UINT8 yytype_uint8;
#else
typedef unsigned char yytype_uint8;
#endif

#ifdef YYTYPE_INT8
typedef YYTYPE_INT8 yytype_int8;
#elif (defined __STDC__ || defined __C99__FUNC__ \
     || defined __cplusplus || defined _MSC_VER)
typedef signed char yytype_int8;
#else
typedef short int yytype_int8;
#endif

#ifdef YYTYPE_UINT16
typedef YYTYPE_UINT16 yytype_uint16;
#else
typedef unsigned short int yytype_uint16;
#endif

#ifdef YYTYPE_INT16
typedef YYTYPE_INT16 yytype_int16;
#else
typedef short int yytype_int16;
#endif

#ifndef YYSIZE_T
# ifdef __SIZE_TYPE__
#  define YYSIZE_T __SIZE_TYPE__





# else
#  define YYSIZE_T size_t
# endif
#endif

#define YYSIZE_MAXIMUM ((YYSIZE_T) -1)

#ifndef YY_
# if YYENABLE_NLS
#  if ENABLE_NLS
#   include <libintl.h> /* INFRINGES ON USER NAME SPACE */
#   define YY_(msgid) dgettext ("bison-runtime", msgid)
#  endif
# endif
# ifndef YY_
#  define YY_(msgid) msgid



























# endif
#endif

/* Suppress unused-variable warnings by "using" E.  */
#if ! defined lint || defined __GNUC__
# define YYUSE(e) ((void) (e))
#else
# define YYUSE(e) /* empty */
#endif

/* Identity function, used to suppress warnings about constant conditions.  */
#ifndef lint
# define YYID(n) (n)
#else
#if (defined __STDC__ || defined __C99__FUNC__ \
     || defined __cplusplus || defined _MSC_VER)
static int
YYID (int i)
#else
static int
YYID (i)
    int i;


#endif
{
  return i;
}


#endif


#if ! defined yyoverflow || YYERROR_VERBOSE

/* The parser invokes alloca or malloc; define the necessary symbols.  */

# ifdef YYSTACK_USE_ALLOCA
#  if YYSTACK_USE_ALLOCA
................................................................................
#   elif defined _AIX
#    define YYSTACK_ALLOC __alloca
#   elif defined _MSC_VER
#    include <malloc.h> /* INFRINGES ON USER NAME SPACE */
#    define alloca _alloca
#   else
#    define YYSTACK_ALLOC alloca
#    if ! defined _ALLOCA_H && ! defined _STDLIB_H && (defined __STDC__ || defined __C99__FUNC__ \
     || defined __cplusplus || defined _MSC_VER)
#     include <stdlib.h> /* INFRINGES ON USER NAME SPACE */

#     ifndef _STDLIB_H
#      define _STDLIB_H 1
#     endif
#    endif
#   endif
#  endif
# endif

# ifdef YYSTACK_ALLOC
   /* Pacify GCC's `empty if-body' warning.  */
#  define YYSTACK_FREE(Ptr) do { /* empty */; } while (YYID (0))
#  ifndef YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM
    /* The OS might guarantee only one guard page at the bottom of the stack,
       and a page size can be as small as 4096 bytes.  So we cannot safely
       invoke alloca (N) if N exceeds 4096.  Use a slightly smaller number
       to allow for a few compiler-allocated temporary stack slots.  */
#   define YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM 4032 /* reasonable circa 2006 */
#  endif
# else
#  define YYSTACK_ALLOC YYMALLOC
#  define YYSTACK_FREE YYFREE
#  ifndef YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM
#   define YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM YYSIZE_MAXIMUM
#  endif
#  if (defined __cplusplus && ! defined _STDLIB_H \
       && ! ((defined YYMALLOC || defined malloc) \
	     && (defined YYFREE || defined free)))
#   include <stdlib.h> /* INFRINGES ON USER NAME SPACE */
#   ifndef _STDLIB_H
#    define _STDLIB_H 1
#   endif
#  endif
#  ifndef YYMALLOC
#   define YYMALLOC malloc
#   if ! defined malloc && ! defined _STDLIB_H && (defined __STDC__ || defined __C99__FUNC__ \
     || defined __cplusplus || defined _MSC_VER)
void *malloc (YYSIZE_T); /* INFRINGES ON USER NAME SPACE */
#   endif
#  endif
#  ifndef YYFREE
#   define YYFREE free
#   if ! defined free && ! defined _STDLIB_H && (defined __STDC__ || defined __C99__FUNC__ \
     || defined __cplusplus || defined _MSC_VER)
void free (void *); /* INFRINGES ON USER NAME SPACE */
#   endif
#  endif
# endif
#endif /* ! defined yyoverflow || YYERROR_VERBOSE */


#if (! defined yyoverflow \
     && (! defined __cplusplus \
	 || (defined YYLTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL && YYLTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL \
	     && defined YYSTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL && YYSTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL)))

/* A type that is properly aligned for any stack member.  */
union yyalloc
{
  yytype_int16 yyss;
  YYSTYPE yyvs;
    YYLTYPE yyls;
};

/* The size of the maximum gap between one aligned stack and the next.  */
# define YYSTACK_GAP_MAXIMUM (sizeof (union yyalloc) - 1)

/* The size of an array large to enough to hold all stacks, each with
   N elements.  */
# define YYSTACK_BYTES(N) \
     ((N) * (sizeof (yytype_int16) + sizeof (YYSTYPE) + sizeof (YYLTYPE)) \
      + 2 * YYSTACK_GAP_MAXIMUM)

/* Copy COUNT objects from FROM to TO.  The source and destination do
   not overlap.  */
# ifndef YYCOPY
#  if defined __GNUC__ && 1 < __GNUC__
#   define YYCOPY(To, From, Count) \
      __builtin_memcpy (To, From, (Count) * sizeof (*(From)))
#  else
#   define YYCOPY(To, From, Count)		\
      do					\
	{					\
	  YYSIZE_T yyi;				\
	  for (yyi = 0; yyi < (Count); yyi++)	\
	    (To)[yyi] = (From)[yyi];		\
	}					\
      while (YYID (0))
#  endif
# endif

/* Relocate STACK from its old location to the new one.  The
   local variables YYSIZE and YYSTACKSIZE give the old and new number of
   elements in the stack, and YYPTR gives the new location of the
   stack.  Advance YYPTR to a properly aligned location for the next
   stack.  */
# define YYSTACK_RELOCATE(Stack)					\
    do									\
      {									\
	YYSIZE_T yynewbytes;						\
	YYCOPY (&yyptr->Stack, Stack, yysize);				\
	Stack = &yyptr->Stack;						\
	yynewbytes = yystacksize * sizeof (*Stack) + YYSTACK_GAP_MAXIMUM; \
	yyptr += yynewbytes / sizeof (*yyptr);				\
      }									\
    while (YYID (0))

#endif





















/* YYFINAL -- State number of the termination state.  */
#define YYFINAL  2
/* YYLAST -- Last index in YYTABLE.  */
#define YYLAST   79

/* YYNTOKENS -- Number of terminals.  */
#define YYNTOKENS  26
/* YYNNTS -- Number of nonterminals.  */
#define YYNNTS  16
/* YYNRULES -- Number of rules.  */
#define YYNRULES  56
/* YYNRULES -- Number of states.  */
#define YYNSTATES  83

/* YYTRANSLATE(YYLEX) -- Bison symbol number corresponding to YYLEX.  */

#define YYUNDEFTOK  2
#define YYMAXUTOK   274

#define YYTRANSLATE(YYX)						\
  ((unsigned int) (YYX) <= YYMAXUTOK ? yytranslate[YYX] : YYUNDEFTOK)

/* YYTRANSLATE[YYLEX] -- Bison symbol number corresponding to YYLEX.  */

static const yytype_uint8 yytranslate[] =
{
       0,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,
       2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,
       2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,
       2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,
       2,     2,     2,    25,    22,    21,    24,    23,     2,     2,
................................................................................
       2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,
       2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     1,     2,     3,     4,
       5,     6,     7,     8,     9,    10,    11,    12,    13,    14,
      15,    16,    17,    18,    19
};

#if YYDEBUG
/* YYPRHS[YYN] -- Index of the first RHS symbol of rule number YYN in
   YYRHS.  */
static const yytype_uint8 yyprhs[] =
{
       0,     0,     3,     4,     7,     9,    11,    13,    15,    17,
      19,    21,    23,    25,    28,    33,    39,    46,    54,    57,
      59,    61,    63,    66,    69,    73,    76,    80,    86,    88,
      94,   100,   103,   108,   111,   113,   117,   120,   124,   128,
     136,   139,   144,   147,   149,   153,   156,   159,   163,   165,
     167,   169,   171,   173,   175,   177,   178
};

/* YYRHS -- A `-1'-separated list of the rules' RHS.  */
static const yytype_int8 yyrhs[] =
{
      27,     0,    -1,    -1,    27,    28,    -1,    29,    -1,    30,
      -1,    32,    -1,    33,    -1,    31,    -1,    36,    -1,    34,
      -1,    35,    -1,    40,    -1,    13,     7,    -1,    13,    20,
      13,    41,    -1,    13,    20,    13,    21,    13,    -1,    13,
      20,    13,    20,    13,    41,    -1,    13,    20,    13,    20,
      13,    21,    13,    -1,    14,    16,    -1,    14,    -1,     5,
      -1,     4,    -1,     4,    22,    -1,    13,     4,    -1,    38,
      13,     4,    -1,    19,     4,    -1,    13,    23,    13,    -1,
      13,    23,    13,    23,    13,    -1,    17,    -1,    13,    21,
       8,    21,    13,    -1,    13,    21,    13,    21,    13,    -1,
       8,    13,    -1,     8,    13,    22,    13,    -1,    13,     8,
      -1,    15,    -1,    13,     8,    13,    -1,    19,     8,    -1,
      19,    13,     8,    -1,    17,    14,    17,    -1,    17,    14,
      13,    20,    13,    20,    13,    -1,    17,    17,    -1,    10,
      13,    24,    13,    -1,    37,     3,    -1,    37,    -1,    38,
      13,    39,    -1,    13,    39,    -1,    19,    39,    -1,    19,
      13,    39,    -1,    39,    -1,    21,    -1,    25,    -1,    11,
      -1,    18,    -1,     9,    -1,    13,    -1,    -1,     7,    -1
};

/* YYRLINE[YYN] -- source line where rule number YYN was defined.  */
static const yytype_uint16 yyrline[] =
{
       0,   225,   225,   226,   229,   232,   235,   238,   241,   244,
     247,   251,   256,   259,   265,   271,   279,   285,   296,   300,
     304,   310,   314,   318,   322,   326,   332,   336,   341,   346,
     351,   356,   360,   365,   369,   374,   381,   385,   391,   400,
     409,   419,   433,   438,   441,   444,   447,   450,   453,   458,
     461,   466,   470,   474,   480,   498,   501






};
#endif

#if YYDEBUG || YYERROR_VERBOSE || YYTOKEN_TABLE
/* YYTNAME[SYMBOL-NUM] -- String name of the symbol SYMBOL-NUM.
   First, the terminals, then, starting at YYNTOKENS, nonterminals.  */
static const char *const yytname[] =
{
  "$end", "error", "$undefined", "tAGO", "tDAY", "tDAYZONE", "tID",
  "tMERIDIAN", "tMONTH", "tMONTH_UNIT", "tSTARDATE", "tSEC_UNIT",
  "tSNUMBER", "tUNUMBER", "tZONE", "tEPOCH", "tDST", "tISOBASE",
  "tDAY_UNIT", "tNEXT", "':'", "'-'", "','", "'/'", "'.'", "'+'",
  "$accept", "spec", "item", "time", "zone", "day", "date", "ordMonth",
  "iso", "trek", "relspec", "relunits", "sign", "unit", "number",
  "o_merid", 0
};
#endif

# ifdef YYPRINT
/* YYTOKNUM[YYLEX-NUM] -- Internal token number corresponding to
   token YYLEX-NUM.  */
static const yytype_uint16 yytoknum[] =
{
       0,   256,   257,   258,   259,   260,   261,   262,   263,   264,
     265,   266,   267,   268,   269,   270,   271,   272,   273,   274,
      58,    45,    44,    47,    46,    43
};
# endif

/* YYR1[YYN] -- Symbol number of symbol that rule YYN derives.  */
static const yytype_uint8 yyr1[] =
{

       0,    26,    27,    27,    28,    28,    28,    28,    28,    28,
      28,    28,    28,    29,    29,    29,    29,    29,    30,    30,

      30,    31,    31,    31,    31,    31,    32,    32,    32,    32,
      32,    32,    32,    32,    32,    32,    33,    33,    34,    34,

      34,    35,    36,    36,    37,    37,    37,    37,    37,    38,
      38,    39,    39,    39,    40,    41,    41
};



/* YYR2[YYN] -- Number of symbols composing right hand side of rule YYN.  */
static const yytype_uint8 yyr2[] =
{
       0,     2,     0,     2,     1,     1,     1,     1,     1,     1,
       1,     1,     1,     2,     4,     5,     6,     7,     2,     1,
       1,     1,     2,     2,     3,     2,     3,     5,     1,     5,
       5,     2,     4,     2,     1,     3,     2,     3,     3,     7,
       2,     4,     2,     1,     3,     2,     2,     3,     1,     1,
       1,     1,     1,     1,     1,     0,     1



};

/* YYDEFACT[STATE-NAME] -- Default rule to reduce with in state

   STATE-NUM when YYTABLE doesn't specify something else to do.  Zero
   means the default is an error.  */
static const yytype_uint8 yydefact[] =
{
       2,     0,     1,    21,    20,     0,    53,     0,    51,    54,
      19,    34,    28,    52,     0,    49,    50,     3,     4,     5,
       8,     6,     7,    10,    11,     9,    43,     0,    48,    12,
      22,    31,     0,    23,    13,    33,     0,     0,     0,    45,
      18,     0,    40,    25,    36,     0,    46,    42,     0,     0,
       0,    35,    55,     0,     0,    26,     0,    38,    37,    47,
      24,    44,    32,    41,    56,     0,     0,    14,     0,     0,
       0,     0,    55,    15,    29,    30,    27,     0,     0,    16,
       0,    17,    39
};








/* YYDEFGOTO[NTERM-NUM].  */
static const yytype_int8 yydefgoto[] =
{
      -1,     1,    17,    18,    19,    20,    21,    22,    23,    24,
      25,    26,    27,    28,    29,    67
};

/* YYPACT[STATE-NUM] -- Index in YYTABLE of the portion describing
   STATE-NUM.  */
#define YYPACT_NINF -22
static const yytype_int8 yypact[] =
{
     -22,     2,   -22,   -21,   -22,    -4,   -22,     1,   -22,    22,
      18,   -22,     8,   -22,    40,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,
     -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,    32,    28,   -22,   -22,
     -22,    24,    26,   -22,   -22,    42,    47,    -5,    49,   -22,
     -22,    15,   -22,   -22,   -22,    48,   -22,   -22,    43,    50,
      51,   -22,    17,    44,    46,    45,    52,   -22,   -22,   -22,
     -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,    56,    57,   -22,    58,    60,
      61,    62,    -3,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,    59,    63,   -22,
      64,   -22,   -22
};

/* YYPGOTO[NTERM-NUM].  */
static const yytype_int8 yypgoto[] =
{
     -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,
     -22,   -22,   -22,    -9,   -22,     6
};

/* YYTABLE[YYPACT[STATE-NUM]].  What to do in state STATE-NUM.  If
   positive, shift that token.  If negative, reduce the rule which
   number is the opposite.  If zero, do what YYDEFACT says.
   If YYTABLE_NINF, syntax error.  */
#define YYTABLE_NINF -1
static const yytype_uint8 yytable[] =
{
      39,    30,     2,    53,    64,    46,     3,     4,    54,    31,
       5,     6,     7,     8,    32,     9,    10,    11,    78,    12,
      13,    14,    41,    15,    64,    42,    33,    16,    56,    34,
      35,     6,    57,     8,    40,    47,    59,    65,    66,    61,
      13,    48,    36,    37,    43,    38,    49,    60,    44,     6,
................................................................................
       8,     9,    17,    11,    16,     3,    45,    20,    21,    48,
      18,    13,    20,    21,     4,    23,    22,     4,     8,     9,
      24,    11,     9,    13,    11,    13,     8,     9,    18,    11,
      13,    18,    13,    13,    13,    21,    18,    21,    23,    13,
      13,    13,    20,    13,    13,    13,    13,    13,    72,    20
};

/* YYSTOS[STATE-NUM] -- The (internal number of the) accessing
   symbol of state STATE-NUM.  */
static const yytype_uint8 yystos[] =
{
       0,    27,     0,     4,     5,     8,     9,    10,    11,    13,
      14,    15,    17,    18,    19,    21,    25,    28,    29,    30,
      31,    32,    33,    34,    35,    36,    37,    38,    39,    40,
      22,    13,    13,     4,     7,     8,    20,    21,    23,    39,
      16,    14,    17,     4,     8,    13,    39,     3,    13,    22,
      24,    13,    13,     8,    13,    13,    13,    17,     8,    39,
       4,    39,    13,    13,     7,    20,    21,    41,    21,    21,
      23,    20,    13,    13,    13,    13,    13,    13,    21,    41,
      20,    13,    13
};

#define yyerrok		(yyerrstatus = 0)
#define yyclearin	(yychar = YYEMPTY)
#define YYEMPTY		(-2)
#define YYEOF		0

#define YYACCEPT	goto yyacceptlab
#define YYABORT		goto yyabortlab
#define YYERROR		goto yyerrorlab


/* Like YYERROR except do call yyerror.  This remains here temporarily
   to ease the transition to the new meaning of YYERROR, for GCC.
   Once GCC version 2 has supplanted version 1, this can go.  */

#define YYFAIL		goto yyerrlab

#define YYRECOVERING()  (!!yyerrstatus)

#define YYBACKUP(Token, Value)					\
do								\
  if (yychar == YYEMPTY && yylen == 1)				\
    {								\
      yychar = (Token);						\
      yylval = (Value);						\
      yytoken = YYTRANSLATE (yychar);				\
      YYPOPSTACK (1);						\
      goto yybackup;						\
    }								\
  else								\
    {								\
      yyerror (&yylloc, info, YY_("syntax error: cannot back up")); \
      YYERROR;							\
    }								\
while (YYID (0))


#define YYTERROR	1
#define YYERRCODE	256



















/* YYLLOC_DEFAULT -- Set CURRENT to span from RHS[1] to RHS[N].
   If N is 0, then set CURRENT to the empty location which ends
   the previous symbol: RHS[0] (always defined).  */

#define YYRHSLOC(Rhs, K) ((Rhs)[K])
#ifndef YYLLOC_DEFAULT
# define YYLLOC_DEFAULT(Current, Rhs, N)				\
    do									\

      if (YYID (N))                                                    \
	{								\

	  (Current).first_line   = YYRHSLOC (Rhs, 1).first_line;	\
	  (Current).first_column = YYRHSLOC (Rhs, 1).first_column;	\
	  (Current).last_line    = YYRHSLOC (Rhs, N).last_line;		\
	  (Current).last_column  = YYRHSLOC (Rhs, N).last_column;	\
	}								\
      else								\
	{								\



	  (Current).first_line   = (Current).last_line   =		\
	    YYRHSLOC (Rhs, 0).last_line;				\
	  (Current).first_column = (Current).last_column =		\
	    YYRHSLOC (Rhs, 0).last_column;				\
	}								\

    while (YYID (0))
#endif



















/* YY_LOCATION_PRINT -- Print the location on the stream.
   This macro was not mandated originally: define only if we know
   we won't break user code: when these are the locations we know.  */

#ifndef YY_LOCATION_PRINT
# if YYLTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL
#  define YY_LOCATION_PRINT(File, Loc)			\
     fprintf (File, "%d.%d-%d.%d",			\
	      (Loc).first_line, (Loc).first_column,	\
	      (Loc).last_line,  (Loc).last_column)
# else
#  define YY_LOCATION_PRINT(File, Loc) ((void) 0)
# endif
#endif



/* YYLEX -- calling `yylex' with the right arguments.  */




#ifdef YYLEX_PARAM
# define YYLEX yylex (&yylval, &yylloc, YYLEX_PARAM)
#else
# define YYLEX yylex (&yylval, &yylloc, info)
#endif




/* Enable debugging if requested.  */
#if YYDEBUG




# ifndef YYFPRINTF
#  include <stdio.h> /* INFRINGES ON USER NAME SPACE */
#  define YYFPRINTF fprintf



















# endif


# define YYDPRINTF(Args)			\
do {						\
  if (yydebug)					\
    YYFPRINTF Args;				\
} while (YYID (0))

# define YY_SYMBOL_PRINT(Title, Type, Value, Location)			  \
do {									  \
  if (yydebug)								  \
    {									  \



      YYFPRINTF (stderr, "%s ", Title);					  \
      yy_symbol_print (stderr,						  \
		  Type, Value, Location, info); \
      YYFPRINTF (stderr, "\n");						  \
    }									  \

} while (YYID (0))


/*--------------------------------.
| Print this symbol on YYOUTPUT.  |
`--------------------------------*/

/*ARGSUSED*/
#if (defined __STDC__ || defined __C99__FUNC__ \
     || defined __cplusplus || defined _MSC_VER)
static void
yy_symbol_value_print (FILE *yyoutput, int yytype, YYSTYPE const * const yyvaluep, YYLTYPE const * const yylocationp, DateInfo* info)
#else
static void
yy_symbol_value_print (yyoutput, yytype, yyvaluep, yylocationp, info)
    FILE *yyoutput;
    int yytype;
    YYSTYPE const * const yyvaluep;
    YYLTYPE const * const yylocationp;
    DateInfo* info;
#endif
{
  if (!yyvaluep)
    return;


  YYUSE (yylocationp);
  YYUSE (info);


# ifdef YYPRINT
  if (yytype < YYNTOKENS)
    YYPRINT (yyoutput, yytoknum[yytype], *yyvaluep);
# else
  YYUSE (yyoutput);
# endif
  switch (yytype)
    {
      default:
	break;
    }
}


/*--------------------------------.
| Print this symbol on YYOUTPUT.  |
`--------------------------------*/

#if (defined __STDC__ || defined __C99__FUNC__ \
     || defined __cplusplus || defined _MSC_VER)
static void
yy_symbol_print (FILE *yyoutput, int yytype, YYSTYPE const * const yyvaluep, YYLTYPE const * const yylocationp, DateInfo* info)
#else
static void
yy_symbol_print (yyoutput, yytype, yyvaluep, yylocationp, info)
    FILE *yyoutput;
    int yytype;
    YYSTYPE const * const yyvaluep;
    YYLTYPE const * const yylocationp;
    DateInfo* info;
#endif
{
  if (yytype < YYNTOKENS)
    YYFPRINTF (yyoutput, "token %s (", yytname[yytype]);
  else
    YYFPRINTF (yyoutput, "nterm %s (", yytname[yytype]);


  YY_LOCATION_PRINT (yyoutput, *yylocationp);
  YYFPRINTF (yyoutput, ": ");
  yy_symbol_value_print (yyoutput, yytype, yyvaluep, yylocationp, info);
  YYFPRINTF (yyoutput, ")");
}

/*------------------------------------------------------------------.
| yy_stack_print -- Print the state stack from its BOTTOM up to its |
| TOP (included).                                                   |
`------------------------------------------------------------------*/

#if (defined __STDC__ || defined __C99__FUNC__ \
     || defined __cplusplus || defined _MSC_VER)
static void
yy_stack_print (yytype_int16 *bottom, yytype_int16 *top)
#else
static void
yy_stack_print (bottom, top)
    yytype_int16 *bottom;
    yytype_int16 *top;
#endif
{
  YYFPRINTF (stderr, "Stack now");
  for (; bottom <= top; ++bottom)



    YYFPRINTF (stderr, " %d", *bottom);

  YYFPRINTF (stderr, "\n");
}

# define YY_STACK_PRINT(Bottom, Top)				\
do {								\
  if (yydebug)							\
    yy_stack_print ((Bottom), (Top));				\
} while (YYID (0))


/*------------------------------------------------.
| Report that the YYRULE is going to be reduced.  |
`------------------------------------------------*/

#if (defined __STDC__ || defined __C99__FUNC__ \
     || defined __cplusplus || defined _MSC_VER)
static void
yy_reduce_print (YYSTYPE *yyvsp, YYLTYPE *yylsp, int yyrule, DateInfo* info)
#else
static void
yy_reduce_print (yyvsp, yylsp, yyrule, info)
    YYSTYPE *yyvsp;
    YYLTYPE *yylsp;
    int yyrule;
    DateInfo* info;
#endif
{

  int yynrhs = yyr2[yyrule];
  int yyi;
  unsigned long int yylno = yyrline[yyrule];
  YYFPRINTF (stderr, "Reducing stack by rule %d (line %lu):\n",
	     yyrule - 1, yylno);
  /* The symbols being reduced.  */
  for (yyi = 0; yyi < yynrhs; yyi++)
    {
      fprintf (stderr, "   $%d = ", yyi + 1);
      yy_symbol_print (stderr, yyrhs[yyprhs[yyrule] + yyi],

		       &(yyvsp[(yyi + 1) - (yynrhs)])
		       , &(yylsp[(yyi + 1) - (yynrhs)])		       , info);
      fprintf (stderr, "\n");
    }
}

# define YY_REDUCE_PRINT(Rule)		\
do {					\
  if (yydebug)				\
    yy_reduce_print (yyvsp, yylsp, Rule, info); \
} while (YYID (0))

/* Nonzero means print parse trace.  It is left uninitialized so that
   multiple parsers can coexist.  */
int yydebug;
#else /* !YYDEBUG */
# define YYDPRINTF(Args)
# define YY_SYMBOL_PRINT(Title, Type, Value, Location)
# define YY_STACK_PRINT(Bottom, Top)
# define YY_REDUCE_PRINT(Rule)
#endif /* !YYDEBUG */


/* YYINITDEPTH -- initial size of the parser's stacks.  */
#ifndef	YYINITDEPTH
# define YYINITDEPTH 200
#endif

/* YYMAXDEPTH -- maximum size the stacks can grow to (effective only
   if the built-in stack extension method is used).

   Do not make this value too large; the results are undefined if
................................................................................
   YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM < YYSTACK_BYTES (YYMAXDEPTH)
   evaluated with infinite-precision integer arithmetic.  */

#ifndef YYMAXDEPTH
# define YYMAXDEPTH 10000
#endif

 

#if YYERROR_VERBOSE

# ifndef yystrlen
#  if defined __GLIBC__ && defined _STRING_H
#   define yystrlen strlen
#  else
/* Return the length of YYSTR.  */
#if (defined __STDC__ || defined __C99__FUNC__ \
     || defined __cplusplus || defined _MSC_VER)
static YYSIZE_T
yystrlen (const char *yystr)
#else
static YYSIZE_T
yystrlen (yystr)
    const char *yystr;
#endif
{
  YYSIZE_T yylen;
  for (yylen = 0; yystr[yylen]; yylen++)
    continue;
  return yylen;
}
#  endif
................................................................................

# ifndef yystpcpy
#  if defined __GLIBC__ && defined _STRING_H && defined _GNU_SOURCE
#   define yystpcpy stpcpy
#  else
/* Copy YYSRC to YYDEST, returning the address of the terminating '\0' in
   YYDEST.  */
#if (defined __STDC__ || defined __C99__FUNC__ \
     || defined __cplusplus || defined _MSC_VER)
static char *
yystpcpy (char *yydest, const char *yysrc)
#else
static char *
yystpcpy (yydest, yysrc)
    char *yydest;
    const char *yysrc;
#endif
{
  char *yyd = yydest;
  const char *yys = yysrc;

  while ((*yyd++ = *yys++) != '\0')
    continue;

................................................................................
{
  if (*yystr == '"')
    {
      YYSIZE_T yyn = 0;
      char const *yyp = yystr;

      for (;;)
	switch (*++yyp)
	  {
	  case '\'':
	  case ',':
	    goto do_not_strip_quotes;

	  case '\\':
	    if (*++yyp != '\\')
	      goto do_not_strip_quotes;
	    /* Fall through.  */
	  default:
	    if (yyres)
	      yyres[yyn] = *yyp;
	    yyn++;
	    break;

	  case '"':
	    if (yyres)
	      yyres[yyn] = '\0';
	    return yyn;
	  }
    do_not_strip_quotes: ;
    }

  if (! yyres)
    return yystrlen (yystr);

  return yystpcpy (yyres, yystr) - yyres;
}
# endif


/* Copy into YYRESULT an error message about the unexpected token
   YYCHAR while in state YYSTATE.  Return the number of bytes copied,
   including the terminating null byte.  If YYRESULT is null, do not
   copy anything; just return the number of bytes that would be
   copied.  As a special case, return 0 if an ordinary "syntax error"
   message will do.  Return YYSIZE_MAXIMUM if overflow occurs during
   size calculation.  */
static YYSIZE_T
yysyntax_error (char *yyresult, int yystate, int yychar)
{






  int yyn = yypact[yystate];

  if (! (YYPACT_NINF < yyn && yyn <= YYLAST))
    return 0;
  else
    {
      int yytype = YYTRANSLATE (yychar);
      YYSIZE_T yysize0 = yytnamerr (0, yytname[yytype]);
      YYSIZE_T yysize = yysize0;
      YYSIZE_T yysize1;
      int yysize_overflow = 0;
      enum { YYERROR_VERBOSE_ARGS_MAXIMUM = 5 };



      char const *yyarg[YYERROR_VERBOSE_ARGS_MAXIMUM];


      int yyx;



# if 0
      /* This is so xgettext sees the translatable formats that are
	 constructed on the fly.  */
      YY_("syntax error, unexpected %s");
      YY_("syntax error, unexpected %s, expecting %s");
      YY_("syntax error, unexpected %s, expecting %s or %s");
      YY_("syntax error, unexpected %s, expecting %s or %s or %s");
      YY_("syntax error, unexpected %s, expecting %s or %s or %s or %s");
# endif
      char *yyfmt;
      char const *yyf;
      static char const yyunexpected[] = "syntax error, unexpected %s";
      static char const yyexpecting[] = ", expecting %s";
      static char const yyor[] = " or %s";
      char yyformat[sizeof yyunexpected
		    + sizeof yyexpecting - 1
		    + ((YYERROR_VERBOSE_ARGS_MAXIMUM - 2)
		       * (sizeof yyor - 1))];
      char const *yyprefix = yyexpecting;








      /* Start YYX at -YYN if negative to avoid negative indexes in
	 YYCHECK.  */


      int yyxbegin = yyn < 0 ? -yyn : 0;

      /* Stay within bounds of both yycheck and yytname.  */
      int yychecklim = YYLAST - yyn + 1;
      int yyxend = yychecklim < YYNTOKENS ? yychecklim : YYNTOKENS;
      int yycount = 1;

      yyarg[0] = yytname[yytype];
      yyfmt = yystpcpy (yyformat, yyunexpected);

      for (yyx = yyxbegin; yyx < yyxend; ++yyx)
	if (yycheck[yyx + yyn] == yyx && yyx != YYTERROR)

	  {
	    if (yycount == YYERROR_VERBOSE_ARGS_MAXIMUM)
	      {
		yycount = 1;
		yysize = yysize0;
		yyformat[sizeof yyunexpected - 1] = '\0';
		break;
	      }
	    yyarg[yycount++] = yytname[yyx];

	    yysize1 = yysize + yytnamerr (0, yytname[yyx]);
	    yysize_overflow |= (yysize1 < yysize);



	    yysize = yysize1;
	    yyfmt = yystpcpy (yyfmt, yyprefix);
	    yyprefix = yyor;
	  }

      yyf = YY_(yyformat);




















      yysize1 = yysize + yystrlen (yyf);
      yysize_overflow |= (yysize1 < yysize);


      yysize = yysize1;

      if (yysize_overflow)







	return YYSIZE_MAXIMUM;

      if (yyresult)
	{
	  /* Avoid sprintf, as that infringes on the user's name space.
	     Don't have undefined behavior even if the translation
	     produced a string with the wrong number of "%s"s.  */

	  char *yyp = yyresult;
	  int yyi = 0;
	  while ((*yyp = *yyf) != '\0')
	    {
	      if (*yyp == '%' && yyf[1] == 's' && yyi < yycount)
		{
		  yyp += yytnamerr (yyp, yyarg[yyi++]);
		  yyf += 2;
		}
	      else
		{
		  yyp++;
		  yyf++;
		}
	    }
	}
      return yysize;
    }
}
#endif /* YYERROR_VERBOSE */
 

/*-----------------------------------------------.
| Release the memory associated to this symbol.  |
`-----------------------------------------------*/

/*ARGSUSED*/
#if (defined __STDC__ || defined __C99__FUNC__ \
     || defined __cplusplus || defined _MSC_VER)
static void
yydestruct (const char *yymsg, int yytype, YYSTYPE *yyvaluep, YYLTYPE *yylocationp, DateInfo* info)
#else
static void
yydestruct (yymsg, yytype, yyvaluep, yylocationp, info)
    const char *yymsg;
    int yytype;
    YYSTYPE *yyvaluep;
    YYLTYPE *yylocationp;
    DateInfo* info;
#endif
{
  YYUSE (yyvaluep);
  YYUSE (yylocationp);
  YYUSE (info);

  if (!yymsg)
    yymsg = "Deleting";
  YY_SYMBOL_PRINT (yymsg, yytype, yyvaluep, yylocationp);


  switch (yytype)
    {


      default:
	break;
    }
}
 

/* Prevent warnings from -Wmissing-prototypes.  */

#ifdef YYPARSE_PARAM
#if defined __STDC__ || defined __cplusplus
int yyparse (void *YYPARSE_PARAM);
#else
int yyparse ();
#endif
#else /* ! YYPARSE_PARAM */
#if defined __STDC__ || defined __cplusplus
int yyparse (DateInfo* info);
#else
int yyparse ();
#endif
#endif /* ! YYPARSE_PARAM */






/*----------.
| yyparse.  |
`----------*/

#ifdef YYPARSE_PARAM
#if (defined __STDC__ || defined __C99__FUNC__ \
     || defined __cplusplus || defined _MSC_VER)
int
yyparse (void *YYPARSE_PARAM)
#else
int
yyparse (YYPARSE_PARAM)
    void *YYPARSE_PARAM;
#endif
#else /* ! YYPARSE_PARAM */
#if (defined __STDC__ || defined __C99__FUNC__ \
     || defined __cplusplus || defined _MSC_VER)
int
yyparse (DateInfo* info)
#else
int
yyparse (info)
    DateInfo* info;
#endif
#endif
{
  /* The look-ahead symbol.  */
int yychar;


/* The semantic value of the look-ahead symbol.  */



YYSTYPE yylval;









/* Number of syntax errors so far.  */
int yynerrs;







/* Location data for the look-ahead symbol.  */

















YYLTYPE yylloc;





  int yystate;

  int yyn;
  int yyresult;
  /* Number of tokens to shift before error messages enabled.  */
  int yyerrstatus;
  /* Look-ahead token as an internal (translated) token number.  */
  int yytoken = 0;





#if YYERROR_VERBOSE
  /* Buffer for error messages, and its allocated size.  */
  char yymsgbuf[128];
  char *yymsg = yymsgbuf;
  YYSIZE_T yymsg_alloc = sizeof yymsgbuf;
#endif

  /* Three stacks and their tools:
     `yyss': related to states,
     `yyvs': related to semantic values,
     `yyls': related to locations.

     Refer to the stacks thru separate pointers, to allow yyoverflow
     to reallocate them elsewhere.  */

  /* The state stack.  */
  yytype_int16 yyssa[YYINITDEPTH];
  yytype_int16 *yyss = yyssa;
  yytype_int16 *yyssp;

  /* The semantic value stack.  */
  YYSTYPE yyvsa[YYINITDEPTH];
  YYSTYPE *yyvs = yyvsa;
  YYSTYPE *yyvsp;

  /* The location stack.  */
  YYLTYPE yylsa[YYINITDEPTH];
  YYLTYPE *yyls = yylsa;
  YYLTYPE *yylsp;
  /* The locations where the error started and ended.  */
  YYLTYPE yyerror_range[2];

#define YYPOPSTACK(N)   (yyvsp -= (N), yyssp -= (N), yylsp -= (N))

  YYSIZE_T yystacksize = YYINITDEPTH;

  /* The variables used to return semantic value and location from the
     action routines.  */
  YYSTYPE yyval;
  YYLTYPE yyloc;

  /* The number of symbols on the RHS of the reduced rule.
     Keep to zero when no symbol should be popped.  */
  int yylen = 0;






  YYDPRINTF ((stderr, "Starting parse\n"));

  yystate = 0;
  yyerrstatus = 0;
  yynerrs = 0;
  yychar = YYEMPTY;		/* Cause a token to be read.  */

  /* Initialize stack pointers.
     Waste one element of value and location stack
     so that they stay on the same level as the state stack.
     The wasted elements are never initialized.  */

  yyssp = yyss;
  yyvsp = yyvs;
  yylsp = yyls;
#if YYLTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL
  /* Initialize the default location before parsing starts.  */
  yylloc.first_line   = yylloc.last_line   = 1;
  yylloc.first_column = yylloc.last_column = 0;
#endif

  goto yysetstate;

/*------------------------------------------------------------.
| yynewstate -- Push a new state, which is found in yystate.  |
`------------------------------------------------------------*/
 yynewstate:
  /* In all cases, when you get here, the value and location stacks
................................................................................
  if (yyss + yystacksize - 1 <= yyssp)
    {
      /* Get the current used size of the three stacks, in elements.  */
      YYSIZE_T yysize = yyssp - yyss + 1;

#ifdef yyoverflow
      {
	/* Give user a chance to reallocate the stack.  Use copies of
	   these so that the &'s don't force the real ones into
	   memory.  */
	YYSTYPE *yyvs1 = yyvs;
	yytype_int16 *yyss1 = yyss;
	YYLTYPE *yyls1 = yyls;

	/* Each stack pointer address is followed by the size of the
	   data in use in that stack, in bytes.  This used to be a
	   conditional around just the two extra args, but that might
	   be undefined if yyoverflow is a macro.  */
	yyoverflow (YY_("memory exhausted"),
		    &yyss1, yysize * sizeof (*yyssp),
		    &yyvs1, yysize * sizeof (*yyvsp),
		    &yyls1, yysize * sizeof (*yylsp),
		    &yystacksize);

	yyls = yyls1;
	yyss = yyss1;
	yyvs = yyvs1;
      }
#else /* no yyoverflow */
# ifndef YYSTACK_RELOCATE
      goto yyexhaustedlab;
# else
      /* Extend the stack our own way.  */
      if (YYMAXDEPTH <= yystacksize)
	goto yyexhaustedlab;
      yystacksize *= 2;
      if (YYMAXDEPTH < yystacksize)
	yystacksize = YYMAXDEPTH;

      {
	yytype_int16 *yyss1 = yyss;
	union yyalloc *yyptr =
	  (union yyalloc *) YYSTACK_ALLOC (YYSTACK_BYTES (yystacksize));
	if (! yyptr)
	  goto yyexhaustedlab;
	YYSTACK_RELOCATE (yyss);
	YYSTACK_RELOCATE (yyvs);
	YYSTACK_RELOCATE (yyls);
#  undef YYSTACK_RELOCATE
	if (yyss1 != yyssa)
	  YYSTACK_FREE (yyss1);
      }
# endif
#endif /* no yyoverflow */

      yyssp = yyss + yysize - 1;
      yyvsp = yyvs + yysize - 1;
      yylsp = yyls + yysize - 1;

      YYDPRINTF ((stderr, "Stack size increased to %lu\n",
		  (unsigned long int) yystacksize));

      if (yyss + yystacksize - 1 <= yyssp)
	YYABORT;
    }

  YYDPRINTF ((stderr, "Entering state %d\n", yystate));




  goto yybackup;

/*-----------.
| yybackup.  |
`-----------*/
yybackup:

  /* Do appropriate processing given the current state.  Read a
     look-ahead token if we need one and don't already have one.  */

  /* First try to decide what to do without reference to look-ahead token.  */
  yyn = yypact[yystate];
  if (yyn == YYPACT_NINF)
    goto yydefault;

  /* Not known => get a look-ahead token if don't already have one.  */

  /* YYCHAR is either YYEMPTY or YYEOF or a valid look-ahead symbol.  */
  if (yychar == YYEMPTY)
    {
      YYDPRINTF ((stderr, "Reading a token: "));
      yychar = YYLEX;
    }

  if (yychar <= YYEOF)
    {
      yychar = yytoken = YYEOF;
      YYDPRINTF ((stderr, "Now at end of input.\n"));
    }
................................................................................
     detect an error, take that action.  */
  yyn += yytoken;
  if (yyn < 0 || YYLAST < yyn || yycheck[yyn] != yytoken)
    goto yydefault;
  yyn = yytable[yyn];
  if (yyn <= 0)
    {
      if (yyn == 0 || yyn == YYTABLE_NINF)
	goto yyerrlab;
      yyn = -yyn;
      goto yyreduce;
    }

  if (yyn == YYFINAL)
    YYACCEPT;

  /* Count tokens shifted since error; after three, turn off error
     status.  */
  if (yyerrstatus)
    yyerrstatus--;

  /* Shift the look-ahead token.  */
  YY_SYMBOL_PRINT ("Shifting", yytoken, &yylval, &yylloc);

  /* Discard the shifted token unless it is eof.  */
  if (yychar != YYEOF)
    yychar = YYEMPTY;

  yystate = yyn;

  *++yyvsp = yylval;

  *++yylsp = yylloc;
  goto yynewstate;


/*-----------------------------------------------------------.
| yydefault -- do the default action for the current state.  |
`-----------------------------------------------------------*/
................................................................................
| yyreduce -- Do a reduction.  |
`-----------------------------*/
yyreduce:
  /* yyn is the number of a rule to reduce with.  */
  yylen = yyr2[yyn];

  /* If YYLEN is nonzero, implement the default value of the action:
     `$$ = $1'.

     Otherwise, the following line sets YYVAL to garbage.
     This behavior is undocumented and Bison
     users should not rely upon it.  Assigning to YYVAL
     unconditionally makes the parser a bit smaller, and it avoids a
     GCC warning that YYVAL may be used uninitialized.  */
  yyval = yyvsp[1-yylen];

  /* Default location.  */
  YYLLOC_DEFAULT (yyloc, (yylsp - yylen), yylen);

  YY_REDUCE_PRINT (yyn);
  switch (yyn)
    {
        case 4:

    {
	    yyHaveTime++;
	;}

    break;

  case 5:

    {
	    yyHaveZone++;
	;}

    break;

  case 6:

    {
	    yyHaveDate++;
	;}

    break;

  case 7:

    {
	    yyHaveOrdinalMonth++;
	;}

    break;

  case 8:

    {
	    yyHaveDay++;
	;}

    break;

  case 9:

    {
	    yyHaveRel++;
	;}

    break;

  case 10:

    {
	    yyHaveTime++;
	    yyHaveDate++;
	;}

    break;

  case 11:

    {
	    yyHaveTime++;
	    yyHaveDate++;
	    yyHaveRel++;
	;}

    break;

  case 13:

    {
	    yyHour = (yyvsp[(1) - (2)].Number);
	    yyMinutes = 0;
	    yySeconds = 0;
	    yyMeridian = (yyvsp[(2) - (2)].Meridian);
	;}


    break;

  case 14:

    {
	    yyHour = (yyvsp[(1) - (4)].Number);
	    yyMinutes = (yyvsp[(3) - (4)].Number);
	    yySeconds = 0;
	    yyMeridian = (yyvsp[(4) - (4)].Meridian);
	;}


    break;

  case 15:

    {
	    yyHour = (yyvsp[(1) - (5)].Number);
	    yyMinutes = (yyvsp[(3) - (5)].Number);
	    yyMeridian = MER24;
	    yyDSTmode = DSToff;
	    yyTimezone = ((yyvsp[(5) - (5)].Number) % 100 + ((yyvsp[(5) - (5)].Number) / 100) * 60);
	    ++yyHaveZone;
	;}


    break;

  case 16:

    {
	    yyHour = (yyvsp[(1) - (6)].Number);
	    yyMinutes = (yyvsp[(3) - (6)].Number);
	    yySeconds = (yyvsp[(5) - (6)].Number);
	    yyMeridian = (yyvsp[(6) - (6)].Meridian);
	;}


    break;

  case 17:

    {
	    yyHour = (yyvsp[(1) - (7)].Number);
	    yyMinutes = (yyvsp[(3) - (7)].Number);
	    yySeconds = (yyvsp[(5) - (7)].Number);
	    yyMeridian = MER24;
	    yyDSTmode = DSToff;
	    yyTimezone = ((yyvsp[(7) - (7)].Number) % 100 + ((yyvsp[(7) - (7)].Number) / 100) * 60);
	    ++yyHaveZone;
	;}


    break;

  case 18:

    {
	    yyTimezone = (yyvsp[(1) - (2)].Number);
	    yyDSTmode = DSTon;
	;}


    break;

  case 19:

    {
	    yyTimezone = (yyvsp[(1) - (1)].Number);
	    yyDSTmode = DSToff;
	;}


    break;

  case 20:

    {
	    yyTimezone = (yyvsp[(1) - (1)].Number);
	    yyDSTmode = DSTon;
	;}


    break;

  case 21:

    {
	    yyDayOrdinal = 1;
	    yyDayNumber = (yyvsp[(1) - (1)].Number);
	;}

    break;

  case 22:

    {
	    yyDayOrdinal = 1;
	    yyDayNumber = (yyvsp[(1) - (2)].Number);
	;}

    break;

  case 23:

    {
	    yyDayOrdinal = (yyvsp[(1) - (2)].Number);
	    yyDayNumber = (yyvsp[(2) - (2)].Number);
	;}


    break;

  case 24:

    {
	    yyDayOrdinal = (yyvsp[(1) - (3)].Number) * (yyvsp[(2) - (3)].Number);
	    yyDayNumber = (yyvsp[(3) - (3)].Number);
	;}


    break;

  case 25:

    {
	    yyDayOrdinal = 2;
	    yyDayNumber = (yyvsp[(2) - (2)].Number);
	;}

    break;

  case 26:

    {
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[(1) - (3)].Number);
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[(3) - (3)].Number);
	;}


    break;

  case 27:

    {
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[(1) - (5)].Number);
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[(3) - (5)].Number);
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[(5) - (5)].Number);
	;}


    break;

  case 28:

    {
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[(1) - (1)].Number) / 10000;
	    yyMonth = ((yyvsp[(1) - (1)].Number) % 10000)/100;
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[(1) - (1)].Number) % 100;
	;}


    break;

  case 29:

    {
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[(1) - (5)].Number);
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[(3) - (5)].Number);
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[(5) - (5)].Number);
	;}


    break;

  case 30:

    {
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[(3) - (5)].Number);
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[(5) - (5)].Number);
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[(1) - (5)].Number);
	;}


    break;

  case 31:

    {
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[(1) - (2)].Number);
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[(2) - (2)].Number);
	;}


    break;

  case 32:

    {
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[(1) - (4)].Number);
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[(2) - (4)].Number);
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[(4) - (4)].Number);
	;}


    break;

  case 33:

    {
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[(2) - (2)].Number);
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[(1) - (2)].Number);
	;}


    break;

  case 34:

    {
	    yyMonth = 1;
	    yyDay = 1;
	    yyYear = EPOCH;
	;}

    break;

  case 35:

    {
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[(2) - (3)].Number);
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[(1) - (3)].Number);
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[(3) - (3)].Number);
	;}


    break;

  case 36:

    {
	    yyMonthOrdinal = 1;
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[(2) - (2)].Number);
	;}

    break;

  case 37:

    {
	    yyMonthOrdinal = (yyvsp[(2) - (3)].Number);
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[(3) - (3)].Number);
	;}


    break;

  case 38:

    {
	    if ((yyvsp[(2) - (3)].Number) != HOUR( 7)) YYABORT;
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[(1) - (3)].Number) / 10000;
	    yyMonth = ((yyvsp[(1) - (3)].Number) % 10000)/100;
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[(1) - (3)].Number) % 100;
	    yyHour = (yyvsp[(3) - (3)].Number) / 10000;
	    yyMinutes = ((yyvsp[(3) - (3)].Number) % 10000)/100;
	    yySeconds = (yyvsp[(3) - (3)].Number) % 100;
	;}


    break;

  case 39:

    {
	    if ((yyvsp[(2) - (7)].Number) != HOUR( 7)) YYABORT;
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[(1) - (7)].Number) / 10000;
	    yyMonth = ((yyvsp[(1) - (7)].Number) % 10000)/100;
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[(1) - (7)].Number) % 100;
	    yyHour = (yyvsp[(3) - (7)].Number);
	    yyMinutes = (yyvsp[(5) - (7)].Number);
	    yySeconds = (yyvsp[(7) - (7)].Number);
	;}


    break;

  case 40:

    {
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[(1) - (2)].Number) / 10000;
	    yyMonth = ((yyvsp[(1) - (2)].Number) % 10000)/100;
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[(1) - (2)].Number) % 100;
	    yyHour = (yyvsp[(2) - (2)].Number) / 10000;
	    yyMinutes = ((yyvsp[(2) - (2)].Number) % 10000)/100;
	    yySeconds = (yyvsp[(2) - (2)].Number) % 100;
	;}


    break;

  case 41:

    {
	    /*
	     * Offset computed year by -377 so that the returned years will be
	     * in a range accessible with a 32 bit clock seconds value.
	     */

	    yyYear = (yyvsp[(2) - (4)].Number)/1000 + 2323 - 377;
	    yyDay  = 1;
	    yyMonth = 1;
	    yyRelDay += (((yyvsp[(2) - (4)].Number)%1000)*(365 + IsLeapYear(yyYear)))/1000;
	    yyRelSeconds += (yyvsp[(4) - (4)].Number) * 144 * 60;
	;}


    break;

  case 42:

    {
	    yyRelSeconds *= -1;
	    yyRelMonth *= -1;
	    yyRelDay *= -1;
	;}

    break;

  case 44:

    {
	    *yyRelPointer += (yyvsp[(1) - (3)].Number) * (yyvsp[(2) - (3)].Number) * (yyvsp[(3) - (3)].Number);
	;}


    break;

  case 45:

    {
	    *yyRelPointer += (yyvsp[(1) - (2)].Number) * (yyvsp[(2) - (2)].Number);
	;}

    break;

  case 46:

    {
	    *yyRelPointer += (yyvsp[(2) - (2)].Number);
	;}

    break;

  case 47:

    {
	    *yyRelPointer += (yyvsp[(2) - (3)].Number) * (yyvsp[(3) - (3)].Number);
	;}

    break;

  case 48:

    {
	    *yyRelPointer += (yyvsp[(1) - (1)].Number);
	;}

    break;

  case 49:

    {
	    (yyval.Number) = -1;
	;}

    break;

  case 50:

    {
	    (yyval.Number) =  1;
	;}

    break;

  case 51:

    {
	    (yyval.Number) = (yyvsp[(1) - (1)].Number);
	    yyRelPointer = &yyRelSeconds;
	;}


    break;

  case 52:

    {
	    (yyval.Number) = (yyvsp[(1) - (1)].Number);
	    yyRelPointer = &yyRelDay;
	;}


    break;

  case 53:

    {
	    (yyval.Number) = (yyvsp[(1) - (1)].Number);
	    yyRelPointer = &yyRelMonth;
	;}


    break;

  case 54:

    {
	    if (yyHaveTime && yyHaveDate && !yyHaveRel) {
		yyYear = (yyvsp[(1) - (1)].Number);
	    } else {
		yyHaveTime++;
		if (yyDigitCount <= 2) {
		    yyHour = (yyvsp[(1) - (1)].Number);
		    yyMinutes = 0;
		} else {
		    yyHour = (yyvsp[(1) - (1)].Number) / 100;
		    yyMinutes = (yyvsp[(1) - (1)].Number) % 100;
		}
		yySeconds = 0;
		yyMeridian = MER24;
	    }
	;}

    break;

  case 55:

    {
	    (yyval.Meridian) = MER24;
	;}

    break;

  case 56:

    {
	    (yyval.Meridian) = (yyvsp[(1) - (1)].Meridian);
	;}

    break;


/* Line 1267 of yacc.c.  */

      default: break;
    }











  YY_SYMBOL_PRINT ("-> $$ =", yyr1[yyn], &yyval, &yyloc);

  YYPOPSTACK (yylen);
  yylen = 0;
  YY_STACK_PRINT (yyss, yyssp);

  *++yyvsp = yyval;
  *++yylsp = yyloc;

  /* Now `shift' the result of the reduction.  Determine what state
     that goes to, based on the state we popped back to and the rule
     number reduced by.  */

  yyn = yyr1[yyn];

  yystate = yypgoto[yyn - YYNTOKENS] + *yyssp;
  if (0 <= yystate && yystate <= YYLAST && yycheck[yystate] == *yyssp)
................................................................................
    yystate = yytable[yystate];
  else
    yystate = yydefgoto[yyn - YYNTOKENS];

  goto yynewstate;


/*------------------------------------.
| yyerrlab -- here on detecting error |
`------------------------------------*/
yyerrlab:




  /* If not already recovering from an error, report this error.  */
  if (!yyerrstatus)
    {
      ++yynerrs;
#if ! YYERROR_VERBOSE
      yyerror (&yylloc, info, YY_("syntax error"));
#else


      {

	YYSIZE_T yysize = yysyntax_error (0, yystate, yychar);
	if (yymsg_alloc < yysize && yymsg_alloc < YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM)




	  {
	    YYSIZE_T yyalloc = 2 * yysize;
	    if (! (yysize <= yyalloc && yyalloc <= YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM))
	      yyalloc = YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM;
	    if (yymsg != yymsgbuf)
	      YYSTACK_FREE (yymsg);
	    yymsg = (char *) YYSTACK_ALLOC (yyalloc);
	    if (yymsg)
	      yymsg_alloc = yyalloc;
	    else
	      {
		yymsg = yymsgbuf;
		yymsg_alloc = sizeof yymsgbuf;

	      }
	  }

	if (0 < yysize && yysize <= yymsg_alloc)
	  {
	    (void) yysyntax_error (yymsg, yystate, yychar);
	    yyerror (&yylloc, info, yymsg);
	  }
	else
	  {

	    yyerror (&yylloc, info, YY_("syntax error"));
	    if (yysize != 0)

	      goto yyexhaustedlab;
	  }
      }

#endif
    }

  yyerror_range[0] = yylloc;

  if (yyerrstatus == 3)
    {
      /* If just tried and failed to reuse look-ahead token after an
	 error, discard it.  */

      if (yychar <= YYEOF)
	{
	  /* Return failure if at end of input.  */
	  if (yychar == YYEOF)
	    YYABORT;
	}
      else
	{
	  yydestruct ("Error: discarding",
		      yytoken, &yylval, &yylloc, info);
	  yychar = YYEMPTY;
	}
    }

  /* Else will try to reuse look-ahead token after shifting the error
     token.  */
  goto yyerrlab1;


/*---------------------------------------------------.
| yyerrorlab -- error raised explicitly by YYERROR.  |
`---------------------------------------------------*/
................................................................................

  /* Pacify compilers like GCC when the user code never invokes
     YYERROR and the label yyerrorlab therefore never appears in user
     code.  */
  if (/*CONSTCOND*/ 0)
     goto yyerrorlab;

  yyerror_range[0] = yylsp[1-yylen];
  /* Do not reclaim the symbols of the rule which action triggered
     this YYERROR.  */
  YYPOPSTACK (yylen);
  yylen = 0;
  YY_STACK_PRINT (yyss, yyssp);
  yystate = *yyssp;
  goto yyerrlab1;


/*-------------------------------------------------------------.
| yyerrlab1 -- common code for both syntax error and YYERROR.  |
`-------------------------------------------------------------*/
yyerrlab1:
  yyerrstatus = 3;	/* Each real token shifted decrements this.  */

  for (;;)
    {
      yyn = yypact[yystate];
      if (yyn != YYPACT_NINF)
	{
	  yyn += YYTERROR;
	  if (0 <= yyn && yyn <= YYLAST && yycheck[yyn] == YYTERROR)
	    {
	      yyn = yytable[yyn];
	      if (0 < yyn)
		break;
	    }
	}

      /* Pop the current state because it cannot handle the error token.  */
      if (yyssp == yyss)
	YYABORT;

      yyerror_range[0] = *yylsp;
      yydestruct ("Error: popping",
		  yystos[yystate], yyvsp, yylsp, info);
      YYPOPSTACK (1);
      yystate = *yyssp;
      YY_STACK_PRINT (yyss, yyssp);
    }

  if (yyn == YYFINAL)
    YYACCEPT;

  *++yyvsp = yylval;


  yyerror_range[1] = yylloc;
  /* Using YYLLOC is tempting, but would change the location of
     the look-ahead.  YYLOC is available though.  */
  YYLLOC_DEFAULT (yyloc, (yyerror_range - 1), 2);
  *++yylsp = yyloc;

  /* Shift the error token.  */
  YY_SYMBOL_PRINT ("Shifting", yystos[yyn], yyvsp, yylsp);

  yystate = yyn;
  goto yynewstate;
................................................................................
/*-----------------------------------.
| yyabortlab -- YYABORT comes here.  |
`-----------------------------------*/
yyabortlab:
  yyresult = 1;
  goto yyreturn;

#ifndef yyoverflow
/*-------------------------------------------------.
| yyexhaustedlab -- memory exhaustion comes here.  |
`-------------------------------------------------*/
yyexhaustedlab:
  yyerror (&yylloc, info, YY_("memory exhausted"));
  yyresult = 2;
  /* Fall through.  */
#endif

yyreturn:
  if (yychar != YYEOF && yychar != YYEMPTY)




     yydestruct ("Cleanup: discarding lookahead",
		 yytoken, &yylval, &yylloc, info);

  /* Do not reclaim the symbols of the rule which action triggered
     this YYABORT or YYACCEPT.  */
  YYPOPSTACK (yylen);
  YY_STACK_PRINT (yyss, yyssp);
  while (yyssp != yyss)
    {
      yydestruct ("Cleanup: popping",
		  yystos[*yyssp], yyvsp, yylsp, info);
      YYPOPSTACK (1);
    }
#ifndef yyoverflow
  if (yyss != yyssa)
    YYSTACK_FREE (yyss);
#endif
#if YYERROR_VERBOSE
  if (yymsg != yymsgbuf)
    YYSTACK_FREE (yymsg);
#endif
  /* Make sure YYID is used.  */
  return YYID (yyresult);
}




/*
 * Month and day table.
 */

static const TABLE MonthDayTable[] = {
................................................................................
    register char c;
    register char *p;
    char buff[20];
    int Count;

    location->first_column = yyInput - info->dateStart;
    for ( ; ; ) {
	while (TclIsSpaceProc(*yyInput)) {
	    yyInput++;
	}

	if (isdigit(UCHAR(c = *yyInput))) { /* INTL: digit */
	    /*
	     * Convert the string into a number; count the number of digits.
	     */
................................................................................
/*
 * Local Variables:
 * mode: c
 * c-basic-offset: 4
 * fill-column: 78
 * End:
 */

/* A Bison parser, made by GNU Bison 3.1.  */

/* Bison implementation for Yacc-like parsers in C


   Copyright (C) 1984, 1989-1990, 2000-2015, 2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

   This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
   it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
   the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
   (at your option) any later version.

   This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
   but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
   GNU General Public License for more details.

   You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
   along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.  */



/* As a special exception, you may create a larger work that contains
   part or all of the Bison parser skeleton and distribute that work
   under terms of your choice, so long as that work isn't itself a
   parser generator using the skeleton or a modified version thereof
   as a parser skeleton.  Alternatively, if you modify or redistribute
   the parser skeleton itself, you may (at your option) remove this
................................................................................
   define necessary library symbols; they are noted "INFRINGES ON
   USER NAME SPACE" below.  */

/* Identify Bison output.  */
#define YYBISON 1

/* Bison version.  */
#define YYBISON_VERSION "3.1"

/* Skeleton name.  */
#define YYSKELETON_NAME "yacc.c"

/* Pure parsers.  */
#define YYPURE 1

/* Push parsers.  */
#define YYPUSH 0

/* Pull parsers.  */
#define YYPULL 1


/* Substitute the variable and function names.  */
#define yyparse         TclDateparse
#define yylex           TclDatelex
#define yyerror         TclDateerror


#define yydebug         TclDatedebug
#define yynerrs         TclDatenerrs

















































/* Copy the first part of user declarations.  */


/*
 * tclDate.c --
................................................................................
 *	tclGetDate.y. It should not be edited directly.
 *
 * Copyright (c) 1992-1995 Karl Lehenbauer and Mark Diekhans.
 * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
 *
 * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
 * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 *
 */
#include "tclInt.h"

/*
 * Bison generates several labels that happen to be unused. MS Visual C++
 * doesn't like that, and complains. Tell it to shut up.
 */
................................................................................

typedef enum _MERIDIAN {
    MERam, MERpm, MER24
} MERIDIAN;





# ifndef YY_NULLPTR
#  if defined __cplusplus && 201103L <= __cplusplus
#   define YY_NULLPTR nullptr
#  else
#   define YY_NULLPTR 0
#  endif
# endif

/* Enabling verbose error messages.  */
#ifdef YYERROR_VERBOSE
# undef YYERROR_VERBOSE
# define YYERROR_VERBOSE 1
#else
# define YYERROR_VERBOSE 0
#endif



/* Debug traces.  */
#ifndef YYDEBUG
# define YYDEBUG 0
#endif
#if YYDEBUG
extern int TclDatedebug;
#endif

/* Token type.  */
#ifndef YYTOKENTYPE
# define YYTOKENTYPE
  enum yytokentype
  {
    tAGO = 258,
    tDAY = 259,
    tDAYZONE = 260,
    tID = 261,
    tMERIDIAN = 262,
    tMONTH = 263,
    tMONTH_UNIT = 264,
    tSTARDATE = 265,
    tSEC_UNIT = 266,
    tSNUMBER = 267,
    tUNUMBER = 268,
    tZONE = 269,
    tEPOCH = 270,
    tDST = 271,
    tISOBASE = 272,
    tDAY_UNIT = 273,
    tNEXT = 274
  };
#endif

/* Value type.  */
#if ! defined YYSTYPE && ! defined YYSTYPE_IS_DECLARED

union YYSTYPE
{


    time_t Number;
    enum _MERIDIAN Meridian;



};

typedef union YYSTYPE YYSTYPE;

# define YYSTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL 1
# define YYSTYPE_IS_DECLARED 1
#endif

/* Location type.  */
#if ! defined YYLTYPE && ! defined YYLTYPE_IS_DECLARED
typedef struct YYLTYPE YYLTYPE;
struct YYLTYPE
{
  int first_line;
  int first_column;
  int last_line;
  int last_column;
};

# define YYLTYPE_IS_DECLARED 1
# define YYLTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL 1
#endif



int TclDateparse (DateInfo* info);



/* Copy the second part of user declarations.  */



/*
................................................................................
				   DateInfo* info);
static time_t		ToSeconds(time_t Hours, time_t Minutes,
			    time_t Seconds, MERIDIAN Meridian);
MODULE_SCOPE int	yyparse(DateInfo*);
 





#ifdef short
# undef short
#endif

#ifdef YYTYPE_UINT8
typedef YYTYPE_UINT8 yytype_uint8;
#else
typedef unsigned char yytype_uint8;
#endif

#ifdef YYTYPE_INT8
typedef YYTYPE_INT8 yytype_int8;
#else

typedef signed char yytype_int8;


#endif

#ifdef YYTYPE_UINT16
typedef YYTYPE_UINT16 yytype_uint16;
#else
typedef unsigned short yytype_uint16;
#endif

#ifdef YYTYPE_INT16
typedef YYTYPE_INT16 yytype_int16;
#else
typedef short yytype_int16;
#endif

#ifndef YYSIZE_T
# ifdef __SIZE_TYPE__
#  define YYSIZE_T __SIZE_TYPE__
# elif defined size_t
#  define YYSIZE_T size_t
# elif ! defined YYSIZE_T
#  include <stddef.h> /* INFRINGES ON USER NAME SPACE */
#  define YYSIZE_T size_t
# else
#  define YYSIZE_T unsigned
# endif
#endif

#define YYSIZE_MAXIMUM ((YYSIZE_T) -1)

#ifndef YY_
# if defined YYENABLE_NLS && YYENABLE_NLS
#  if ENABLE_NLS
#   include <libintl.h> /* INFRINGES ON USER NAME SPACE */
#   define YY_(Msgid) dgettext ("bison-runtime", Msgid)
#  endif
# endif
# ifndef YY_
#  define YY_(Msgid) Msgid
# endif
#endif

#ifndef YY_ATTRIBUTE
# if (defined __GNUC__                                               \
      && (2 < __GNUC__ || (__GNUC__ == 2 && 96 <= __GNUC_MINOR__)))  \
     || defined __SUNPRO_C && 0x5110 <= __SUNPRO_C
#  define YY_ATTRIBUTE(Spec) __attribute__(Spec)
# else
#  define YY_ATTRIBUTE(Spec) /* empty */
# endif
#endif

#ifndef YY_ATTRIBUTE_PURE
# define YY_ATTRIBUTE_PURE   YY_ATTRIBUTE ((__pure__))
#endif

#ifndef YY_ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
# define YY_ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED YY_ATTRIBUTE ((__unused__))
#endif

#if !defined _Noreturn \
     && (!defined __STDC_VERSION__ || __STDC_VERSION__ < 201112)
# if defined _MSC_VER && 1200 <= _MSC_VER
#  define _Noreturn __declspec (noreturn)
# else
#  define _Noreturn YY_ATTRIBUTE ((__noreturn__))
# endif
#endif

/* Suppress unused-variable warnings by "using" E.  */
#if ! defined lint || defined __GNUC__
# define YYUSE(E) ((void) (E))
#else
# define YYUSE(E) /* empty */
#endif

#if defined __GNUC__ && ! defined __ICC && 407 <= __GNUC__ * 100 + __GNUC_MINOR__
/* Suppress an incorrect diagnostic about yylval being uninitialized.  */
# define YY_IGNORE_MAYBE_UNINITIALIZED_BEGIN \
    _Pragma ("GCC diagnostic push") \
    _Pragma ("GCC diagnostic ignored \"-Wuninitialized\"")\
    _Pragma ("GCC diagnostic ignored \"-Wmaybe-uninitialized\"")
# define YY_IGNORE_MAYBE_UNINITIALIZED_END \
    _Pragma ("GCC diagnostic pop")
#else
# define YY_INITIAL_VALUE(Value) Value
#endif
#ifndef YY_IGNORE_MAYBE_UNINITIALIZED_BEGIN
# define YY_IGNORE_MAYBE_UNINITIALIZED_BEGIN
# define YY_IGNORE_MAYBE_UNINITIALIZED_END
#endif



#ifndef YY_INITIAL_VALUE
# define YY_INITIAL_VALUE(Value) /* Nothing. */
#endif


#if ! defined yyoverflow || YYERROR_VERBOSE

/* The parser invokes alloca or malloc; define the necessary symbols.  */

# ifdef YYSTACK_USE_ALLOCA
#  if YYSTACK_USE_ALLOCA
................................................................................
#   elif defined _AIX
#    define YYSTACK_ALLOC __alloca
#   elif defined _MSC_VER
#    include <malloc.h> /* INFRINGES ON USER NAME SPACE */
#    define alloca _alloca
#   else
#    define YYSTACK_ALLOC alloca
#    if ! defined _ALLOCA_H && ! defined EXIT_SUCCESS

#     include <stdlib.h> /* INFRINGES ON USER NAME SPACE */
      /* Use EXIT_SUCCESS as a witness for stdlib.h.  */
#     ifndef EXIT_SUCCESS
#      define EXIT_SUCCESS 0
#     endif
#    endif
#   endif
#  endif
# endif

# ifdef YYSTACK_ALLOC
   /* Pacify GCC's 'empty if-body' warning.  */
#  define YYSTACK_FREE(Ptr) do { /* empty */; } while (0)
#  ifndef YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM
    /* The OS might guarantee only one guard page at the bottom of the stack,
       and a page size can be as small as 4096 bytes.  So we cannot safely
       invoke alloca (N) if N exceeds 4096.  Use a slightly smaller number
       to allow for a few compiler-allocated temporary stack slots.  */
#   define YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM 4032 /* reasonable circa 2006 */
#  endif
# else
#  define YYSTACK_ALLOC YYMALLOC
#  define YYSTACK_FREE YYFREE
#  ifndef YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM
#   define YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM YYSIZE_MAXIMUM
#  endif
#  if (defined __cplusplus && ! defined EXIT_SUCCESS \
       && ! ((defined YYMALLOC || defined malloc) \
             && (defined YYFREE || defined free)))
#   include <stdlib.h> /* INFRINGES ON USER NAME SPACE */
#   ifndef EXIT_SUCCESS
#    define EXIT_SUCCESS 0
#   endif
#  endif
#  ifndef YYMALLOC
#   define YYMALLOC malloc
#   if ! defined malloc && ! defined EXIT_SUCCESS

void *malloc (YYSIZE_T); /* INFRINGES ON USER NAME SPACE */
#   endif
#  endif
#  ifndef YYFREE
#   define YYFREE free
#   if ! defined free && ! defined EXIT_SUCCESS

void free (void *); /* INFRINGES ON USER NAME SPACE */
#   endif
#  endif
# endif
#endif /* ! defined yyoverflow || YYERROR_VERBOSE */


#if (! defined yyoverflow \
     && (! defined __cplusplus \
         || (defined YYLTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL && YYLTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL \
             && defined YYSTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL && YYSTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL)))

/* A type that is properly aligned for any stack member.  */
union yyalloc
{
  yytype_int16 yyss_alloc;
  YYSTYPE yyvs_alloc;
  YYLTYPE yyls_alloc;
};

/* The size of the maximum gap between one aligned stack and the next.  */
# define YYSTACK_GAP_MAXIMUM (sizeof (union yyalloc) - 1)

/* The size of an array large to enough to hold all stacks, each with
   N elements.  */
# define YYSTACK_BYTES(N) \
     ((N) * (sizeof (yytype_int16) + sizeof (YYSTYPE) + sizeof (YYLTYPE)) \
      + 2 * YYSTACK_GAP_MAXIMUM)





# define YYCOPY_NEEDED 1













/* Relocate STACK from its old location to the new one.  The
   local variables YYSIZE and YYSTACKSIZE give the old and new number of
   elements in the stack, and YYPTR gives the new location of the
   stack.  Advance YYPTR to a properly aligned location for the next
   stack.  */
# define YYSTACK_RELOCATE(Stack_alloc, Stack)                           \
    do                                                                  \
      {                                                                 \
        YYSIZE_T yynewbytes;                                            \
        YYCOPY (&yyptr->Stack_alloc, Stack, yysize);                    \
        Stack = &yyptr->Stack_alloc;                                    \
        yynewbytes = yystacksize * sizeof (*Stack) + YYSTACK_GAP_MAXIMUM; \
        yyptr += yynewbytes / sizeof (*yyptr);                          \
      }                                                                 \
    while (0)

#endif

#if defined YYCOPY_NEEDED && YYCOPY_NEEDED
/* Copy COUNT objects from SRC to DST.  The source and destination do
   not overlap.  */
# ifndef YYCOPY
#  if defined __GNUC__ && 1 < __GNUC__
#   define YYCOPY(Dst, Src, Count) \
      __builtin_memcpy (Dst, Src, (Count) * sizeof (*(Src)))
#  else
#   define YYCOPY(Dst, Src, Count)              \
      do                                        \
        {                                       \
          YYSIZE_T yyi;                         \
          for (yyi = 0; yyi < (Count); yyi++)   \
            (Dst)[yyi] = (Src)[yyi];            \
        }                                       \
      while (0)
#  endif
# endif
#endif /* !YYCOPY_NEEDED */

/* YYFINAL -- State number of the termination state.  */
#define YYFINAL  2
/* YYLAST -- Last index in YYTABLE.  */
#define YYLAST   79

/* YYNTOKENS -- Number of terminals.  */
#define YYNTOKENS  26
/* YYNNTS -- Number of nonterminals.  */
#define YYNNTS  16
/* YYNRULES -- Number of rules.  */
#define YYNRULES  56
/* YYNSTATES -- Number of states.  */
#define YYNSTATES  83

/* YYTRANSLATE[YYX] -- Symbol number corresponding to YYX as returned
   by yylex, with out-of-bounds checking.  */
#define YYUNDEFTOK  2
#define YYMAXUTOK   274

#define YYTRANSLATE(YYX)                                                \
  ((unsigned) (YYX) <= YYMAXUTOK ? yytranslate[YYX] : YYUNDEFTOK)

/* YYTRANSLATE[TOKEN-NUM] -- Symbol number corresponding to TOKEN-NUM
   as returned by yylex, without out-of-bounds checking.  */
static const yytype_uint8 yytranslate[] =
{
       0,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,
       2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,
       2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,
       2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,
       2,     2,     2,    25,    22,    21,    24,    23,     2,     2,
................................................................................
       2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,
       2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     2,     1,     2,     3,     4,
       5,     6,     7,     8,     9,    10,    11,    12,    13,    14,
      15,    16,    17,    18,    19
};

#if YYDEBUG



































  /* YYRLINE[YYN] -- Source line where rule number YYN was defined.  */
static const yytype_uint16 yyrline[] =
{






       0,   223,   223,   224,   227,   230,   233,   236,   239,   242,
     245,   249,   254,   257,   263,   269,   277,   283,   294,   298,
     302,   308,   312,   316,   320,   324,   330,   334,   339,   344,
     349,   354,   358,   363,   367,   372,   379,   383,   389,   398,
     407,   417,   431,   436,   439,   442,   445,   448,   451,   456,
     459,   464,   468,   472,   478,   496,   499
};
#endif

#if YYDEBUG || YYERROR_VERBOSE || 0
/* YYTNAME[SYMBOL-NUM] -- String name of the symbol SYMBOL-NUM.
   First, the terminals, then, starting at YYNTOKENS, nonterminals.  */
static const char *const yytname[] =
{
  "$end", "error", "$undefined", "tAGO", "tDAY", "tDAYZONE", "tID",
  "tMERIDIAN", "tMONTH", "tMONTH_UNIT", "tSTARDATE", "tSEC_UNIT",
  "tSNUMBER", "tUNUMBER", "tZONE", "tEPOCH", "tDST", "tISOBASE",
  "tDAY_UNIT", "tNEXT", "':'", "'-'", "','", "'/'", "'.'", "'+'",
  "$accept", "spec", "item", "time", "zone", "day", "date", "ordMonth",
  "iso", "trek", "relspec", "relunits", "sign", "unit", "number",
  "o_merid", YY_NULLPTR
};
#endif

# ifdef YYPRINT
/* YYTOKNUM[NUM] -- (External) token number corresponding to the
   (internal) symbol number NUM (which must be that of a token).  */
static const yytype_uint16 yytoknum[] =
{
       0,   256,   257,   258,   259,   260,   261,   262,   263,   264,
     265,   266,   267,   268,   269,   270,   271,   272,   273,   274,
      58,    45,    44,    47,    46,    43
};
# endif

#define YYPACT_NINF -22


#define yypact_value_is_default(Yystate) \
  (!!((Yystate) == (-22)))


#define YYTABLE_NINF -1


#define yytable_value_is_error(Yytable_value) \


  0

  /* YYPACT[STATE-NUM] -- Index in YYTABLE of the portion describing
     STATE-NUM.  */
static const yytype_int8 yypact[] =
{
     -22,     2,   -22,   -21,   -22,    -4,   -22,     1,   -22,    22,
      18,   -22,     8,   -22,    40,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,
     -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,    32,    28,   -22,   -22,
     -22,    24,    26,   -22,   -22,    42,    47,    -5,    49,   -22,
     -22,    15,   -22,   -22,   -22,    48,   -22,   -22,    43,    50,
      51,   -22,    17,    44,    46,    45,    52,   -22,   -22,   -22,
     -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,    56,    57,   -22,    58,    60,
      61,    62,    -3,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,    59,    63,   -22,
      64,   -22,   -22
};


  /* YYDEFACT[STATE-NUM] -- Default reduction number in state STATE-NUM.
     Performed when YYTABLE does not specify something else to do.  Zero
     means the default is an error.  */
static const yytype_uint8 yydefact[] =
{
       2,     0,     1,    21,    20,     0,    53,     0,    51,    54,
      19,    34,    28,    52,     0,    49,    50,     3,     4,     5,
       8,     6,     7,    10,    11,     9,    43,     0,    48,    12,
      22,    31,     0,    23,    13,    33,     0,     0,     0,    45,
      18,     0,    40,    25,    36,     0,    46,    42,     0,     0,
       0,    35,    55,     0,     0,    26,     0,    38,    37,    47,
      24,    44,    32,    41,    56,     0,     0,    14,     0,     0,
       0,     0,    55,    15,    29,    30,    27,     0,     0,    16,
       0,    17,    39
};

  /* YYPGOTO[NTERM-NUM].  */
static const yytype_int8 yypgoto[] =
{
     -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,   -22,
     -22,   -22,   -22,    -9,   -22,     6
};

  /* YYDEFGOTO[NTERM-NUM].  */
static const yytype_int8 yydefgoto[] =
{
      -1,     1,    17,    18,    19,    20,    21,    22,    23,    24,
      25,    26,    27,    28,    29,    67
};
























  /* YYTABLE[YYPACT[STATE-NUM]] -- What to do in state STATE-NUM.  If
     positive, shift that token.  If negative, reduce the rule whose

     number is the opposite.  If YYTABLE_NINF, syntax error.  */

static const yytype_uint8 yytable[] =
{
      39,    30,     2,    53,    64,    46,     3,     4,    54,    31,
       5,     6,     7,     8,    32,     9,    10,    11,    78,    12,
      13,    14,    41,    15,    64,    42,    33,    16,    56,    34,
      35,     6,    57,     8,    40,    47,    59,    65,    66,    61,
      13,    48,    36,    37,    43,    38,    49,    60,    44,     6,
................................................................................
       8,     9,    17,    11,    16,     3,    45,    20,    21,    48,
      18,    13,    20,    21,     4,    23,    22,     4,     8,     9,
      24,    11,     9,    13,    11,    13,     8,     9,    18,    11,
      13,    18,    13,    13,    13,    21,    18,    21,    23,    13,
      13,    13,    20,    13,    13,    13,    13,    13,    72,    20
};

  /* YYSTOS[STATE-NUM] -- The (internal number of the) accessing
     symbol of state STATE-NUM.  */
static const yytype_uint8 yystos[] =
{
       0,    27,     0,     4,     5,     8,     9,    10,    11,    13,
      14,    15,    17,    18,    19,    21,    25,    28,    29,    30,
      31,    32,    33,    34,    35,    36,    37,    38,    39,    40,
      22,    13,    13,     4,     7,     8,    20,    21,    23,    39,
      16,    14,    17,     4,     8,    13,    39,     3,    13,    22,
      24,    13,    13,     8,    13,    13,    13,    17,     8,    39,
       4,    39,    13,    13,     7,    20,    21,    41,    21,    21,
      23,    20,    13,    13,    13,    13,    13,    13,    21,    41,
      20,    13,    13
};

  /* YYR1[YYN] -- Symbol number of symbol that rule YYN derives.  */
static const yytype_uint8 yyr1[] =
{
       0,    26,    27,    27,    28,    28,    28,    28,    28,    28,
      28,    28,    28,    29,    29,    29,    29,    29,    30,    30,
      30,    31,    31,    31,    31,    31,    32,    32,    32,    32,
      32,    32,    32,    32,    32,    32,    33,    33,    34,    34,
      34,    35,    36,    36,    37,    37,    37,    37,    37,    38,
      38,    39,    39,    39,    40,    41,    41
};

  /* YYR2[YYN] -- Number of symbols on the right hand side of rule YYN.  */
static const yytype_uint8 yyr2[] =
{
       0,     2,     0,     2,     1,     1,     1,     1,     1,     1,
       1,     1,     1,     2,     4,     5,     6,     7,     2,     1,
       1,     1,     2,     2,     3,     2,     3,     5,     1,     5,
       5,     2,     4,     2,     1,     3,     2,     3,     3,     7,
       2,     4,     2,     1,     3,     2,     2,     3,     1,     1,
       1,     1,     1,     1,     1,     0,     1
};


#define yyerrok         (yyerrstatus = 0)
#define yyclearin       (yychar = YYEMPTY)
#define YYEMPTY         (-2)
#define YYEOF           0

#define YYACCEPT        goto yyacceptlab
#define YYABORT         goto yyabortlab
#define YYERROR         goto yyerrorlab


#define YYRECOVERING()  (!!yyerrstatus)

#define YYBACKUP(Token, Value)                                  \
do                                                              \
  if (yychar == YYEMPTY)                                        \
    {                                                           \
      yychar = (Token);                                         \
      yylval = (Value);                                         \
      YYPOPSTACK (yylen);                                       \
      yystate = *yyssp;                                         \
      goto yybackup;                                            \
    }                                                           \
  else                                                          \
    {                                                           \
      yyerror (&yylloc, info, YY_("syntax error: cannot back up")); \
      YYERROR;                                                  \
    }                                                           \
while (0)

/* Error token number */
#define YYTERROR        1
#define YYERRCODE       256


/* YYLLOC_DEFAULT -- Set CURRENT to span from RHS[1] to RHS[N].
   If N is 0, then set CURRENT to the empty location which ends
   the previous symbol: RHS[0] (always defined).  */


#ifndef YYLLOC_DEFAULT
# define YYLLOC_DEFAULT(Current, Rhs, N)                                \

    do                                                                  \
      if (N)                                                            \

        {                                                               \
          (Current).first_line   = YYRHSLOC (Rhs, 1).first_line;        \
          (Current).first_column = YYRHSLOC (Rhs, 1).first_column;      \
          (Current).last_line    = YYRHSLOC (Rhs, N).last_line;         \
          (Current).last_column  = YYRHSLOC (Rhs, N).last_column;       \



        }                                                               \
      else                                                              \
        {                                                               \
          (Current).first_line   = (Current).last_line   =              \
            YYRHSLOC (Rhs, 0).last_line;                                \
          (Current).first_column = (Current).last_column =              \
            YYRHSLOC (Rhs, 0).last_column;                              \

        }                                                               \
    while (0)
#endif

#define YYRHSLOC(Rhs, K) ((Rhs)[K])


/* Enable debugging if requested.  */
#if YYDEBUG

# ifndef YYFPRINTF
#  include <stdio.h> /* INFRINGES ON USER NAME SPACE */
#  define YYFPRINTF fprintf
# endif

# define YYDPRINTF(Args)                        \
do {                                            \
  if (yydebug)                                  \
    YYFPRINTF Args;                             \
} while (0)


/* YY_LOCATION_PRINT -- Print the location on the stream.
   This macro was not mandated originally: define only if we know
   we won't break user code: when these are the locations we know.  */

#ifndef YY_LOCATION_PRINT
# if defined YYLTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL && YYLTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL









/* Print *YYLOCP on YYO.  Private, do not rely on its existence. */


YY_ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
static unsigned
yy_location_print_ (FILE *yyo, YYLTYPE const * const yylocp)
{





  unsigned res = 0;
  int end_col = 0 != yylocp->last_column ? yylocp->last_column - 1 : 0;
  if (0 <= yylocp->first_line)
    {


      res += YYFPRINTF (yyo, "%d", yylocp->first_line);
      if (0 <= yylocp->first_column)
        res += YYFPRINTF (yyo, ".%d", yylocp->first_column);
    }



  if (0 <= yylocp->last_line)
    {
      if (yylocp->first_line < yylocp->last_line)
        {
          res += YYFPRINTF (yyo, "-%d", yylocp->last_line);
          if (0 <= end_col)
            res += YYFPRINTF (yyo, ".%d", end_col);
        }
      else if (0 <= end_col && yylocp->first_column < end_col)
        res += YYFPRINTF (yyo, "-%d", end_col);
    }
  return res;
 }

#  define YY_LOCATION_PRINT(File, Loc)          \
  yy_location_print_ (File, &(Loc))

# else
#  define YY_LOCATION_PRINT(File, Loc) ((void) 0)
# endif
#endif







# define YY_SYMBOL_PRINT(Title, Type, Value, Location)                    \



do {                                                                      \
  if (yydebug)                                                            \
    {                                                                     \
      YYFPRINTF (stderr, "%s ", Title);                                   \
      yy_symbol_print (stderr,                                            \
                  Type, Value, Location, info); \
      YYFPRINTF (stderr, "\n");                                           \

    }                                                                     \
} while (0)


/*----------------------------------------.
| Print this symbol's value on YYOUTPUT.  |
`----------------------------------------*/




static void
yy_symbol_value_print (FILE *yyoutput, int yytype, YYSTYPE const * const yyvaluep, YYLTYPE const * const yylocationp, DateInfo* info)









{


  FILE *yyo = yyoutput;
  YYUSE (yyo);
  YYUSE (yylocationp);
  YYUSE (info);
  if (!yyvaluep)
    return;
# ifdef YYPRINT
  if (yytype < YYNTOKENS)
    YYPRINT (yyoutput, yytoknum[yytype], *yyvaluep);


# endif
  YYUSE (yytype);




}


/*--------------------------------.
| Print this symbol on YYOUTPUT.  |
`--------------------------------*/



static void
yy_symbol_print (FILE *yyoutput, int yytype, YYSTYPE const * const yyvaluep, YYLTYPE const * const yylocationp, DateInfo* info)









{

  YYFPRINTF (yyoutput, "%s %s (",


             yytype < YYNTOKENS ? "token" : "nterm", yytname[yytype]);

  YY_LOCATION_PRINT (yyoutput, *yylocationp);
  YYFPRINTF (yyoutput, ": ");
  yy_symbol_value_print (yyoutput, yytype, yyvaluep, yylocationp, info);
  YYFPRINTF (yyoutput, ")");
}

/*------------------------------------------------------------------.
| yy_stack_print -- Print the state stack from its BOTTOM up to its |
| TOP (included).                                                   |
`------------------------------------------------------------------*/



static void
yy_stack_print (yytype_int16 *yybottom, yytype_int16 *yytop)






{
  YYFPRINTF (stderr, "Stack now");

  for (; yybottom <= yytop; yybottom++)
    {
      int yybot = *yybottom;
      YYFPRINTF (stderr, " %d", yybot);
    }
  YYFPRINTF (stderr, "\n");
}

# define YY_STACK_PRINT(Bottom, Top)                            \
do {                                                            \
  if (yydebug)                                                  \
    yy_stack_print ((Bottom), (Top));                           \
} while (0)


/*------------------------------------------------.
| Report that the YYRULE is going to be reduced.  |
`------------------------------------------------*/



static void
yy_reduce_print (yytype_int16 *yyssp, YYSTYPE *yyvsp, YYLTYPE *yylsp, int yyrule, DateInfo* info)








{
  unsigned long yylno = yyrline[yyrule];
  int yynrhs = yyr2[yyrule];
  int yyi;

  YYFPRINTF (stderr, "Reducing stack by rule %d (line %lu):\n",
             yyrule - 1, yylno);
  /* The symbols being reduced.  */
  for (yyi = 0; yyi < yynrhs; yyi++)
    {
      YYFPRINTF (stderr, "   $%d = ", yyi + 1);
      yy_symbol_print (stderr,
                       yystos[yyssp[yyi + 1 - yynrhs]],
                       &(yyvsp[(yyi + 1) - (yynrhs)])
                       , &(yylsp[(yyi + 1) - (yynrhs)])                       , info);
      YYFPRINTF (stderr, "\n");
    }
}

# define YY_REDUCE_PRINT(Rule)          \
do {                                    \
  if (yydebug)                          \
    yy_reduce_print (yyssp, yyvsp, yylsp, Rule, info); \
} while (0)

/* Nonzero means print parse trace.  It is left uninitialized so that
   multiple parsers can coexist.  */
int yydebug;
#else /* !YYDEBUG */
# define YYDPRINTF(Args)
# define YY_SYMBOL_PRINT(Title, Type, Value, Location)
# define YY_STACK_PRINT(Bottom, Top)
# define YY_REDUCE_PRINT(Rule)
#endif /* !YYDEBUG */


/* YYINITDEPTH -- initial size of the parser's stacks.  */
#ifndef YYINITDEPTH
# define YYINITDEPTH 200
#endif

/* YYMAXDEPTH -- maximum size the stacks can grow to (effective only
   if the built-in stack extension method is used).

   Do not make this value too large; the results are undefined if
................................................................................
   YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM < YYSTACK_BYTES (YYMAXDEPTH)
   evaluated with infinite-precision integer arithmetic.  */

#ifndef YYMAXDEPTH
# define YYMAXDEPTH 10000
#endif



#if YYERROR_VERBOSE

# ifndef yystrlen
#  if defined __GLIBC__ && defined _STRING_H
#   define yystrlen strlen
#  else
/* Return the length of YYSTR.  */


static YYSIZE_T
yystrlen (const char *yystr)





{
  YYSIZE_T yylen;
  for (yylen = 0; yystr[yylen]; yylen++)
    continue;
  return yylen;
}
#  endif
................................................................................

# ifndef yystpcpy
#  if defined __GLIBC__ && defined _STRING_H && defined _GNU_SOURCE
#   define yystpcpy stpcpy
#  else
/* Copy YYSRC to YYDEST, returning the address of the terminating '\0' in
   YYDEST.  */


static char *
yystpcpy (char *yydest, const char *yysrc)






{
  char *yyd = yydest;
  const char *yys = yysrc;

  while ((*yyd++ = *yys++) != '\0')
    continue;

................................................................................
{
  if (*yystr == '"')
    {
      YYSIZE_T yyn = 0;
      char const *yyp = yystr;

      for (;;)
        switch (*++yyp)
          {
          case '\'':
          case ',':
            goto do_not_strip_quotes;

          case '\\':
            if (*++yyp != '\\')
              goto do_not_strip_quotes;
            /* Fall through.  */
          default:
            if (yyres)
              yyres[yyn] = *yyp;
            yyn++;
            break;

          case '"':
            if (yyres)
              yyres[yyn] = '\0';
            return yyn;
          }
    do_not_strip_quotes: ;
    }

  if (! yyres)
    return yystrlen (yystr);

  return yystpcpy (yyres, yystr) - yyres;
}
# endif

/* Copy into *YYMSG, which is of size *YYMSG_ALLOC, an error message
   about the unexpected token YYTOKEN for the state stack whose top is

   YYSSP.







   Return 0 if *YYMSG was successfully written.  Return 1 if *YYMSG is
   not large enough to hold the message.  In that case, also set
   *YYMSG_ALLOC to the required number of bytes.  Return 2 if the
   required number of bytes is too large to store.  */
static int
yysyntax_error (YYSIZE_T *yymsg_alloc, char **yymsg,
                yytype_int16 *yyssp, int yytoken)
{





  YYSIZE_T yysize0 = yytnamerr (YY_NULLPTR, yytname[yytoken]);
  YYSIZE_T yysize = yysize0;


  enum { YYERROR_VERBOSE_ARGS_MAXIMUM = 5 };
  /* Internationalized format string. */
  const char *yyformat = YY_NULLPTR;
  /* Arguments of yyformat. */
  char const *yyarg[YYERROR_VERBOSE_ARGS_MAXIMUM];
  /* Number of reported tokens (one for the "unexpected", one per
     "expected"). */
  int yycount = 0;

  /* There are many possibilities here to consider:
     - If this state is a consistent state with a default action, then
       the only way this function was invoked is if the default action
       is an error action.  In that case, don't check for expected
       tokens because there are none.
     - The only way there can be no lookahead present (in yychar) is if
       this state is a consistent state with a default action.  Thus,
       detecting the absence of a lookahead is sufficient to determine
       that there is no unexpected or expected token to report.  In that
       case, just report a simple "syntax error".
     - Don't assume there isn't a lookahead just because this state is a
       consistent state with a default action.  There might have been a
       previous inconsistent state, consistent state with a non-default
       action, or user semantic action that manipulated yychar.
     - Of course, the expected token list depends on states to have
       correct lookahead information, and it depends on the parser not
       to perform extra reductions after fetching a lookahead from the
       scanner and before detecting a syntax error.  Thus, state merging
       (from LALR or IELR) and default reductions corrupt the expected
       token list.  However, the list is correct for canonical LR with
       one exception: it will still contain any token that will not be
       accepted due to an error action in a later state.
  */
  if (yytoken != YYEMPTY)
    {
      int yyn = yypact[*yyssp];
      yyarg[yycount++] = yytname[yytoken];
      if (!yypact_value_is_default (yyn))
        {
          /* Start YYX at -YYN if negative to avoid negative indexes in

             YYCHECK.  In other words, skip the first -YYN actions for
             this state because they are default actions.  */
          int yyxbegin = yyn < 0 ? -yyn : 0;

          /* Stay within bounds of both yycheck and yytname.  */
          int yychecklim = YYLAST - yyn + 1;
          int yyxend = yychecklim < YYNTOKENS ? yychecklim : YYNTOKENS;
          int yyx;




          for (yyx = yyxbegin; yyx < yyxend; ++yyx)
            if (yycheck[yyx + yyn] == yyx && yyx != YYTERROR
                && !yytable_value_is_error (yytable[yyx + yyn]))
              {
                if (yycount == YYERROR_VERBOSE_ARGS_MAXIMUM)
                  {
                    yycount = 1;
                    yysize = yysize0;

                    break;
                  }
                yyarg[yycount++] = yytname[yyx];
                {
                  YYSIZE_T yysize1 = yysize + yytnamerr (YY_NULLPTR, yytname[yyx]);

                  if (! (yysize <= yysize1
                         && yysize1 <= YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM))
                    return 2;
                  yysize = yysize1;


                }
              }

        }
    }

  switch (yycount)
    {
# define YYCASE_(N, S)                      \
      case N:                               \
        yyformat = S;                       \
      break
    default: /* Avoid compiler warnings. */
      YYCASE_(0, YY_("syntax error"));
      YYCASE_(1, YY_("syntax error, unexpected %s"));
      YYCASE_(2, YY_("syntax error, unexpected %s, expecting %s"));
      YYCASE_(3, YY_("syntax error, unexpected %s, expecting %s or %s"));
      YYCASE_(4, YY_("syntax error, unexpected %s, expecting %s or %s or %s"));
      YYCASE_(5, YY_("syntax error, unexpected %s, expecting %s or %s or %s or %s"));
# undef YYCASE_
    }

  {
    YYSIZE_T yysize1 = yysize + yystrlen (yyformat);

    if (! (yysize <= yysize1 && yysize1 <= YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM))
      return 2;
    yysize = yysize1;
  }


  if (*yymsg_alloc < yysize)
    {
      *yymsg_alloc = 2 * yysize;
      if (! (yysize <= *yymsg_alloc
             && *yymsg_alloc <= YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM))
        *yymsg_alloc = YYSTACK_ALLOC_MAXIMUM;
      return 1;
    }


  /* Avoid sprintf, as that infringes on the user's name space.
     Don't have undefined behavior even if the translation
     produced a string with the wrong number of "%s"s.  */
  {
    char *yyp = *yymsg;
    int yyi = 0;
    while ((*yyp = *yyformat) != '\0')

      if (*yyp == '%' && yyformat[1] == 's' && yyi < yycount)
        {
          yyp += yytnamerr (yyp, yyarg[yyi++]);
          yyformat += 2;
        }
      else
        {
          yyp++;
          yyformat++;
        }
  }

  return 0;
}

#endif /* YYERROR_VERBOSE */


/*-----------------------------------------------.
| Release the memory associated to this symbol.  |
`-----------------------------------------------*/




static void
yydestruct (const char *yymsg, int yytype, YYSTYPE *yyvaluep, YYLTYPE *yylocationp, DateInfo* info)









{
  YYUSE (yyvaluep);
  YYUSE (yylocationp);
  YYUSE (info);

  if (!yymsg)
    yymsg = "Deleting";
  YY_SYMBOL_PRINT (yymsg, yytype, yyvaluep, yylocationp);

  YY_IGNORE_MAYBE_UNINITIALIZED_BEGIN
  YYUSE (yytype);

  YY_IGNORE_MAYBE_UNINITIALIZED_END
}



























/*----------.
| yyparse.  |
`----------*/




int










yyparse (DateInfo* info)






{
/* The lookahead symbol.  */
int yychar;


/* The semantic value of the lookahead symbol.  */
/* Default value used for initialization, for pacifying older GCCs
   or non-GCC compilers.  */
YY_INITIAL_VALUE (static YYSTYPE yyval_default;)
YYSTYPE yylval YY_INITIAL_VALUE (= yyval_default);

/* Location data for the lookahead symbol.  */
static YYLTYPE yyloc_default
# if defined YYLTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL && YYLTYPE_IS_TRIVIAL
  = { 1, 1, 1, 1 }
# endif
;
YYLTYPE yylloc = yyloc_default;

    /* Number of syntax errors so far.  */
    int yynerrs;

    int yystate;
    /* Number of tokens to shift before error messages enabled.  */
    int yyerrstatus;

    /* The stacks and their tools:
       'yyss': related to states.
       'yyvs': related to semantic values.
       'yyls': related to locations.

       Refer to the stacks through separate pointers, to allow yyoverflow
       to reallocate them elsewhere.  */

    /* The state stack.  */
    yytype_int16 yyssa[YYINITDEPTH];
    yytype_int16 *yyss;
    yytype_int16 *yyssp;

    /* The semantic value stack.  */
    YYSTYPE yyvsa[YYINITDEPTH];
    YYSTYPE *yyvs;
    YYSTYPE *yyvsp;

    /* The location stack.  */
    YYLTYPE yylsa[YYINITDEPTH];
    YYLTYPE *yyls;
    YYLTYPE *yylsp;

    /* The locations where the error started and ended.  */
    YYLTYPE yyerror_range[3];

    YYSIZE_T yystacksize;

  int yyn;
  int yyresult;


  /* Lookahead token as an internal (translated) token number.  */
  int yytoken = 0;
  /* The variables used to return semantic value and location from the
     action routines.  */
  YYSTYPE yyval;
  YYLTYPE yyloc;

#if YYERROR_VERBOSE
  /* Buffer for error messages, and its allocated size.  */
  char yymsgbuf[128];
  char *yymsg = yymsgbuf;
  YYSIZE_T yymsg_alloc = sizeof yymsgbuf;
#endif


























#define YYPOPSTACK(N)   (yyvsp -= (N), yyssp -= (N), yylsp -= (N))








  /* The number of symbols on the RHS of the reduced rule.
     Keep to zero when no symbol should be popped.  */
  int yylen = 0;

  yyssp = yyss = yyssa;
  yyvsp = yyvs = yyvsa;
  yylsp = yyls = yylsa;
  yystacksize = YYINITDEPTH;

  YYDPRINTF ((stderr, "Starting parse\n"));

  yystate = 0;
  yyerrstatus = 0;
  yynerrs = 0;
  yychar = YYEMPTY; /* Cause a token to be read.  */








  yylsp[0] = yylloc;






  goto yysetstate;

/*------------------------------------------------------------.
| yynewstate -- Push a new state, which is found in yystate.  |
`------------------------------------------------------------*/
 yynewstate:
  /* In all cases, when you get here, the value and location stacks
................................................................................
  if (yyss + yystacksize - 1 <= yyssp)
    {
      /* Get the current used size of the three stacks, in elements.  */
      YYSIZE_T yysize = yyssp - yyss + 1;

#ifdef yyoverflow
      {
        /* Give user a chance to reallocate the stack.  Use copies of
           these so that the &'s don't force the real ones into
           memory.  */
        YYSTYPE *yyvs1 = yyvs;
        yytype_int16 *yyss1 = yyss;
        YYLTYPE *yyls1 = yyls;

        /* Each stack pointer address is followed by the size of the
           data in use in that stack, in bytes.  This used to be a
           conditional around just the two extra args, but that might
           be undefined if yyoverflow is a macro.  */
        yyoverflow (YY_("memory exhausted"),
                    &yyss1, yysize * sizeof (*yyssp),
                    &yyvs1, yysize * sizeof (*yyvsp),
                    &yyls1, yysize * sizeof (*yylsp),
                    &yystacksize);

        yyls = yyls1;
        yyss = yyss1;
        yyvs = yyvs1;
      }
#else /* no yyoverflow */
# ifndef YYSTACK_RELOCATE
      goto yyexhaustedlab;
# else
      /* Extend the stack our own way.  */
      if (YYMAXDEPTH <= yystacksize)
        goto yyexhaustedlab;
      yystacksize *= 2;
      if (YYMAXDEPTH < yystacksize)
        yystacksize = YYMAXDEPTH;

      {
        yytype_int16 *yyss1 = yyss;
        union yyalloc *yyptr =
          (union yyalloc *) YYSTACK_ALLOC (YYSTACK_BYTES (yystacksize));
        if (! yyptr)
          goto yyexhaustedlab;
        YYSTACK_RELOCATE (yyss_alloc, yyss);
        YYSTACK_RELOCATE (yyvs_alloc, yyvs);
        YYSTACK_RELOCATE (yyls_alloc, yyls);
#  undef YYSTACK_RELOCATE
        if (yyss1 != yyssa)
          YYSTACK_FREE (yyss1);
      }
# endif
#endif /* no yyoverflow */

      yyssp = yyss + yysize - 1;
      yyvsp = yyvs + yysize - 1;
      yylsp = yyls + yysize - 1;

      YYDPRINTF ((stderr, "Stack size increased to %lu\n",
                  (unsigned long) yystacksize));

      if (yyss + yystacksize - 1 <= yyssp)
        YYABORT;
    }

  YYDPRINTF ((stderr, "Entering state %d\n", yystate));

  if (yystate == YYFINAL)
    YYACCEPT;

  goto yybackup;

/*-----------.
| yybackup.  |
`-----------*/
yybackup:

  /* Do appropriate processing given the current state.  Read a
     lookahead token if we need one and don't already have one.  */

  /* First try to decide what to do without reference to lookahead token.  */
  yyn = yypact[yystate];
  if (yypact_value_is_default (yyn))
    goto yydefault;

  /* Not known => get a lookahead token if don't already have one.  */

  /* YYCHAR is either YYEMPTY or YYEOF or a valid lookahead symbol.  */
  if (yychar == YYEMPTY)
    {
      YYDPRINTF ((stderr, "Reading a token: "));
      yychar = yylex (&yylval, &yylloc, info);
    }

  if (yychar <= YYEOF)
    {
      yychar = yytoken = YYEOF;
      YYDPRINTF ((stderr, "Now at end of input.\n"));
    }
................................................................................
     detect an error, take that action.  */
  yyn += yytoken;
  if (yyn < 0 || YYLAST < yyn || yycheck[yyn] != yytoken)
    goto yydefault;
  yyn = yytable[yyn];
  if (yyn <= 0)
    {
      if (yytable_value_is_error (yyn))
        goto yyerrlab;
      yyn = -yyn;
      goto yyreduce;
    }




  /* Count tokens shifted since error; after three, turn off error
     status.  */
  if (yyerrstatus)
    yyerrstatus--;

  /* Shift the lookahead token.  */
  YY_SYMBOL_PRINT ("Shifting", yytoken, &yylval, &yylloc);

  /* Discard the shifted token.  */

  yychar = YYEMPTY;

  yystate = yyn;
  YY_IGNORE_MAYBE_UNINITIALIZED_BEGIN
  *++yyvsp = yylval;
  YY_IGNORE_MAYBE_UNINITIALIZED_END
  *++yylsp = yylloc;
  goto yynewstate;


/*-----------------------------------------------------------.
| yydefault -- do the default action for the current state.  |
`-----------------------------------------------------------*/
................................................................................
| yyreduce -- Do a reduction.  |
`-----------------------------*/
yyreduce:
  /* yyn is the number of a rule to reduce with.  */
  yylen = yyr2[yyn];

  /* If YYLEN is nonzero, implement the default value of the action:
     '$$ = $1'.

     Otherwise, the following line sets YYVAL to garbage.
     This behavior is undocumented and Bison
     users should not rely upon it.  Assigning to YYVAL
     unconditionally makes the parser a bit smaller, and it avoids a
     GCC warning that YYVAL may be used uninitialized.  */
  yyval = yyvsp[1-yylen];

  /* Default location. */
  YYLLOC_DEFAULT (yyloc, (yylsp - yylen), yylen);
  yyerror_range[1] = yyloc;
  YY_REDUCE_PRINT (yyn);
  switch (yyn)
    {
        case 4:

    {
	    yyHaveTime++;
	}

    break;

  case 5:

    {
	    yyHaveZone++;
	}

    break;

  case 6:

    {
	    yyHaveDate++;
	}

    break;

  case 7:

    {
	    yyHaveOrdinalMonth++;
	}

    break;

  case 8:

    {
	    yyHaveDay++;
	}

    break;

  case 9:

    {
	    yyHaveRel++;
	}

    break;

  case 10:

    {
	    yyHaveTime++;
	    yyHaveDate++;
	}

    break;

  case 11:

    {
	    yyHaveTime++;
	    yyHaveDate++;
	    yyHaveRel++;
	}

    break;

  case 13:

    {
	    yyHour = (yyvsp[-1].Number);
	    yyMinutes = 0;
	    yySeconds = 0;
	    yyMeridian = (yyvsp[0].Meridian);

	}

    break;

  case 14:

    {
	    yyHour = (yyvsp[-3].Number);
	    yyMinutes = (yyvsp[-1].Number);
	    yySeconds = 0;
	    yyMeridian = (yyvsp[0].Meridian);

	}

    break;

  case 15:

    {
	    yyHour = (yyvsp[-4].Number);
	    yyMinutes = (yyvsp[-2].Number);
	    yyMeridian = MER24;
	    yyDSTmode = DSToff;
	    yyTimezone = ((yyvsp[0].Number) % 100 + ((yyvsp[0].Number) / 100) * 60);
	    ++yyHaveZone;

	}

    break;

  case 16:

    {
	    yyHour = (yyvsp[-5].Number);
	    yyMinutes = (yyvsp[-3].Number);
	    yySeconds = (yyvsp[-1].Number);
	    yyMeridian = (yyvsp[0].Meridian);

	}

    break;

  case 17:

    {
	    yyHour = (yyvsp[-6].Number);
	    yyMinutes = (yyvsp[-4].Number);
	    yySeconds = (yyvsp[-2].Number);
	    yyMeridian = MER24;
	    yyDSTmode = DSToff;
	    yyTimezone = ((yyvsp[0].Number) % 100 + ((yyvsp[0].Number) / 100) * 60);
	    ++yyHaveZone;

	}

    break;

  case 18:

    {
	    yyTimezone = (yyvsp[-1].Number);
	    yyDSTmode = DSTon;

	}

    break;

  case 19:

    {
	    yyTimezone = (yyvsp[0].Number);
	    yyDSTmode = DSToff;

	}

    break;

  case 20:

    {
	    yyTimezone = (yyvsp[0].Number);
	    yyDSTmode = DSTon;

	}

    break;

  case 21:

    {
	    yyDayOrdinal = 1;
	    yyDayNumber = (yyvsp[0].Number);
	}

    break;

  case 22:

    {
	    yyDayOrdinal = 1;
	    yyDayNumber = (yyvsp[-1].Number);
	}

    break;

  case 23:

    {
	    yyDayOrdinal = (yyvsp[-1].Number);
	    yyDayNumber = (yyvsp[0].Number);

	}

    break;

  case 24:

    {
	    yyDayOrdinal = (yyvsp[-2].Number) * (yyvsp[-1].Number);
	    yyDayNumber = (yyvsp[0].Number);

	}

    break;

  case 25:

    {
	    yyDayOrdinal = 2;
	    yyDayNumber = (yyvsp[0].Number);
	}

    break;

  case 26:

    {
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[-2].Number);
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[0].Number);

	}

    break;

  case 27:

    {
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[-4].Number);
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[-2].Number);
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[0].Number);

	}

    break;

  case 28:

    {
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[0].Number) / 10000;
	    yyMonth = ((yyvsp[0].Number) % 10000)/100;
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[0].Number) % 100;

	}

    break;

  case 29:

    {
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[-4].Number);
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[-2].Number);
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[0].Number);

	}

    break;

  case 30:

    {
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[-2].Number);
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[0].Number);
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[-4].Number);

	}

    break;

  case 31:

    {
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[-1].Number);
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[0].Number);

	}

    break;

  case 32:

    {
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[-3].Number);
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[-2].Number);
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[0].Number);

	}

    break;

  case 33:

    {
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[0].Number);
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[-1].Number);

	}

    break;

  case 34:

    {
	    yyMonth = 1;
	    yyDay = 1;
	    yyYear = EPOCH;
	}

    break;

  case 35:

    {
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[-1].Number);
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[-2].Number);
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[0].Number);

	}

    break;

  case 36:

    {
	    yyMonthOrdinal = 1;
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[0].Number);
	}

    break;

  case 37:

    {
	    yyMonthOrdinal = (yyvsp[-1].Number);
	    yyMonth = (yyvsp[0].Number);

	}

    break;

  case 38:

    {
	    if ((yyvsp[-1].Number) != HOUR( 7)) YYABORT;
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[-2].Number) / 10000;
	    yyMonth = ((yyvsp[-2].Number) % 10000)/100;
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[-2].Number) % 100;
	    yyHour = (yyvsp[0].Number) / 10000;
	    yyMinutes = ((yyvsp[0].Number) % 10000)/100;
	    yySeconds = (yyvsp[0].Number) % 100;

	}

    break;

  case 39:

    {
	    if ((yyvsp[-5].Number) != HOUR( 7)) YYABORT;
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[-6].Number) / 10000;
	    yyMonth = ((yyvsp[-6].Number) % 10000)/100;
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[-6].Number) % 100;
	    yyHour = (yyvsp[-4].Number);
	    yyMinutes = (yyvsp[-2].Number);
	    yySeconds = (yyvsp[0].Number);

	}

    break;

  case 40:

    {
	    yyYear = (yyvsp[-1].Number) / 10000;
	    yyMonth = ((yyvsp[-1].Number) % 10000)/100;
	    yyDay = (yyvsp[-1].Number) % 100;
	    yyHour = (yyvsp[0].Number) / 10000;
	    yyMinutes = ((yyvsp[0].Number) % 10000)/100;
	    yySeconds = (yyvsp[0].Number) % 100;

	}

    break;

  case 41:

    {
	    /*
	     * Offset computed year by -377 so that the returned years will be
	     * in a range accessible with a 32 bit clock seconds value.
	     */

	    yyYear = (yyvsp[-2].Number)/1000 + 2323 - 377;
	    yyDay  = 1;
	    yyMonth = 1;
	    yyRelDay += (((yyvsp[-2].Number)%1000)*(365 + IsLeapYear(yyYear)))/1000;
	    yyRelSeconds += (yyvsp[0].Number) * 144 * 60;

	}

    break;

  case 42:

    {
	    yyRelSeconds *= -1;
	    yyRelMonth *= -1;
	    yyRelDay *= -1;
	}

    break;

  case 44:

    {
	    *yyRelPointer += (yyvsp[-2].Number) * (yyvsp[-1].Number) * (yyvsp[0].Number);

	}

    break;

  case 45:

    {
	    *yyRelPointer += (yyvsp[-1].Number) * (yyvsp[0].Number);
	}

    break;

  case 46:

    {
	    *yyRelPointer += (yyvsp[0].Number);
	}

    break;

  case 47:

    {
	    *yyRelPointer += (yyvsp[-1].Number) * (yyvsp[0].Number);
	}

    break;

  case 48:

    {
	    *yyRelPointer += (yyvsp[0].Number);
	}

    break;

  case 49:

    {
	    (yyval.Number) = -1;
	}

    break;

  case 50:

    {
	    (yyval.Number) =  1;
	}

    break;

  case 51:

    {
	    (yyval.Number) = (yyvsp[0].Number);
	    yyRelPointer = &yyRelSeconds;

	}

    break;

  case 52:

    {
	    (yyval.Number) = (yyvsp[0].Number);
	    yyRelPointer = &yyRelDay;

	}

    break;

  case 53:

    {
	    (yyval.Number) = (yyvsp[0].Number);
	    yyRelPointer = &yyRelMonth;

	}

    break;

  case 54:

    {
	    if (yyHaveTime && yyHaveDate && !yyHaveRel) {
		yyYear = (yyvsp[0].Number);
	    } else {
		yyHaveTime++;
		if (yyDigitCount <= 2) {
		    yyHour = (yyvsp[0].Number);
		    yyMinutes = 0;
		} else {
		    yyHour = (yyvsp[0].Number) / 100;
		    yyMinutes = (yyvsp[0].Number) % 100;
		}
		yySeconds = 0;
		yyMeridian = MER24;
	    }
	}

    break;

  case 55:

    {
	    (yyval.Meridian) = MER24;
	}

    break;

  case 56:

    {
	    (yyval.Meridian) = (yyvsp[0].Meridian);
	}

    break;




      default: break;
    }
  /* User semantic actions sometimes alter yychar, and that requires
     that yytoken be updated with the new translation.  We take the
     approach of translating immediately before every use of yytoken.
     One alternative is translating here after every semantic action,
     but that translation would be missed if the semantic action invokes
     YYABORT, YYACCEPT, or YYERROR immediately after altering yychar or
     if it invokes YYBACKUP.  In the case of YYABORT or YYACCEPT, an
     incorrect destructor might then be invoked immediately.  In the
     case of YYERROR or YYBACKUP, subsequent parser actions might lead
     to an incorrect destructor call or verbose syntax error message
     before the lookahead is translated.  */
  YY_SYMBOL_PRINT ("-> $$ =", yyr1[yyn], &yyval, &yyloc);

  YYPOPSTACK (yylen);
  yylen = 0;
  YY_STACK_PRINT (yyss, yyssp);

  *++yyvsp = yyval;
  *++yylsp = yyloc;

  /* Now 'shift' the result of the reduction.  Determine what state
     that goes to, based on the state we popped back to and the rule
     number reduced by.  */

  yyn = yyr1[yyn];

  yystate = yypgoto[yyn - YYNTOKENS] + *yyssp;
  if (0 <= yystate && yystate <= YYLAST && yycheck[yystate] == *yyssp)
................................................................................
    yystate = yytable[yystate];
  else
    yystate = yydefgoto[yyn - YYNTOKENS];

  goto yynewstate;


/*--------------------------------------.
| yyerrlab -- here on detecting error.  |
`--------------------------------------*/
yyerrlab:
  /* Make sure we have latest lookahead translation.  See comments at
     user semantic actions for why this is necessary.  */
  yytoken = yychar == YYEMPTY ? YYEMPTY : YYTRANSLATE (yychar);

  /* If not already recovering from an error, report this error.  */
  if (!yyerrstatus)
    {
      ++yynerrs;
#if ! YYERROR_VERBOSE
      yyerror (&yylloc, info, YY_("syntax error"));
#else
# define YYSYNTAX_ERROR yysyntax_error (&yymsg_alloc, &yymsg, \
                                        yyssp, yytoken)
      {
        char const *yymsgp = YY_("syntax error");
        int yysyntax_error_status;

        yysyntax_error_status = YYSYNTAX_ERROR;
        if (yysyntax_error_status == 0)
          yymsgp = yymsg;
        else if (yysyntax_error_status == 1)
          {



            if (yymsg != yymsgbuf)
              YYSTACK_FREE (yymsg);
            yymsg = (char *) YYSTACK_ALLOC (yymsg_alloc);
            if (!yymsg)


              {
                yymsg = yymsgbuf;
                yymsg_alloc = sizeof yymsgbuf;
                yysyntax_error_status = 2;
              }


            else
              {
                yysyntax_error_status = YYSYNTAX_ERROR;
                yymsgp = yymsg;
              }


          }
        yyerror (&yylloc, info, yymsgp);

        if (yysyntax_error_status == 2)
          goto yyexhaustedlab;
      }

# undef YYSYNTAX_ERROR
#endif
    }

  yyerror_range[1] = yylloc;

  if (yyerrstatus == 3)
    {
      /* If just tried and failed to reuse lookahead token after an
         error, discard it.  */

      if (yychar <= YYEOF)
        {
          /* Return failure if at end of input.  */
          if (yychar == YYEOF)
            YYABORT;
        }
      else
        {
          yydestruct ("Error: discarding",
                      yytoken, &yylval, &yylloc, info);
          yychar = YYEMPTY;
        }
    }

  /* Else will try to reuse lookahead token after shifting the error
     token.  */
  goto yyerrlab1;


/*---------------------------------------------------.
| yyerrorlab -- error raised explicitly by YYERROR.  |
`---------------------------------------------------*/
................................................................................

  /* Pacify compilers like GCC when the user code never invokes
     YYERROR and the label yyerrorlab therefore never appears in user
     code.  */
  if (/*CONSTCOND*/ 0)
     goto yyerrorlab;


  /* Do not reclaim the symbols of the rule whose action triggered
     this YYERROR.  */
  YYPOPSTACK (yylen);
  yylen = 0;
  YY_STACK_PRINT (yyss, yyssp);
  yystate = *yyssp;
  goto yyerrlab1;


/*-------------------------------------------------------------.
| yyerrlab1 -- common code for both syntax error and YYERROR.  |
`-------------------------------------------------------------*/
yyerrlab1:
  yyerrstatus = 3;      /* Each real token shifted decrements this.  */

  for (;;)
    {
      yyn = yypact[yystate];
      if (!yypact_value_is_default (yyn))
        {
          yyn += YYTERROR;
          if (0 <= yyn && yyn <= YYLAST && yycheck[yyn] == YYTERROR)
            {
              yyn = yytable[yyn];
              if (0 < yyn)
                break;
            }
        }

      /* Pop the current state because it cannot handle the error token.  */
      if (yyssp == yyss)
        YYABORT;

      yyerror_range[1] = *yylsp;
      yydestruct ("Error: popping",
                  yystos[yystate], yyvsp, yylsp, info);
      YYPOPSTACK (1);
      yystate = *yyssp;
      YY_STACK_PRINT (yyss, yyssp);
    }

  YY_IGNORE_MAYBE_UNINITIALIZED_BEGIN


  *++yyvsp = yylval;
  YY_IGNORE_MAYBE_UNINITIALIZED_END

  yyerror_range[2] = yylloc;
  /* Using YYLLOC is tempting, but would change the location of
     the lookahead.  YYLOC is available though.  */
  YYLLOC_DEFAULT (yyloc, yyerror_range, 2);
  *++yylsp = yyloc;

  /* Shift the error token.  */
  YY_SYMBOL_PRINT ("Shifting", yystos[yyn], yyvsp, yylsp);

  yystate = yyn;
  goto yynewstate;
................................................................................
/*-----------------------------------.
| yyabortlab -- YYABORT comes here.  |
`-----------------------------------*/
yyabortlab:
  yyresult = 1;
  goto yyreturn;

#if !defined yyoverflow || YYERROR_VERBOSE
/*-------------------------------------------------.
| yyexhaustedlab -- memory exhaustion comes here.  |
`-------------------------------------------------*/
yyexhaustedlab:
  yyerror (&yylloc, info, YY_("memory exhausted"));
  yyresult = 2;
  /* Fall through.  */
#endif

yyreturn:
  if (yychar != YYEMPTY)
    {
      /* Make sure we have latest lookahead translation.  See comments at
         user semantic actions for why this is necessary.  */
      yytoken = YYTRANSLATE (yychar);
      yydestruct ("Cleanup: discarding lookahead",
                  yytoken, &yylval, &yylloc, info);
    }
  /* Do not reclaim the symbols of the rule whose action triggered
     this YYABORT or YYACCEPT.  */
  YYPOPSTACK (yylen);
  YY_STACK_PRINT (yyss, yyssp);
  while (yyssp != yyss)
    {
      yydestruct ("Cleanup: popping",
                  yystos[*yyssp], yyvsp, yylsp, info);
      YYPOPSTACK (1);
    }
#ifndef yyoverflow
  if (yyss != yyssa)
    YYSTACK_FREE (yyss);
#endif
#if YYERROR_VERBOSE
  if (yymsg != yymsgbuf)
    YYSTACK_FREE (yymsg);
#endif

  return yyresult;
}




/*
 * Month and day table.
 */

static const TABLE MonthDayTable[] = {
................................................................................
    register char c;
    register char *p;
    char buff[20];
    int Count;

    location->first_column = yyInput - info->dateStart;
    for ( ; ; ) {
	while (TclIsSpaceProc(UCHAR(*yyInput))) {
	    yyInput++;
	}

	if (isdigit(UCHAR(c = *yyInput))) { /* INTL: digit */
	    /*
	     * Convert the string into a number; count the number of digits.
	     */
................................................................................
/*
 * Local Variables:
 * mode: c
 * c-basic-offset: 4
 * fill-column: 78
 * End:
 */